fx-9750G PLUS

CFX-9850G PLUS
CFX-9850GB PLUS
CFX-9850GC PLUS
CFX-9950GB PLUS
User’s Guide

E http://world.casio.com/edu_e/
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 fx-9750G PLUS owners...
This manual covers the operations of various different calculator models. Note the meaning of the following
symbols when using this manual.

Symbol Meaning

CFX Indicates information about a function that is not supported by the fx-9750G PLUS.
You can skip any information that has this mark next to it.

8-1 Before Trying to Draw a Graph

k Entering the Graph Mode
On the Main Menu, select the GRAPH icon and enter the GRAPH Mode. When
you do, the Graph Function menu appears on the display. You can use this menu
to store, edit, and recall functions and to draw their graphs.

Memory area
Use f and c to change selection.

• {SEL} ... {draw/non-draw status}

• {DEL} ... {function delete}
• {TYPE} ... {graph type menu}
• {COLR} ... {graph color}
CFX
• {GMEM} ... {graph memory save/recall}
• {DRAW} ... {graph draw}

indicates {COLR} is not supported by the fx-9750G PLUS.

CFX

CASIO ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.

Unit 6, 1000 North Circular Road,
London NW2 7JD, U.K.

Important!
Please keep your manual and all information handy for
future reference.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 BEFORE USING THE CALCULATOR
FOR THE FIRST TIME...
Be sure to perform the following procedure to load batteries, reset the calculator, and
adjust the contrast before trying to use the calculator for the first time.

1. Making sure that you do not accidently press the o key, attach the case to the
calculator and then turn the calculator over. Remove the back cover from the calculator
by pulling with your finger at the point marked 1.

2. Load the four batteries that come with calculator.

• Make sure that the positive (+) and negative (–) ends of the batteries are facing
correctly.

BACK UP

3. Remove the insulating sheet at the location marked “BACK UP” by pulling in the
direction indicated by the arrow.

BACK UP

4. Replace the back cover, making sure that its tabs enter the holes marked 2 and turn
the calculator front side up. The calculator should automatically turn on power and
perform the memory reset operation.

i
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. Press m.

* The above shows the CFX-9850 * The above shows the fx-9750G
(9950)G(B) PLUS screen. PLUS screen.

• If the Main Menu shown above is not on the display,

press the P button on the back of the calculator to
perform memory reset.
P button

6. Use the cursor keys (f, c, d, e) to select the CONT icon and press
E

w or simply press c to display the contrast adjustment screen.

CFX-9850(9950)GB PLUS, fx-9750G PLUS

CFX-9850G PLUS
7. Adjust the contrast.

uTo adjust the contrast

• Use f and c to move the pointer to CONTRAST.
CFX
• Press e to make the figures on the display darker, and d to make them
lighter.

uTo adjust the tint

CFX
1. Use f and c to move the pointer to the color you want to adjust (ORANGE,
BLUE, or GREEN).
2. Press e to add more green to the color, and d to add more orange.

8. To exit display contrast adjustment, press m.

ii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 CFX
ABOUT THE COLOR DISPLAY
The display uses three colors: orange, blue, and green, to make data easier to
understand.

• Main Menu • Display Color Adjustment

• Graph Function Menu

• Graph Display (Example 1) • Graph Display (Example 2)

• Graph-To-Table Display • Dynamic Graph Display

• Table & Graph Numeric Table • Recursion Formula Convergence/

Divergence Graph Example

iii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • Statistical Regression Graph Example
CFX

• When you draw a graph or run a program, any comment text normally appears
on the display in blue. You can, however, change the color of comment text to
orange or green.

Example: To draw a sine curve

1. Enter the GRAPH Mode and input the following.

3(TYPE)1(Y=)
(Specifies rectangular coordinates.)

svwf 45

(Stores the expression.)

2. 4(COLR)
2
3456
• Press the function key that corresponds to the color you want to use for the
graph:

1 for blue, 2 for orange, 3 for green.

3. 2(Orng)
(Specifies the graph color.)

J 6

4. 6(DRAW)
(Draws the graph)

You can also draw multiple graphs of different color on the same screen, making
each one distinct and easy to view.
iv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 KEYS

Alpha Lock
Normally, once you press a and then a key to input an alphabetic character, the key-
board reverts to its primary functions immediately. If you press ! and then a, the
keyboard locks in alpha input until you press a again.

v
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 KEY TABLE

Page Page Page Page Page Page

128 132 113 154 144 120

369 4
2 27 28 3

47 46

2 47 46
46 46 45 45 45

46 46 45 45 45

49 47 47

49 49 36 36 22

Page Page Page Page Page

21
20

36 36

36 36

45 39
36 36

vi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start

Turning Power On And Off

Using Modes
Basic Calculations
Replay Features
Fraction Calculations
Exponents
Graph Functions
Dual Graph
Box Zoom
Dynamic Graph
Table Function

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Quick-Start
Welcome to the world of graphing calculators.
Quick-Start is not a complete tutorial, but it takes you through many of the most common
functions, from turning the power on, to specifying colors, and on to graphing complex
equations. When you’re done, you’ll have mastered the basic operation of this calculator and
will be ready to proceed with the rest of this user’s guide to learn the entire spectrum of
functions available.
Each step of the examples in Quick-Start is shown graphically to help you follow along
quickly and easily. When you need to enter the number 57, for example, we’ve indicated it
as follows:
Press fh
Whenever necessary, we’ve included samples of what your screen should look like.
If you find that your screen doesn’t match the sample, you can restart from the beginning
by pressing the “All Clear” button . o

TURNING POWER ON AND OFF

To turn power on, press o.
OFF

To turn power off, press ! o.

Note that the calculator automatically turns power off if you do not perform any operation
for about six minutes (about 60 minutes when a calculation is stopped by an output
command (^)).

USING MODES
This calculator makes it easy to perform a wide range of calculations by simply selecting
the appropriate mode. Before getting into actual calculations and operation examples, let’s
take a look at how to navigate around the modes.

To select the RUN Mode

1. Press m to display the Main Menu.

* The above shows the CFX-9850

(9950)G(B) PLUS screen.

viii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start

2. Use defc to highlight RUN and then

press w.

This is the initial screen of the RUN mode, where you

can perform manual calculations, and run programs.

BASIC CALCULATIONS
With manual calculations, you input formulas from left to right, just as they are written on
paper. With formulas that include mixed arithmetic operators and parentheses, the calcula-
tor automatically applies true algebraic logic to calculate the result.

Example: 15 × 3 + 61

1. Press o to clear the calculator.

2. Press bf*d+gbw.

Parentheses Calculations
Example: 15 × (3 + 61)

1. Press bf*(d
+gb)w.

Built-In Functions
This calculator includes a number of built-in scientific functions, including trigonometric
and logarithmic functions.

Example: 25 × sin 45˚

Important!
Be sure that you specify Deg (degrees) as the angle unit before you try this
example.
ix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start

1. Press o.
SET UP

2. Press ! m to switch the set up display.

3. Press cccc1 (Deg) to specify

degrees as the angle unit.

4. Press J to clear the menu.

5. Press o to clear the unit.
6. Press cf*sefw.

REPLAY FEATURES
With the replay feature, simply press d eor to recall the last calculation that was
performed. This recalls the calculation so you can make changes or re-execute it as it is.

Example: To change the calculation in the last example from (25 × sin 45˚) to (25 × sin
55˚)

1. Press d to display the last calculation.

2. Press d twice to move the cursor under the 4.
3. Press f.
4. Press w to execute the calculation again.

x
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start
FRACTION CALCULATIONS
You can use the $
key to input fractions into calculations. The symbol “ { ” is used
to separate the various parts of a fraction.

Example: 1 15/16 + 37/9

1. Press o.
2. Press b$bf$
bg+dh$
jw.
Indicates 6 7/144

Converting a Mixed Fraction to an Improper Fraction

d/c

While a mixed fraction is shown on the display, press ! $ to convert it to an

improper fraction.
d/c

Press ! $ again to convert back to a mixed fraction.

Converting a Fraction to Its Decimal Equivalent

While a fraction is shown on the display, press M to convert it to its decimal equiva-
lent.
Press M again to convert back to a fraction.

xi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start
EXPONENTS
Example: 1250 × 2.065

1. Press o.
2. Press bcfa*c.ag.
3. Press M and the ^ indicator appears on the display.
4. Press f
. The ^5 on the display indicates that 5 is
an exponent.

5. Press w.

xii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start

GRAPH FUNCTIONS
The graphing capabilities of this calculator makes it possible to draw complex graphs
using either rectangular coordinates (horizontal axis: x ; vertical axis: y) or polar coordi-
nates (angle: θ ; distance from origin: r).

Example 1: To graph Y = X(X + 1)(X – 2)

1. Press m.
2. Use d, e, f, and c to highlight GRAPH,
and then press w.

3. Input the formula.

v (v+b)
(v -c)w

4. Press 6 (DRAW) or w to draw the graph.

Example 2: To determine the roots of Y = X(X + 1)(X – 2)

1. Press ! 5 (G-Solv).

xiii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start

2. Press 1 (ROOT).
Press e for other roots.

Example 3: Determine the area bounded by the origin and the X = –1 root obtained for
Y = X(X + 1)(X – 2)

1. Press !5 (G-Solv).

123456

2. Press 6 (g).

123456

3. Press 3 (∫dx).

4. Use d to move the pointer to the location where

X = –1, and then press w. Next, use e to
move the pointer to the location where X = 0, and
then press w to input the integration range, which
becomes shaded on the display.

xiv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start
DUAL GRAPH
With this function you can split the display between two areas and display two graphs
on the same screen.

Example: To draw the following two graphs and determine the points of intersection

Y1 = X(X + 1)(X – 2)
Y2 = X + 1.2

1. Press !Zcc1 (Grph) to specify

“Graph” for the Dual Screen setting.

123456

J, and then input the two functions.

2. Press
v(v+b)
(v-c)w
v+b.cw

3. Press 6 (DRAW) or w to draw the graphs.

BOX ZOOM
Use the Box Zoom function to specify areas of a graph for enlargement.

1. Press ! 2 (Zoom) 1 (BOX).

2. Use def
, , , and c
to move the pointer
to one corner of the area you want to specify and then
press w .

xv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start

3. Use def, , , and c

to move the pointer
again. As you do, a box appears on the display. Move
the pointer so the box encloses the area you want to
enlarge.

4. Press w , and the enlarged area appears in the

inactive (right side) screen.

DYNAMIC GRAPH
Dynamic Graph lets you see how the shape of a graph is affected as the value assigned
to one of the coefficients of its function changes.

Example: To draw graphs as the value of coefficient A in the following function changes
from 1 to 3

Y = AX2

1. Press m.
2. Use d, e, f, and c to highlight DYNA,
and then press w.

3. Input the formula.

aAvxw

12356

xvi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start

4. Press 4 (VAR) bw to assign an initial value

of 1 to coefficient A.

1 23456

5. Press 2 (RANG) bwdwbw

to specify the range and increment of change in
coefficient A.

6. Press J.
7. Press 6(DYNA) to start Dynamic Graph drawing.
The graphs are drawn 10 times.

↓↑

↓↑

xvii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quick-Start
TABLE FUNCTION
The Table Function makes it possible to generate a table of solutions as different values
are assigned to the variables of a function.

Example: To create a number table for the following function

Y = X (X+1) (X–2)

1. Press m.
2. Use d, e, f, and c to highlight TABLE,
and then press w.

3. Input the formula.

v(v+b)
(v-c)w

4. Press 6 (TABL) or w to generate the number

table.

To learn all about the many powerful features of this calculator, read on and explore!

xviii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Handling Precautions
• Your calculator is made up of precision components. Never try to take it apart.
• Avoid dropping your calculator and subjecting it to strong impact.
• Do not store the calculator or leave it in areas exposed to high temperatures or humidity, or large
amounts of dust. When exposed to low temperatures, the calculator may require more time to
display results and may even fail to operate. Correct operation will resume once the calculator is
brought back to normal temperature.
• The display will go blank and keys will not operate during calculations. When you are operating the
keyboard, be sure to watch the display to make sure that all your key operations are being performed
correctly.
• Replace the main batteries once every 2 years regardless of how much the calculator is used during
that period. Never leave dead batteries in the battery compartment. They can leak and damage the
unit.
• Keep batteries out of the reach of small children. If swallowed, consult with a physician immediately.
• Avoid using volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine to clean the unit. Wipe it with a soft, dry cloth,
or with a cloth that has been dipped in a solution of water and a neutral detergent and wrung out.
• Always be gentle when wiping dust off the display to avoid scratching it.
• In no event will the manufacturer and its suppliers be liable to you or any other person for any
damages, expenses, lost profits, lost savings or any other damages arising out of loss of data and/or
formulas arising out of malfunction, repairs, or battery replacement. The user should prepare
physical records of data to protect against such data loss.
• Never dispose of batteries, the liquid crystal panel, or other components by burning them.
• When the “Low battery!” message appears on the display, replace the main power supply batteries
as soon as possible.
• Be sure that the power switch is set to OFF when replacing batteries.
• If the calculator is exposed to a strong electrostatic charge, its memory contents may be damaged or
the keys may stop working. In such a case, perform the Reset operation to clear the memory and
restore normal key operation.
• If the calculator stops operating correctly for some reason, use a thin, pointed object to press the P
button on the back of the calculator. Note, however, that this clears all the data in calculator memory.
• Note that strong vibration or impact during program execution can cause execution to stop or can
damage the calculator’s memory contents.
• Using the calculator near a television or radio can cause interference with TV or radio reception.
• Before assuming malfunction of the unit, be sure to carefully reread this user’s guide and ensure that
the problem is not due to insufficient battery power, programming or operational errors.

xix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Be sure to keep physical records of all important data!
The large memory capacity of the unit makes it possible to store large amounts of data. You should
note, however, that low battery power or incorrect replacement of the batteries that power the unit can
cause the data stored in memory to be corrupted or even lost entirely. Stored data can also be
affected by strong electrostatic charge or strong impact.

Since this calculator employs unused memory as a work area when performing its internal calcula-
tions, an error may occur when there is not enough memory available to perform calculations. To avoid
such problems, it is a good idea to leave 1 or 2 kbytes of memory free (unused) at all times.

In no event shall CASIO Computer Co., Ltd. be liable to anyone for special, collateral, incidental, or
consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the purchase or use of these materials.
Moreover, CASIO Computer Co., Ltd. shall not be liable for any claim of any kind whatsoever against
the use of these materials by any other party.

• The contents of this user’s guide are subject to change without notice.
• No part of this user’s guide may be reproduced in any form without the express written consent of
the manufacturer.
• The options described in Chapter 21 of this user’s guide may not be available in certain
geographic areas. For full details on availability in your area, contact your nearest CASIO dealer
or distributor.

xx
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
fx-9750G PLUS
CFX-9850G PLUS
CFX-9850GB PLUS
CFX-9850GC PLUS
CFX-9950GB PLUS
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents
Getting Acquainted — Read This First! ............................................................. 1
1. Key Markings ....................................................................................................... 2
2. Selecting Icons and Entering Modes .................................................................... 3
3. Display ................................................................................................................. 8
4. Contrast Adjustment ........................................................................................... 11
5. When you keep having problems... .................................................................... 12

Chapter 1 Basic Operation ............................................................................. 13

1-1 Before Starting Calculations... ..................................................................... 14
1-2 Memory ....................................................................................................... 22
1-3 Option (OPTN) Menu .................................................................................. 27
1-4 Variable Data (VARS) Menu ........................................................................ 28
1-5 Program (PRGM) Menu .............................................................................. 34

Chapter 2 Manual Calculations ...................................................................... 35

2-1 Basic Calculations ....................................................................................... 36
2-2 Special Functions ........................................................................................ 39
2-3 Function Calculations .................................................................................. 43

Chapter 3 Numerical Calculations ................................................................. 53

3-1 Before Performing a Calculation ................................................................. 54
3-2 Differential Calculations ............................................................................... 55
3-3 Quadratic Differential Calculations .............................................................. 58
3-4 Integration Calculations ............................................................................... 60
3-5 Maximum/Minimum Value Calculations ....................................................... 63
3-6 Summation (Σ) Calculations ........................................................................ 65

Chapter 4 Complex Numbers ......................................................................... 67

4-1 Before Beginning a Complex Number Calculation ...................................... 68
4-2 Performing Complex Number Calculations ................................................. 69

Chapter 5 Binary, Octal, Decimal, and Hexadecimal Calculations ............. 73

5-1 Before Beginning a Binary, Octal, Decimal, or Hexadecimal
Calculation with Integers ........................................................................ 74
5-2 Selecting a Number System ........................................................................ 76
5-3 Arithmetic Operations .................................................................................. 77
5-4 Negative Values and Bitwise Operations .................................................... 78

Chapter 6 Matrix Calculations ........................................................................ 79

6-1 Before Performing Matrix Calculations ........................................................ 80
6-2 Matrix Cell Operations ................................................................................. 83
6-3 Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands .............................................. 88
6-4 Matrix Calculations ...................................................................................... 92

xxii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Contents

Chapter 7 Equation Calculations ................................................................... 99

7-1 Before Beginning an Equation Calculation ................................................ 100
7-2 Linear Equations with Two to Six Unknowns ............................................. 101
7-3 Quadratic and Cubic Equations ................................................................. 104
7-4 Solve Calculations ..................................................................................... 107
7-5 What to Do When an Error Occurs ............................................................ 110

Chapter 8 Graphing ....................................................................................... 111

8-1 Before Trying to Draw a Graph .................................................................. 112
8-2 View Window (V-Window) Settings ........................................................... 113
8-3 Graph Function Operations ....................................................................... 117
8-4 Graph Memory .......................................................................................... 122
8-5 Drawing Graphs Manually ......................................................................... 123
8-6 Other Graphing Functions ......................................................................... 128
8-7 Picture Memory ......................................................................................... 139
8-8 Graph Background .................................................................................... 140

Chapter 9 Graph Solve .................................................................................. 143

9-1 Before Using Graph Solve ......................................................................... 144
9-2 Analyzing a Function Graph ...................................................................... 145

Chapter 10 Sketch Function ........................................................................... 153

10-1 Before Using the Sketch Function ............................................................. 154
10-2 Graphing with the Sketch Function ........................................................... 155

Chapter 11 Dual Graph ................................................................................... 167

11-1 Before Using Dual Graph .......................................................................... 168
11-2 Specifying the Left and Right View Window Parameters .......................... 169
11-3 Drawing a Graph in the Active Screen ...................................................... 170
11-4 Displaying a Graph in the Inactive Screen ................................................ 171

Chapter 12 Graph-to-Table ............................................................................. 175

12-1 Before Using Graph-to-Table ..................................................................... 176
12-2 Using Graph-to-Table ................................................................................ 177

Chapter 13 Dynamic Graph ............................................................................ 181

13-1 Before Using Dynamic Graph .................................................................... 182
13-2 Storing, Editing, and Selecting Dynamic Graph Functions ........................ 183
13-3 Drawing a Dynamic Graph ........................................................................ 184
13-4 Using Dynamic Graph Memory ................................................................. 190
13-5 Dynamic Graph Application Examples ...................................................... 191

Chapter 14 Conic Section Graphs ................................................................. 193

14-1 Before Graphing a Conic Section .............................................................. 194
14-2 Graphing a Conic Section ......................................................................... 195
14-3 Conic Section Graph Analysis ................................................................... 199
xxiii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Contents

Chapter 15 Table & Graph .............................................................................. 205

15-1 Before Using Table & Graph ...................................................................... 206
15-2 Storing a Function and Generating a Numeric Table ................................ 207
15-3 Editing and Deleting Functions .................................................................. 210
15-4 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs .......................................................... 211
15-5 Copying a Table Column to a List .............................................................. 216

Chapter 16 Recursion Table and Graph ........................................................ 217

16-1 Before Using the Recursion Table and Graph Function ............................ 218
16-2 Inputting a Recursion Formula and Generating a Table ............................ 219
16-3 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs .......................................................... 223

Chapter 17 List Function ................................................................................ 229

List Data Linking ................................................................................................... 230
17-1 List Operations .......................................................................................... 231
17-2 Editing and Rearranging Lists ................................................................... 233
17-3 Manipulating List Data ............................................................................... 237
17-4 Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists ........................................................... 244
17-5 Switching Between List Files ..................................................................... 248

Chapter 18 Statistical Graphs and Calculations .......................................... 249

18-1 Before Performing Statistical Calculations ................................................ 250
18-2 Paired-Variable Statistical Calculation Examples ...................................... 251
18-3 Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data ........................ 257
18-4 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data ....................... 261
18-5 Performing Statistical Calculations ............................................................ 270
18-6 Tests .......................................................................................................... 276
18-7 Confidence Interval ................................................................................... 294
18-8 Distribution ................................................................................................ 304

Chapter 19 Financial Calculations ................................................................. 321

19-1 Before Performing Financial Calculations ................................................. 322
19-2 Simple Interest Calculations ...................................................................... 324
19-3 Compound Interest Calculations ............................................................... 326
19-4 Investment Appraisal ................................................................................. 337
19-5 Amortization of a Loan .............................................................................. 341
19-6 Conversion between Percentage Interest Rate and Effective
Interest Rate ........................................................................................ 345
19-7 Cost, Selling Price, Margin Calculations ................................................... 347
19-8 Day/Date Calculations ............................................................................... 349

Chapter 20 Programming ............................................................................... 351

20-1 Before Programming ................................................................................. 352
20-2 Programming Examples ............................................................................ 353

xxiv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Contents

20-3 Debugging a Program ............................................................................... 358

20-4 Calculating the Number of Bytes Used by a Program ............................... 359
20-5 Secret Function ......................................................................................... 360
20-6 Searching for a File ................................................................................... 362
20-7 Searching for Data Inside a Program ........................................................ 364
20-8 Editing File Names and Program Contents ............................................... 365
20-9 Deleting a Program ................................................................................... 368
20-10 Useful Program Commands ...................................................................... 369
20-11 Command Reference ................................................................................ 371
20-12 Text Display ............................................................................................... 388
20-13 Using Calculator Functions in Programs ................................................... 389

Chapter 21 Data Communications ................................................................. 399

21-1 Connecting Two Units ............................................................................... 400
21-2 Connecting the Unit with a Personal Computer ........................................ 401
21-3 Connecting the Unit with a CASIO Label Printer ....................................... 402
21-4 Before Performing a Data Communication Operation ............................... 403
21-5 Performing a Data Transfer Operation ...................................................... 404
21-6 Screen Send Function ............................................................................... 408
21-7 Data Communications Precautions ........................................................... 409

Chapter 22 Program Library ........................................................................... 411

1. Prime Factor Analysis ...................................................................................... 412
2. Greatest Common Measure ............................................................................. 414
3. t-Test Value ...................................................................................................... 416
4. Circle and Tangents ......................................................................................... 418
5. Rotating a Figure .............................................................................................. 425

Appendix ........................................................................................................... 429

Appendix A Resetting the Calculator ................................................................. 430
Appendix B Power Supply ................................................................................. 432
Appendix C Error Message Table ...................................................................... 436
Appendix D Input Ranges .................................................................................. 438
Appendix E Specifications ................................................................................. 441
Index ..................................................................................................................... 443
Command Index ................................................................................................... 449
Key Index .............................................................................................................. 450
Program Mode Command List .............................................................................. 453

xxv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Contents

xxvi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Getting Acquainted

Getting Acquainted — Read This First!

— Read This First!

About this User’s Guide

uFunction Keys and Menus

• Many of the operations performed by this calculator can be executed by pressing function
keys 1 through 6. The operation assigned to each function key changes according to
the mode the calculator is in, and current operation assignments are indicated by function
menus that appear at the bottom of the display.
• This user’s guide indicates the current operation assigned to a function key in parentheses
following the key cap marking for that key. 1 (Comp), for example, indicates that
pressing 1 selects {Comp}, which is also indicated in the function menu.
• When {g} is indicated in the function menu for key 6, it means that pressing 6
displays the next page or previous page of menu options.

uMenu Titles
• Menu titles in this user’s guide include the key operation required to display the menu
being explained. The key operation for a menu that is displayed by pressing K and then
{MAT} would be shown as: [OPTN]-[MAT].
• 6 (g) key operations to change to another menu page are not shown in menu title key
operations.

uCommand List
• The Program Mode Command List (page 453) provides a graphic flowchart of the various
function key menus that shows how to maneuver to the menu of commands you need.
Example: The following operation displays Xfct: [VARS]-[FACT]-[Xfct]

uIcons Used in This User’s Guide

• The following are the meanings of the icons used in this user’s guide.

: Function not supported by fx-9750G PLUS

CFX

: Important : Note : Reference page

P.000

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Key Markings
Many of the calculator’s keys are used to perform more than one function. The
functions marked on the keyboard are color coded to help you find the one you
need quickly and easily.

Function Key Operation

1 log l

2 10x !l

3 B al

The following describes the color coding used for key markings.

Color Key Operation

Orange Press ! and then the key to perform the marked

function.

Red Press a and then the key to perform the marked

function.

2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2. Selecting Icons and Entering Modes
This section describes how to select an icon in the Main Menu to enter the mode you want.

uTo select an icon

1. Press m to display the Main Menu.
Currently selected icon

* The above shows the CFX-9850

GB PLUS screen.

2. Use the cursor keys (d, e, f, c) to move the highlighting to the icon
you want.
3. Press w to display the initial screen of the mode whose icon you selected.

• You can also enter a mode without highlighting an icon in the Main Menu by
inputting the number or letter marked in the lower right corner of the icon.
• Use only the procedures described above to enter a mode. If you use any other
procedure, you may end up in a mode that is different than the one you thought
you selected.

The following explains the meaning of each icon.

Icon Mode Name Description

RUN Use this mode for arithmetic calculations
and function calculations, and for
calculations involving binary, octal, decimal
and hexadecimal values.
STATistics Use this mode to perform single-variable
(standard deviation) and paired-variable
(regression) statistical calculations, to
perform tests, to analyze data and to draw
statistical graphs.
MATrix Use this mode for storing and editing
matrices.
LIST Use this mode for storing and editing
numeric data.
GRAPH Use this mode to store graph functions and
to draw graphs using the functions.
DYNAmic graph Use this mode to store graph functions and
to draw multiple versions of a graph by
changing the values assigned to the
variables in a function.

3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2 Selecting Icons and Entering Modes

Icon Mode Name Description

TABLE Use this mode to store functions, to
generate a numeric table of different
solutions as the values assigned to variables
in a function change, and to draw graphs.
RECURsion Use this mode to store recursion formulas,
to generate a numeric table of different
solutions as the values assigned to variables
in a function change, and to draw graphs.
CONICS Use this mode to draw graphs of conic
sections.
EQUAtion Use this mode to solve linear equations with
two through six unknowns, quadratic
equations, and cubic equations.
PRoGraM Use this mode to store programs in the
program area and to run programs.
Time Value of Use this mode to perform financial calcula-
Money tions and to draw cash flow and other types
of graphs.
LINK Use this mode to transfer memory contents
or back-up data to another unit.
CONTrast Use this mode to adjust the contrast of the
CFX display.
fx-9750G
PLUS

MEMory Use this mode to check how much memory

is used and remaining, to delete data from
memory, and to initialize (reset) the
calculator.

k Using the Set Up Screen

The mode's set up screen shows the current status of mode settings and lets you
make any changes you want. The following procedure shows how to change a set
up.

uTo change a mode set up

1. Select the icon you want and press w to enter a mode and display its initial
screen. Here we will enter the RUN Mode.

2. Press !Z to display the mode’s set up

screen.
• This set up screen is just one possible
example. Actual set up screen contents will
differ according to the mode you are in and
that mode’s current settings.
1 2 3 4 56
·
··
4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Selecting Icons and Entering Modes 2

1 2 3 4 5

3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item whose
setting you want to change.
4. Press the function key (1 to 6) that is marked with the setting you want to
make.
5. After you are finished making any changes you want, press J to return to
the initial screen of the mode.

k Set Up Screen Function Key Menus

This section details the settings you can make using the function keys in the set
up display.

uMode (calculation /binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal mode)

• {Comp} ... {arithmetic calculation mode}
P.75 • {Dec}/{Hex}/{Bin}/{Oct} ... {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal}

uFunc Type (graph function type)

P.123 • {Y=}/{r=}/{Parm}/{X=c} ... {rectangular coordinate}/{polar coordinate}/
~ P.125 {parametric coordinate}/{X = constant} graph
P.126 • {Y>}/{Y<}/{Y }/{Y } ... {y>f(x)}/{y<f(x)}/{y≥f(x)}/{y≤f(x)} inequality graph

• The v key inputs one of three different variable names. Which variable
name it inputs is determined by the {Func Type} setting you make.

uDraw Type (graph drawing method)

P.128 • {Con}/{Plot} ... {connected points}/{unconnected points}

uDerivative (derivative value display)

P.129 • {On}/{Off} ... {display on}/{display off} while Graph-to-Table, Table & Graph,
P.177 and Trace are being used
P.209

uAngle (default unit of angular measurement)

P.14 • {Deg}/{Rad}/{Gra} ... {degrees}/{radians}/{grads}

5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2 Selecting Icons and Entering Modes

uCoord (graph pointer coordinate display)

P.130 • {On}/{Off} ... {display on}/{display off}

uGrid (graph gridline display)

P.121 • {On}/{Off} ... {display on}/{display off}

uAxes (graph axis display)

P.121 • {On}/{Off} ... {display on}/{display off}

uLabel (graph axis label display)

P.121 • {On}/{Off} ... {display on}/{display off}

uDisplay (display format)

P.14 • {Fix}/{Sci}/{Norm}/{Eng} ... {fixed number of decimal places specification}/
P.15 {number of significant digits specification}/{exponential format display
range toggle}/{Engineering Mode}

uIntegration (Integration calculation)

P.60 • {Gaus}/{Simp} ... integration calculation using {Gauss-Kronrod rule}/
{Simpson’s rule}.

uStat Wind (statistical graph view window setting method)

P.251 • {Auto}/{Man} ... {automatic}/{manual}

uGraph Func (function display during graph drawing and trace)

P.187 • {On}/{Off} ... {display on}/{display off}

uBackground (graph display background)

P.140 • {None}/{PICT} ... {no background}/{graph background picture specification}

uPlot/Line (plot and line graph color setting)

CFX
• {Blue}/{Orng}/{Grn} ... {blue}/{orange}/{green}

uResid List (residual calculation)

P.267 • {None}/{LIST} ... {no calculation}/{list specification for the calculated residual
data}

6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Selecting Icons and Entering Modes 2
uList File (list file specification)
P.248 • {File 1} to {File 6} ... {specification of which list file to display while using the
List function}

uDual Screen (Dual Screen Mode status)

The Dual Screen Mode settings you can make depends on whether you pressed
!Z while in the GRAPH Mode, TABLE Mode, or RECUR Mode.
GRAPH Mode
P.168 • {Grph}/{GtoT}/{Off} ... {graphing on both sides of Dual Screen}/{graph on one
P.176 side and numeric table on the other side of Dual Screen}/{Dual Screen off}
TABLE/RECUR Mode
P.215 • {T+G}/{Off} ... {graph on one side and numeric table on the other side of Dual
Screen}/{Dual Screen off}

uSimul Graph (simultaneous graphing mode)

P.132 • {On}/{Off} ... {simultaneous graphing on (all graphs drawn simultaneously)}/
{simultaneous graphing off (graphs drawn in area numeric sequence)}

uDynamic Type (Dynamic Graph type)

P.186 • {Cnt}/{Stop} ... {non-stop (continuous)}/{automatic stop after 10 draws}
P.187
uLocus (Dynamic Graph Locus Mode)
CFX
P.188 • {On}/{Off} ... {locus identified by color}/{locus not drawn}

uVariable (Table Generation and Graph Draw settings)

P.208 • {Rang}/{LIST} ... {use table range}/{use list data}

uΣ Display (Σ value display in recursion table)

P.224 • {On}/{Off} ... {display on}/{display off}

uSlope (display of derivative at current pointer location in conic

section graph)
• {On}/{Off} ... {display on}/{display off}

uPayment (payment period setting)

P.331 • {BGN}/{END} ... {beginning}/{end} setting of payment period

uDate Mode (number of days per year setting)

P.324 • {365}/{360} ... interest calculations using {365}/{360} days per year
* The 365-day year must be used for date calculations in the Financial Mode.
Otherwise, an error occurs.

7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2 Selecting Icons and Entering Modes

3. Display
k About the Display Screen
This calculator uses two types of display: a text display and a graphic display. The
text display can show 21 columns and eight lines of characters, with the bottom
line used for the function key menu, while the graph display uses an area that
measures 127 (W) × 63 (H) dots.

Text Display Graph Display

k About Display Colors [OPTN]-[COLR]

CFX
The calculator can display data in three colors: orange, blue, and green. The
default color for graphs and comment text is blue, but you can specify orange or
green if you want.

• {Orng}/{Grn} ... {orange}/{green}

• The above setting affects the color of graphs and comment text. Specify the
color you want to use before inputting the graph’s function or the program
comment text.

k About Menu Item Types

This calculator uses certain conventions to indicate the type of result you can ex-
pect when you press a function key.

• Next Menu
Example:
Selecting displays a menu of hyperbolic functions.

• Command Input
Example:
Selecting inputs the sinh command.

8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Display 3
• Direct Command Execution
Example:
Selecting executes the DRAW command.

k Exponential Display
The calculator normally displays values up to 10 digits long. Values that exceed
this limit are automatically converted to and displayed in exponential format. You
can specify one of two different ranges for automatic changeover to exponential
display.

Norm 1 ........... 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| > 1010

Norm 2 ........... 10–9 (0.000000001) > |x|, |x| > 1010

uTo change the exponential display range

1. Press !Z to display the set up screen.
2. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Display”.
3. Press 3 (Norm).

The exponential display range switches between Norm 1 and Norm 2 each time
you perform the above operation. There is no display indicator to show you which
exponential display range is currently in effect, but you can always check it by
seeing what results the following calculation produces.

Ab/caaw (Norm 1)

(Norm 2)

All of the examples in this manual show calculation results using Norm 1.

uHow to interpret exponential format

1.2E+12 indicates that the result is equivalent to 1.2 × 1012. This means that you
should move the decimal point in 1.2 twelve places to the right, because the
exponent is positive. This results in the value 1,200,000,000,000.

1.2E–03 indicates that the result is equivalent to 1.2 × 10–3. This means that you
should move the decimal point in 1.2 three places to the left, because the
exponent is negative. This results in the value 0.0012.

9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3 Display

k Special Display Formats

This calculator uses special display formats to indicate fractions, hexadecimal
values, and sexagesimal values.

uFractions
12
..... Indicates: 456 ––––
23

uHexadecimal Values

..... Indicates: ABCDEF12(16), which

equals –1412567278(10)

uSexagesimal Values

..... Indicates: 12° 34’ 56.78"

• In addition to the above, this calculator also uses other indicators or symbols,
which are described in each applicable section of this manual as they come up.

k Calculation Execution Indicator

Whenever the calculator is busy drawing a graph or executing a long, complex
calculation or program, a black box (k) flashes in the upper right corner of the
display. This black box tells you that the calculator is performing an internal
operation.

10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 4. Contrast Adjustment
Adjust the contrast whenever objects on the display appear dim or difficult to see.

uTo display the contrast adjustment screen

Highlight the CONT icon in the Main Menu and then press w.

CFX-9850(9950)GB PLUS, fx-9750G PLUS

CFX-9850G PLUS

uTo adjust the contrast

Press the e cursor key to make the display darker and the d cursor key to
make it lighter. Holding down either key changes the setting at high speed.

uTo adjust the color tint

CFX
It is recommended that you always adjust the CONTRAST setting first.
1. Use the cursor f and c keys to move the pointer so it is next to the color
(ORANGE, BLUE, GREEN) whose tint you want to adjust.
2. Press the e cursor key to give the color a greener tint and the d cursor key
to give it an orange tint. Holding down either key changes the setting at high
speed.

uTo initialize color tint settings

• {INIT}/{IN·A} ... {initialize highlighted color}/{initialize all colors}

uTo exit the contrast adjustment screen

Press m to return to the Main Menu.

• You can change the CONTRAST setting at any time without displaying the
contrast adjustment screen. Simply press ! and then d or e to change
the setting. Press ! once again after the setting is the way you want.

11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5. When you keep having problems…
If you keep having problems when you are trying to perform operations, try the
following before assuming that there is something wrong with the calculator.

k Get the Calculator Back to its Original Mode Settings

1. In the Main Menu, select the RUN icon and press w.
2. Press ! Z to display the set up screen.
3. Highlight “Angle” and press 2 (Rad).
4. Highlight “Display” and press 3 (Norm) to select the exponential display
range (Norm 1 or Norm 2) that you want to use.
P.3 5. Now enter the correct mode and perform your calculation again, monitoring the
results on the display.

k In Case of Hang Up
• Should the unit hang up and stop responding to input from the keyboard,
press the P button on the back of the calculator to reset the memory. Note,
P.431 however, that this clears all the data in calculator memory.

k Low Battery Message

The low battery message appears whenever you press o to turn power on or
m to display the Main Menu while the main battery power is below a certain
level.
o or m

↓ About 3 seconds later

* The above shows the CFX-9850

GB PLUS screen.
P.433 If you continue using the calculator without replacing batteries, power will auto-
matically turn off to protect memory contents. Once this happens, you will not be
able to turn power back on, and there is the danger that memory contents will be
corrupted or lost entirely.

• You will not be able to perform data communications operations once the low
battery message appears.
12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1
Chapter

Basic Operation
1-1 Before Starting Calculations...
1-2 Memory
1-3 Option (OPTN) Menu
1-4 Variable Data (VARS) Menu
1-5 Program (PRGM) Menu

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1-1 Before Starting Calculations...
Before performing a calculation for the first time, you should use the set up screen
to specify the angle unit and display format.

k Setting the Angle Unit (Angle)

1. Display the set up screen and use the f and c keys to highlight “Angle”.

2. Press the function key for the angle unit you want to specify.
• {Deg}/{Rad}/{Gra} ... {degrees}/{radians}/{grads}

3. Press J to return to the screen that was on the display when you started the
procedure.
• The relationship between degrees, grads, and radians is shown below.
360° = 2π radians = 400 grads
90° = π/2 radians = 100 grads

k Setting the Display Format (Display)

1. Display the set up screen and use the f and c keys to highlight “Display”.

2. Press the function key for the item you want to set.
• {Fix}/{Sci}/{Norm}/{Eng} ... {fixed number of decimal places specification}/
{number of significant digits specification}/{exponential format display
range toggle}/{Engineering Mode}

3. Press J to return to the screen that was on the display when you started the
procedure.

u To specify the number of decimal places (Fix)

Example To specify two decimal places

1 (Fix) 3 (2)

Press the function key that corresponds to the

number of decimal places you want to specify
(n = 0 to 9).

• Displayed values are rounded off to the number of decimal places you specify.

14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Before Starting Calculations... 1-1
u To specify the number of significant digits (Sci)

Example To specify three significant digits

2 (Sci) 4 (3)

Press the function key that corresponds to

the number of significant digits you want to
specify (n = 0 to 9).

• Displayed values are rounded off to the number of significant digits you specify.
• Specifying 0 makes the number of significant digits 10.

u To specify the exponential display range (Norm 1/Norm 2)

Press 3 (Norm) to switch between Norm 1 and Norm 2.
Norm 1: 10–2 (0.01)>|x|, |x| >1010
Norm 2: 10–9 (0.000000001)>|x|, |x| >1010

u To specify the engineering notation display (Eng)

Press 4 (Eng) to switch between engineering notation and standard notation.
The indicator “/E” is on the display while engineering notation is in effect.
The following are the 11 engineering notation symbols used by this calculator.

Symbol Meaning Unit Symbol Meaning Unit

E Exa 1018 m milli 10–3

P Peta 1015 µ micro 10–6

T Tera 1012 n nano 10–9

G Giga 109 p pico 10–12

M Mega 106 f femto 10–15

k kilo 103

• The engineering symbol that makes the mantissa a value from 1 to 1000 is
automatically selected by the calculator when engineering notation is in effect.

15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-1 Before Starting Calculations...

k Inputting Calculations
When you are ready to input a calculation, first press A to clear the display.
Next, input your calculation formulas exactly as they are written, from left to right,
and press w to obtain the result.

Example 1 2 + 3 – 4 + 10 =

Ac+d-e+baw

Example 2 2(5 + 4) ÷ (23 × 5) =

Ac(f+e)/
(cd*f)w

k Calculation Priority Sequence

This calculator employs true algebraic logic to calculate the parts of a formula in
the following order:
1 Coordinate transformation Pol (x, y), Rec (r, θ )
Differentials, quadratic differentials, integrations, Σ calculations
d/dx, d2/dx2, ∫dx, Σ, Mat, Solve, FMin, FMax, List→Mat, Fill, Seq, SortA, SortD,
Min, Max, Median, Mean, Augment, Mat→List, List
2 Type A functions
With these functions, the value is entered and then the function key is pressed.
x2, x–1, x !, ° ’ ”, ENG symbols
3 Power/root ^(xy), x
4 Fractions a b/c
5 Abbreviated multiplication format in front of π, memory name, or variable name.
2π, 5A, X min, F Start, etc.
6 Type B functions
With these functions, the function key is pressed and then the value is entered.
, 3 , log, In, ex, 10x, sin, cos, tan, sin–1, cos–1, tan–1, sinh, cosh, tanh, sinh–1,
cosh–1, tanh–1, (–), d, h, b, o, Neg, Not, Det, Trn, Dim, Identity, Sum, Prod,
Cuml, Percent, AList
7 Abbreviated multiplication format in front of Type B functions
2 3 , A log2, etc.
8 Permutation, combination nPr, nCr
9 ×,÷
0 +, –

16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Before Starting Calculations... 1-1
! Relational operator
=, G, >, <, ≥, ≤
@ And (logical operator), and (bitwise operator)
# Or (logical operator), or (bitwise operator), xor, xnor
• When functions with the same priority are used in series, execution is per-
formed from right to left.
exIn 120 → ex{In( 120 )}
Otherwise, execution is from left to right.
• Compound functions are executed from right to left.
• Anything contained within parentheses receives highest priority.

Example 2 + 3 × (log sin2π2 + 6.8) = 22.07101691 (angle unit = Rad)

1
2
3
4
5
6

k Multiplication Operations without a Multiplication Sign

You can omit the multiplication sign (×) in any of the following operations.

Example 2sin30, 10log1.2, 2 3, 2Pol(5, 12), etc.

• Before constants, variable names, memory names

Example 2π, 2AB, 3Ans, 3Y1, etc.

• Before an open parenthesis

Example 3(5 + 6), (A + 1)(B – 1), etc.

17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-1 Before Starting Calculations...

k Stacks
The unit employs memory blocks, called stacks, for storage of low priority values
and commands. There is a 10-level numeric value stack, a 26-level command
stack, and a 10-level program subroutine stack. An error occurs if you perform a
calculation so complex that it exceeds the capacity of available numeric value
stack or command stack space, or if execution of a program subroutine exceeds
the capacity of the subroutine stack.

Example

Numeric Value Stack Command Stack

1 2 b ×
2 3 c (
3 4 d (
4 5 e +
5 4 f ×
(
...

g
h +
...
P.16 • Calculations are performed according to the priority sequence. Once a
calculation is executed, it is cleared from the stack.
• Storing a complex number takes up two numeric value stack levels.
P.19 • Storing a two-byte function takes up two command stack levels.

k Input, Output and Operation Limitations

The allowable range for both input and output values is 10 digits for the mantissa
and 2 digits for the exponent. Internally, however, the unit performs calculations
using 15 digits for the mantissa and 2 digits for the exponent.

Example 3 × 105 ÷ 7 – 42857 =

AdEf/hw
dEf/h-
ecifhw

18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Before Starting Calculations... 1-1
k Overflow and Errors
Exceeding a specified input or calculation range, or attempting an illegal input
causes an error message to appear on the display. Further operation of the
calculator is impossible while an error message is displayed. The following events
cause an error message to appear on the display.

• When any result, whether intermediate or final, or any value in memory

exceeds ±9.999999999 × 1099 (Ma ERROR).
P.438 • When an attempt is made to perform a function calculation that exceeds the
input range (Ma ERROR).
• When an illegal operation is attempted during statistical calculations (Ma
ERROR). For example, attempting to obtain 1VAR without data input.
• When the capacity of the numeric value stack or command stack is exceeded
(Stk ERROR). For example, entering 25 successive ( followed by 2 + 3 *
4 w.
• When an attempt is made to perform a calculation using an illegal formula (Syn
ERROR). For example, 5 ** 3 w.
• When you try to perform a calculation that causes memory capacity to be
exceeded (Mem ERROR).
• When you use a command that requires an argument, without providing a valid
argument (Arg ERROR).
• When an attempt is made to use an illegal dimension during matrix calculations
(Dim ERROR).

• Other errors can occur during program execution. Most of the calculator’s keys
are inoperative while an error message is displayed. You can resume operation
P.436 using one of the two following procedures.
• Press the A key to clear the error and return to normal operation.
P.41 • Press d or e to display the error.

k Memory Capacity
Each time you press a key, either one byte or two bytes is used. Some of the
functions that require one byte are: b, c, d, sin, cos, tan, log, In, , and π.
Some of the functions that take up two bytes are d/dx(, Mat, Xmin, If, For, Return,
DrawGraph, SortA(, PxIOn, Sum, and an+1.
When the number of bytes remaining drops to five or below, the cursor automati-
cally changes from “ _ ” to “ v ”. If you still need to input more, you should divide
your calculation into two or more parts.

• As you input numeric values or commands, they appear flush left on the dis-
play. Calculation results, on the other hand, are displayed flush right.

19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-1 Before Starting Calculations...

k Graphic Display and Text Display

The unit uses both a graphic display and a text display. The graphic display is
used for graphics, while the text display is used for calculations and instructions.
The contents of each type of display are stored in independent memory areas.

uTo switch between the graphic display and text display

Press !6(G↔T). You should also note that the key operations used to clear
each type of display are different.

uTo clear the graphic display

Press !4(Sketch) 1(Cls) w.

uTo clear the text display

Press A.

k Editing Calculations
Use the d and e keys to move the cursor to the position you want to change,
and then perform one of the operations described below. After you edit the
calculation, you can execute it by pressing w, or use e to move to the end of
the calculation and input more.

uTo change a step

Example To change cos60 to sin60

cga

ddd

uTo delete a step

Example To change 369 × × 2 to 369 × 2

dgj**c

ddD

20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Before Starting Calculations... 1-1
uTo insert a step

Example To change 2.362 to sin2.362

c.dgx

ddddd

![

• When you press ![ the insert location is indicated by the symbol ‘‘t’’.
The next function or value you input is inserted at the location of ‘‘t’’. To abort
the insert operation without inputting anything, move the cursor, press ![
again, or press d, e or w.

21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-2 Memory

k Variables
This calculator comes with 28 variables as standard. You can use variables to
store values to be used inside of calculations. Variables are identified by single-
letter names, which are made up of the 26 letters of the alphabet, plus r and θ.
The maximum size of values that you can assign to variables is 15 digits for the
mantissa and 2 digits for the exponent. Variable contents are retained even when
you turn power off.

uTo assign a value to a variable

[value] a [variable name] w

Example To assign 123 to variable A

AbcdaaAw

Example To add 456 to variable A and store the result in variable B

AaA+efgaaBw

uTo display the contents of a variable

Example To display the contents of variable A

AaAw

uTo clear a variable

Example To clear variable A

AaaaAw

• To clear all variables, select “Memory Usage” from the MEM Mode.

uTo assign the same value to more than one variable

[value]a [first variable name]a3(~) [last variable name]w

• You cannot use “ r ” or “θ ” as a variable name in the above operation.

Example To assign a value of 10 to variables A through F

Abaa!aA
3(~)Fw
22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Memory 1-2
k Function Memory [OPTN]-[FMEM]
Function memory is convenient for temporary storage of often-used expressions.
For longer term storage, we recommend that you use the GRAPH Mode for
expressions and the PRGM Mode for programs.

P.27 • {STO}/{RCL}/{fn}/{SEE} ... {function store}/{function recall}/{function area

specification as a variable name inside an expression}/{function list}

uTo store a function

Example To store the function (A+B) (A–B) as function memory number 1

K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM)A
(aA+aB)
(aA-aB)

1(STO) 1(f1)

• If the function memory number you assign a function to already contains a

function, the previous function is replaced with the new one.

uTo recall a function

Example To recall the contents of function memory number 1

K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM)A
2(RCL)1(f1)

• The recalled function appears at the current location of the cursor on the
display.

uTo display a list of available functions

K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM)
4(SEE)

23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-2 Memory

uTo delete a function

Example To delete the contents of function memory number 1

K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM)A
1(STO) 1(f1)

• Executing the store operation while the display is blank deletes the function in
the function memory you specify.

uTo use stored functions

Once you store a function in memory, you can recall it and use it for a calculation.
This feature is very useful for quick and easy input of functions when programming
or graphing.

Example To store x3 + 1, x2 + x into function memory, and then graph:

y = x3 + x2 + x + 1
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –4 Ymin = –10
Xmax = 4 Ymax = 10
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

!Zc1(Y=)JK6(g)6(g)3(FMEM)
AvMd+b1(STO)1(f1)(stores (x3 + 1))
Avx+v1(STO)2(f2)(stores (x2 + x))

A!4(Sketch)1(Cls)w
!4(Sketch)5(GRPH)1(Y=)
K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM)
3(fn)1(f1)+2(f2)w

P.111 • For full details about graphing, see “8. Graphing”.

k Memory Status (MEM)

You can check how much memory is used for storage for each type of data. You
can also see how many bytes of memory are still available for storage.

uTo check the memory status

1. In the Main Menu, select the MEM icon and
press w.

24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Memory 1-2
2. Press w again to display the memory
status screen.

Number of bytes still free

3. Use f and c to move the highlighting and view the amount of memory (in
bytes) used for storage of each type of data.

The following table shows all of the data types that appear on the memory status
screen.

Data Type Meaning

Program Program data

Statistics Statistical calculations and graphs

Matrix Matrix memory data

List File List data

Y= Graph functions

Draw Memory Graph drawing conditions (View Window,

enlargement/reduction factor, graph screen)

Graph Memory Graph memory data

View Window View Window memory data

Picture Graph screen data

Dynamic Graph Dynamic Graph data

Table Function Table & Graph data

Recursion Recursion Table & Graph data

Equation Equation calculation data

Alpha Memory Alpha memory data

Function Mem Function memory data

Financial Financial data

25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-2 Memory

k Clearing Memory Contents

Use the following procedure to clear data stored in memory.
1. In the memory status screen, use f and c to move the highlighting to the
data type you want to clear.

If the data type you select in step 1 allows deletion of specific data
2. Press 1 (DEL).

1 2 3 4 5 6
* This menu appears when you
select List File.
3. Press the function key that corresponds to the data you want to delete.

1 2 3 4 5 6
• The above example shows the function menu that appears when you highlight
{List File} in step 1.

4. Press 1 (YES).

If the data type you select in step 1 allows deletion of all data only
2. Press 1 (DEL).

1 2 3 4 5 6
3. Press 1 (YES) to delete all of the data.

26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-3 Option (OPTN) Menu
The option menu gives you access to scientific functions and features that are not
marked on the calculator’s keyboard. The contents of the option menu differ
according to the mode you are in when you press the K key.

See the Command List at the back of this user’s guide for details on the option
(OPTN) menu.

uOption Menu in the RUN and PRGM Modes

P.237 • {LIST} ... {list function menu}

P.88 • {MAT} ... {matrix operation menu}
P.68 • {CPLX} ... {complex number calculation menu}
P.54 • {CALC} ... {functional analysis menu}
P.272 • {STAT} ... {paired-variable statistical estimated value menu}

CFX
• {COLR} ... {graph color menu}
P.43 • {HYP} ... {hyperbolic calculation menu}
P.43 • {PROB} ... {probability/distribution calculation menu}
P.43 • {NUM} ... {numeric calculation menu}
P.44 • {ANGL} ... {menu for angle/coordinate conversion, sexagesimal input/
conversion}
P.44 • {ESYM} ... {engineering symbol menu}
P.139 • {PICT} ... {graph save/recall menu}
P.23 • {FMEM} ... {function memory menu}
P.51 • {LOGIC} ... {logic operator menu}

Pressing K causes the following function key menu to appear while binary,
CFX octal, decimal, or hexadecimal is set as the default number system.

• {COLR} ... {graph color menu}

u Option Menu during numeric data input in the STAT, MAT, LIST,
TABLE, RECUR and EQUA Modes
• {LIST}/{HYP}/{PROB}/{NUM}/{ANGL}/{ESYM}/{FMEM}/{LOGIC}

u Option Menu during formula input in the GRAPH, DYNA, TABLE,

RECUR and EQUA Modes
• {List}/{CALC}/{HYP}/{PROB}/{NUM}/{FMEM}/{LOGIC}

The meanings of the option menu items are described in the sections that cover
each mode.

27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-4 Variable Data (VARS) Menu
To recall variable data, press J to display the variable data menu.
{V-WIN}/{FACT}/{STAT}/{GRPH}/{DYNA}
{TABL}/{RECR}/{EQUA}/{TVM}

See the Command List at the back of this user’s guide for details on the variable
data (VARS) menu.
• Note that the EQUA and TVM items appear for function keys (3 and 4)
only when you access the variable data menu from the RUN or PRGM Mode.
• The variable data menu does not appear if you press J while binary, octal,
decimal, or hexadecimal is set as the default number system.

k V-WIN — Recalling View Window values

P.113 Selecting {V-WIN} from the VARS menu displays the View Window value recall
menu.
u {X}/{Y}/{T,θ } ... {x-axis menu}/{y-axis menu}/{T, θ menu}
u {R-X}/{R-Y}/{R-T,θ } ... {x-axis menu}/{y-axis menu}/{T,θ menu} for right side
of Dual Graph
The following are the items that appear in the above menus.
• {min}/{max}/{scal}/{ptch} ... {minimum value}/{maximum value}/{scale}/
{pitch}

k FACT — Recalling enlargement/reduction factors

P.134 Selecting {FACT} from the VARS menu displays the enlargement/reduction factor
recall menu.
• {Xfct}/{Yfct} ... {x-axis factor}/{y-axis factor}

k STAT — Recalling Single/Paired-variable Statistical Data

Selecting {STAT} from the VARS menu displays the single/paired-variable
statistical data recall menu.
{X}/{Y}/{GRPH}/{PTS}/{TEST}/{RESLT}

u {X}/{Y} ... {x-data menu}/{y-data menu}

The following are the items that appear in the above menus.
• {n} ... {number of data}
P.259 • {oo}/{pp} ... mean of {x-data}/{y-data}
P.268 • {Σx}/{Σy} ... sum of {x-data}/{y-data}
• {Σx2}/{Σy2} ... sum of squares of {x-data}/{y-data}
• {Σxy} ... {sum of products of x-data and y-data}

28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Variable Data (VARS) Menu 1-4
• {xσn}/{yσn} ... population standard deviation of {x-data}/{y-data}
• {xσn-1}/{yσn-1} ... sample standard deviation of {x-data}/{y-data}
• {minX}/{minY} ... minimum value of {x-data}/{y-data}
• {maxX}/{maxY} ... maximum value of {x-data}/{y-data}

u {GRPH} ...{graph data menu}

The following are the items that appear in the above menu.
• {a}/{b}/{c}/{d}/{e} ... {regression coefficient and polynomial coefficients}
• {r} ... {correlation coefficient}
• {Q1}/{Q3} ... {first quartile}/{third quartile}
• {Med}/{Mod} ... {median}/{mode} of input data
• {Strt}/{Pitch} ... histogram {start division}/{pitch}

u {PTS} ... {summary point data menu}

The following are the items that appear in the above menu.
• {x1}/{y1}/{x2}/{y2}/{x3}/{y3} ... {coordinates of summary points}

u {TEST} ... {test data recall}

The following are the items that appear in the above menu.
• {n}/{o}/{xσn-1} ... {number of data}/{data mean}/{sample standard deviation}
• {n1}/{n2} ... number of {data 1}/{data 2}
• {o1}/{o2} ... mean of {data 1}/{data 2}
• {x1σ}/{x2σ} ... sample standard deviation of {data 1}/{data 2}
• {xpσ} ... {pooled sample standard deviation}
• {F} ... {F value} (ANOVA)
• {Fdf}/{SS}/{MS} ... factor {degrees of freedom}/{sum of squares}/{mean of
squares}
• {Edf}/{SSe}/{MSe} ... error {degrees of freedom}/{sum of squares}/{mean of
squares}

u {RESLT} ... {test result recall}

The following are the items that appear in the above menu.
• {p} ... {p-value}
• {z}/{t}/{Chi}/{F} ... {z value}/{t value}/{χ2 value}/{F value}
• {Left}/{Right} ... {lower limit (left edge) of confidence interval}/{upper limit
(right edge) of confidence interval}
• {p̂ }/{p̂1}/{p̂2} ... {expected probability value}/{expected probability value 1}/
{expected probability value 2}
• {df}/{s}/{r}/{r2} ... {degrees of freedom}/{standard error}/{correlation
coefficient}/{coefficient of determination}

29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-4 Variable Data (VARS) Menu

k GRPH — Recalling Graph Functions

Selecting {GRPH} from the VARS menu displays the graph function recall menu.
P.156 • {Y}/{r} ... {rectangular coordinate or inequality function}/{polar coordinate
function}
• {Xt}/{Yt} ... parametric graph function {Xt}/{Yt}
• {X} ... {X=constant graph function}
(Press these keys before inputting a value to specify a storage area.)

Example To recall and draw the graph for the rectangular coordinate
function y = 2 x2 – 3, which is stored in storage area Y2
Use the following View Window parameters to draw the graph.
Xmin = –5 Ymin = –5
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 5
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

!4(Sketch)5(GRPH)1(Y=)
J4(GRPH)1(Y)cw

k DYNA — Recalling Dynamic Graph Set Up Data

Selecting {DYNA} from the VARS menu displays the Dynamic Graph set up data
recall menu.
P.185 • {Strt}/{End}/{Pitch} ... {coefficient range start value}/{coefficient range end
value}/{coefficient value increment}

k TABL — Recalling Table & Graph Set Up and Content Data

Selecting {TABL} from the VARS menu displays the Table & Graph set up and
content data recall menu.
P.207 • {Strt}/{End}/{Pitch} ... {table range start value}/{table range end value}/{table
value increment}
• {Reslt} ... {matrix of table contents}
• The Reslt item appears for function key 4 only when the above menu is
displayed in the RUN or PRGM Mode.

30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Variable Data (VARS) Menu 1-4

Example To recall the contents of the numeric table for the function
y = 3x2 – 2, while the table range is Start=0 and End=6, and pitch=1

4(Reslt)w

k RECR — Recalling Recursion Formula, Table Range, and

Table Content Data
Selecting {RECR} from the VARS menu displays the recursion data recall menu.
u {FORM} ... {recursion formula data menu}
The following are the items that appear in the above menu.
P.218 • {an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2} ... {an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}
expressions

u {RANG} ... {table range data menu}

The following are the items that appear in the above menu.
P.219 • {Strt}/{End} ... {table range start value}/{table range end value}
• {a0}/{a1}/{a2} ... {zero term ao value}/{first term a1 value}/{second term a2
value}
• {b0}/{b1}/{b2} ... {zero term bo value}/{first term b1 value}/{second term b2
value}
• {anSt}/{bnSt} ... origin of {an }/{bn} recursion formula convergence/divergence
graph (WEB graph)

u {Reslt} ... {matrix of table contents}

Selecting {Reslt} displays a matrix that shows the contents of the recursion table.
• This operation is available only in the RUN and PRGM modes.

Example To recall the contents of the numeric table for recursion formula
an = 2n + 1, while the table range is Start=1 and End=6

3(Reslt)w

31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-4 Variable Data (VARS) Menu

• The table contents recalled by the above operation are stored automatically in
Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns).
• An error occurs if you perform the above operation when there is no function or
recursion formula numeric table in memory.

k EQUA — Recalling Equation Coefficients and Solutions

Selecting {EQUA} from the VARS menu displays the equation coefficient and
solution recall menu.

P.101 • {S-Rlt}/{S-Cof} ... matrix of {solutions}/{coefficients} for linear equations with

two through six unknowns
P.104 • {P-Rlt}/{P-Cof} ... matrix of {solution}/{coefficients} for a quadratic or cubic
equation

Example 1 To recall the solutions for the following linear equations with two
unknowns
2x + 3y = 8
3x + 5y = 14

1(S-Rlt)w

Example 2 To recall the coefficients for the following linear equations with
three unknowns
4x + y – 2z = –1
x + 6y + 3z = 1
–5x + 4y + z = –7

2(S-Cof)w

Example 3 To recall the solutions for the following quadratic equation

2x2 + x – 10 = 0

3(P-Rlt)w

Example 4 To recall the coefficients for the following quadratic equation

2x2 + x – 10 = 0

4(P-Cof)w

32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Variable Data (VARS) Menu 1-4
• The coefficients and solutions recalled by the above operation are stored
automatically in Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns).
• The following conditions cause an error to be generated.
— When there are no coefficients input for the equation
— When there are no solutions obtained for the equation

k TVM — Recalling Financial Calculation Data

Selecting {TVM} from the VARS menu displays the financial calculation data recall
menu.
• {n}/{I%}/{PV}/{PMT}/{FV} ... {payment periods (installments)}/{interest (%)}/
{principal}/{payment amount}/{account balance or principal plus interest
following the final installment}
• {P/Y}/{C/Y} ... {number of installment periods per year}/{number of
compounding periods per year}

33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-5 Program (PRGM) Menu
To display the program (PRGM) menu, first enter the RUN or PRGM Mode from
the Main Menu and then press ! W. The following are the selections
available in the program (PRGM) menu.

• {COM} … {program command menu}

• {CTL} … {program control command menu}
• {JUMP} … {jump command menu}
• {?} … {input command}
• {^
^} … {output command}
• {CLR} … {clear command menu}
• {DISP} … {display command menu}
• {REL} … {conditional jump relational operator menu}
• {I/O} … {input/output control command menu}
• { : } … {multistatement connector}

The function key menu appears if you press ! W in the RUN Mode or the
PRGM Mode while binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal is set as the default
number system.

^}/{REL}/{ : }
• {Prog}/{JUMP}/{?}/{^

The functions assigned to the function keys are the same as those in the Comp
Mode.

For details on the commands that are available in the various menus you can
P.351 access from the program menu, see “20. Programming”.

34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter
2

Manual Calculations
2-1 Basic Calculations
2-2 Special Functions
2-3 Function Calculations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2-1 Basic Calculations
k Arithmetic Calculations
• Enter arithmetic calculations as they are written, from left to right.
• Use the - key to input a negative value.
• Use the - key for subtraction
• Calculations are performed internally with a 15-digit mantissa. The result is
rounded to a 10-digit mantissa before it is displayed.
• For mixed arithmetic calculations, multiplication and division are given priority
over addition and subtraction.

Example Operation Display

23 + 4.5 – 53 = –25.5 23+4.5-53w –25.5

56 × (–12) ÷ (–2.5) = 268.8 56*-12/-2.5w 268.8

(2 + 3) × 102 = 500 (2+3)*1E2w*1 500

1 + 2 – 3 × 4 ÷ 5 + 6 = 6.6 1+2-3*4/5+6w 6.6

100 – (2 + 3) × 4 = 80 100-(2+3)*4w 80

2 + 3 × (4 + 5) = 29 2+3*(4+5w*2 29

(7 – 2) × (8 + 5) = 65 (7-2)(8+5)w*3 65

6
= 0.3 6 /(4*5)w*4 0.3
4×5
*1 “(2+3)E2” does not produce the correct result. Be sure to enter this calculation as
shown.
*2 Final closed parentheses (immediately before operation of the w key) may be omitted, no
matter how many are required.
*3 A multiplication sign immediately before an open parenthesis may be omitted.
*4 This is identical to 6 / 4 / 5 w.

k Number of Decimal Places, Number of Significant Digits,

Exponential Notation Range
P.6 • These settings can be made while setting up the display format (Display) with
the set up screen.
• Even after you specify the number of decimal places or the number of signifi-
cant digits, internal calculations are still performed using a 15-digit mantissa,
P.43 and displayed values are stored with a 10-digit mantissa. Use Rnd (4) of the
Numeric Calculation Menu (NUM) to round the displayed value off to the
number of decimal place and significant digit settings.

36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Basic Calculations 2-1
• Number of decimal place (Fix) and significant digit (Sci) settings normally
remain in effect until you change them or until your change the exponential
display range (Norm) setting. Note also, however, that Sci setting is automati-
P.323 cally initialized to Norm 1 whenever you enter the Financial Mode.
• To change the exponential display range (Norm) setting, press 3 (Norm)
while the display format (Display) menu is on the screen. Each time you
perform this operation, the range toggles between the following two settings.
Norm 1 ........... exponential display for values outside the range of 10–2 to 1010
Norm 2 ........... exponential display for values outside the range of 10–9 to 1010

Example 100 ÷ 6 = 16.66666666...

Condition Operation Display

100/6w 16.66666667

4 decimal places !Zccccccccc

1(Fix)5(4)Jw *1
16.6667

5 significant digits !Zccccccccc

1.6667*E+01
1
2(Sci)6(g)1(5)Jw

Cancels specification !Zccccccccc

3(Norm)Jw 16.66666667
*1 Displayed values are rounded off to the place you specify.

Example 200 ÷ 7 × 14 = 400

Condition Operation Display

200/7*14w 400

3 decimal places !Zccccccccc

1(Fix)4(3)Jw 400.000

Calculation continues
using display capacity 200/7w 28.571
of 10 digits * Ans × _
14w 400.000

• If the same calculation is performed using the specified number of digits:

200/7w 28.571
The value stored
internally is rounded K6(g)
off to the number of 4(NUM)4(Rnd)w 28.571
decimal places you * Ans × _
specify. 14w 399.994

37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2-1 Basic Calculations

k Calculations Using Variables

Example Operation Display

193.2aaAw 193.2

193.2 ÷ 23 = 8.4 aA/23w 8.4

193.2 ÷ 28 = 6.9 aA/28w 6.9

38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2-2 Special Functions
k Answer Function
The unit’s Answer Function automatically stores the last result you calculated by
pressing w(unless the w key operation results in an error). The result is stored
in the answer memory.

uTo use the contents of the answer memory in a calculation

Example 123 + 456 = 579

789 – 579 = 210

Abcd+efgw
hij-!Kw

• The largest value that the answer memory can hold is one with 15 digits for the
mantissa and 2 digits for the exponent.
• Answer memory contents are not cleared when you press the A key or when
you switch power off.
• Note that answer memory contents are not changed by an operation that
assigns values to value memory (such as: faaAw).

k Performing Continuous Calculations

The unit lets you use the result of one calculation as one of the arguments in the
next calculation. To do so, use the result of the previous calculation, which is
currently stored in Answer Memory.

Example 1÷3=
1÷3×3=

Ab/dw
(Continuing)*dw

P.16 Continuous calculations can also be used with Type A functions (x2, x-1, x!), +, –,
^(xy), x , ° ’ ”.

39
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2-2 Special Functions

k Using the Replay Function

The Replay Function automatically stores the last calculation performed into
replay memory. You can recall the contents of the replay memory by pressing d
or e.
If you press e, the calculation appears with the cursor at the beginning. Pressing
d causes the calculation to appear with the cursor at the end. You can make
changes in the calculation as you wish and then execute it again.

Example To perform the following two calculations

4.12 × 6.4 = 26.368
4.12 × 7.1 = 29.252

Ae.bc*g.ew

dddd

h.b

• A calculation remains stored in replay memory until you perform another

calculation or change modes.
• The contents of the replay memory are not cleared when you press the A
key, so you can recall a calculation and execute it even after performing the all
clear operation. Note, however, that replay memory contents are cleared
whenever you change to another mode or menu.
• After you press A, you can press f or c to recall previous calculations, in
sequence from the newest to the oldest (Multi-Replay Function). Once you
recall a calculation, you can use e and d to move the cursor around the
calculation and make changes in it to create a new calculation. Note, however,
that multi-replay memory contents are cleared whenever you change to
another menu.

Example

Abcd+efgw
cde-fghw

f (One calculation back)

f (Two calculations back)

40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Special Functions 2-2
k Making Corrections in the Original Calculation

Example 14 ÷ 0 × 2.3 entered by mistake for 14 ÷ 10 × 2.3

Abe/a*c.dw

Press d or e.

Cursor is positioned automatically at the

location of the cause of the error.

Make necessary changes.

d![b

Execute it again.
w

k Using Multistatements
Multistatements are formed by connecting a number of individual statements for
sequential execution. You can use multistatements in manual calculations and in
programmed calculations. There are two different ways that you can use to
connect statements to form multistatements.

• Colon (:)
Statements that are connected with colons are executed from left to right, without
stopping.

• Display Result Command (^

^)
When execution reaches the end of a statement followed by a display result
command, execution stops and the result up to that point appears on the display.
You can resume execution by pressing the w key.

41
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2-2 Special Functions

Example 6.9 × 123 = 848.7

123 ÷ 3.2 = 38.4375

AbcdaaA!W6(g)
5(:)g.j*aA!W
5(^)aA/d.cw
Intermediate result at point
where “^” is used.

• Note that the final result of a multistatement is always displayed, regardless of

whether it ends with a display result command.
• You cannot construct a multistatement in which one statement directly uses the
result of the previous statement.

Example 123 × 456: × 5

Invalid

42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2-3 Function Calculations
k Function Menus
This calculator includes five function menus that give you access to scientific
functions that are not printed on the key panel.
• The contents of the function menu differ according to the mode you entered
from the Main Menu before you pressed the K key. The following examples
show function menus that appear in the RUN or PRGM Mode.

uHyperbolic Calculations (HYP) [OPTN]-[HYP]

• {sinh}/{cosh}/{tanh} ... hyperbolic {sine}/{cosine}/{tangent}
• {sinh-1}/{cosh-1}/{tanh-1} ... inverse hyperbolic {sine}/{cosine}/{tangent}

uProbability/Distribution Calculations (PROB)

[OPTN]-[PROB]
• {x!} ... {press after inputting a value to obtain the factorial of the value.}
• {nPr}/{nCr} ... {permutation}/{combination}
• {Ran#}... {pseudo random number generation (0 to 1)}
P.273 • {P(}/{Q(}/{R(} ... normal probability {P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(t)}
• {t(} ... {value of normalized variate t(x)}

uNumeric Calculations (NUM) [OPTN]-[NUM]

• {Abs} ... {select this item and input a value to obtain the absolute value of the
value.}
• {Int}/{Frac} ... select the item and input a value to extract the {integer}/
{fraction} part.
• {Rnd} ... {rounds off the value used for internal calculations to 10 significant
digits (to match the value in the Answer Memory), or to the number of
decimal places (Fix) and number of significant digits (Sci) specified by
you.}
• {Intg} ... {select this item and input a value to obtain the largest integer that is
not greater than the value.}

43
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2-3 Function Calculations

uAngle Units, Coordinate Conversion, Sexagesimal Operations (ANGL)

[OPTN]-[ANGL]
• {°}/{r}/{g} ... {degrees}/{radians}/{grads} for a specific input value
• {° ’ ”} ... {specifies degrees (hours), minutes, seconds when inputting a
sexagesimal value}
←
• {° ’ ”} ... {converts decimal value to sexagesimal value}
←
• The {° ’ ” } menu option appears only when there is a calculation result shown
on the display.
• {Pol(}/{Rec(} ... {rectangular-to-polar}/{polar-to-rectangular} coordinate
conversion

uEngineering Notation Calculations (ESYM) [OPTN]-[ESYM]

• {m}/{µ}/{n}/{p}/{f} ... {milli (10-3)}/{micro (10-6)}/{nano (10-9)}/{pico (10-12)}/
{femto (10-15)}
• {k}/{M}/{G}/{T}/{P}/{E} ... {kilo (103)}/{mega (106)}/{giga (109)}/{tera (1012)}/
{peta (1015)}/{exa (1018)}
←
• {ENG}/{ENG} ... shifts the decimal place of the displayed value three digits to
the {left}/{right} and {decreases}/{increases} the exponent by three.
When you are using engineering notation, the engineering symbol is
also changed accordingly.
←
• The {ENG} and {ENG} menu options appear only when there is a calculation
result shown on the display.

k Angle Units
• Once you specify an angle unit, it remains in effect until you specify a different
one. The specification is retained even if you turn power off.
P.5 • Be sure to specify “Comp” for Calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal
mode.

Example Operation Display

To convert 4.25 rad to degrees: !Zcccc
1(Deg)J4.25K6(g)
5(ANGL)2(r)w 243.5070629

47.3° + 82.5rad = 4774.20181° 47.3+82.52(r)w 4774.20181

44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Function Calculations 2-3
k Trigonometric and Inverse Trigonometric Functions
P.5 • Be sure to set the angle unit before performing trigonometric function and
inverse trigonometric function calculations.
π
(90° = ––– radians = 100 grads)
2
P.5 • Be sure to specify “Comp” for Calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal
mode.

Example Operation Display

sin 63° = 0.8910065242 !Zcccc
1(Deg)J
s63w 0.8910065242

π
cos ( rad) = 0.5 !Zcccc
3
2(Rad)J
c(!7/d)w 0.5

tan (– 35gra) =
– 0.6128007881 !Zcccc
3(Gra)J
t-35w –0.6128007881

2 • sin 45° × cos 65°

= 0.5976724775 !Zcccc
1(Deg)J
2*s45*c65w*1 0.5976724775

1
cosec 30° = =2 1/s30w 2
sin 30°

sin-10.5 = 30°
(x when sinx = 0.5) !S0.5*2w 30
* * can be omitted.
1

*2 Input of leading zero is not necessary.

45
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2-3 Function Calculations

k Logarithmic and Exponential Functions

P.5 • Be sure to specify “Comp” for Calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal
mode.

Example Operation Display

log 1.23 (log101.23)
= 8.990511144 × 10–2 l1.23w 0.08990511144

In 90 (loge90) = 4.49980967 I90w 4.49980967

101.23 = 16.98243652
(To obtain the antilogarithm
of common logarithm 1.23) !01.23w 16.98243652

e4.5 = 90.0171313
(To obtain the antilogarithm
of natural logarithm 4.5) !e4.5w 90.0171313

(–3)4 = (–3) × (–3) × (–3)

× (–3) = 81 (-3)M4w 81

–34 = –(3 × 3 × 3 × 3) = –81 -3M4w – 81

1
7
123 (= 123 7 )
= 1.988647795 7!q123w 1.988647795

2 + 3 × 3 64 – 4 = 10 2+3*3!q64-4w*1 10
*1 ^ (x y) and x take precedence over multiplication and division.

k Hyperbolic and Inverse Hyperbolic Functions

P.5 • Be sure to specify “Comp” for Calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal
mode.

Example Operation Display

sinh 3.6 = 18.28545536 K6(g)2(HYP)
1(sinh)3.6w 18.28545536

cosh 1.5 – sinh 1.5 K6(g)2(HYP)

= 0.2231301601 2(cosh)1.5-1(sinh)1.5w 0.2231301601
= e –1.5 I!Kw – 1.5
(Proof of cosh x ± sinh x = e±x)

20
cosh–1 = 0.7953654612 K6(g)2(HYP)
15
5(cosh–1)(20/15)w 0.7953654612
Determine the value of x
when tanh 4 x = 0.88

x = tanh 0.88
-1

4 K6(g)2(HYP)
= 0.3439419141 6(tanh–1)0.88/4w 0.3439419141

46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Function Calculations 2-3
k Other Functions
P.5 • Be sure to specify “Comp” for Calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal
mode.

Example Operation Display

2 + 5 = 3.65028154 !92+!95w 3.65028154

(–3)2 = (–3) × (–3) = 9 (-3)xw 9

–32 = –(3 × 3) = –9 -3xw –9

1
––––––––––– = 12 (3!X-4!X)
1 1
––– – ––– !Xw 12
3 4

8! (= 1 × 2 × 3 × .... × 8) 8K6(g)3(PROB)
= 40320 1(x !)w 40320

3
36 × 42 × 49 = 42 !#(36*42*49)w 42

Random number generation K6(g)3(PROB)

(pseudo random number 4(Ran#)w (Ex.) 0.4810497011
between 0 and 1)

What is the absolute value of

3
the common logarithm of ?
4
| log 34 | = 0.1249387366 K6(g)4(NUM)
1(Abs)l(3/4)w 0.1249387366

What is the integer part of K6(g)4(NUM)

– 3.5? 2(Int)-3.5w –3

What is the decimal part of K6(g)4(NUM)

– 3.5? 3(Frac)-3.5w – 0.5

What is the nearest integer K6(g)4(NUM)

not exceeding – 3.5? 5(Intg)-3.5w –4

47
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2-3 Function Calculations

k Coordinate Conversion
u Rectangular Coordinates u Polar Coordinates

• With polar coordinates, θ can be calculated and displayed within a range of

–180°< θ < 180° (radians and grads have same range).

P.5 • Be sure to specify “Comp” for Calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal

mode.

Example To calculate r and θ° when x = 14 and y = 20.7

Operation Display
!Zcccc1(Deg)J
K6(g)5(ANGL)6(g)
1(Pol()14,20.7)w Ans
1 –24.989 – → 24.98979792 (r)
2 – 55.928 – → 55.92839019 (θ)

Example To calculate x and y when r = 25 and θ = 56°

Operation Display
!Zcccc1(Deg)J
K6(g)5(ANGL)6(g)
2(Rec()25,56)w Ans
1 –13.979 – → 13.97982259 (x)
2 – 20.725 – → 20.72593931 (y)

k Permutation and Combination

u Permutation u Combination
n! n!
nPr = ––––– nCr = –––––––
(n – r)! r! (n – r)!

P.5 • Be sure to specify “Comp” for Calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal

mode.

48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Function Calculations 2-3

Example To calculate the possible number of different arrangements

using 4 items selected from 10 items

Formula Operation Display

P4 = 5040
10 10K6(g)3(PROB)
2(nPr)4w 5040

Example To calculate the possible number of different combinations of

4 items selected from 10 items

Formula Operation Display

C4 = 210
10 10K6(g)3(PROB)
3(nCr)4w 210

k Fractions
• Fractional values are displayed with the integer first, followed by the numerator
and then the denominator.
P.5 • Be sure to specify “Comp” for Calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal
mode.

Example Operation Display

2 1 13
–– + 3 –– = 3 ––– 2$5+3$1$4w 3{13{20
5 4 20
= 3.65 (Conversion to decimal *1)M 3.65

1 1
––––– + ––––– 1$2578+1$4572w 6.066202547E–04*2
2578 4572
= 6.066202547 × 10–4 (Norm 1 display format)

1
–– × 0.5 = 0.25 1$2*.
.5w 0.25*3
2
1 5
–––––– = 1–– 1$(1$3+1$4)w*4 1{5{7
1 1 7
–– + ––
3 4

*1 Fractions can be converted to decimal values and vice versa.

*2 When the total number of characters, including integer, numerator, denominator and
delimiter marks exceeds 10, the input fraction is converted to decimal format.
*3 Calculations containing both fractions and decimals are calculated in decimal format.
*4 You can include fractions within the numerator or denominator of a fraction by putting the
numerator or denominator in parentheses.

49
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2-3 Function Calculations

k Engineering Notation Calculations

P.44 Input engineering symbols using the engineering notation menu.
P.5 • Be sure to specify “Comp” for Calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal
mode.

Example Operation Display

!Zccccc
cccc4(Eng)J
999k (kilo) + 25k (kilo) 999K
= 1.024M (mega) 6(g)6(g)1(ESYM)
6(g)1(k)+251(k)w 1.024M

9 ÷ 10 = 0.9 = 900m (milli) 9/10w 900.m

K6(g)6(g)1(ESYM)
6(g)6(g)
←
3(ENG)*1 0.9
←
3(ENG)*1 0.0009k

2(ENG)*2 0.9
2(ENG)*2 900.m
*1 Converts the displayed value to the next higher engineering unit, by shifting the decimal
point three places to the right.
*2 Converts the displayed value to the next lower engineering unit, by shifting the decimal
point three places to the left.

50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Function Calculations 2-3
k Logical Operators (AND, OR, NOT) [OPTN]-[LOGIC]
P.52 The logical operator menu provides a selection of logical operators.
• {And}/{Or}/{Not} ... {logical AND}/{logical OR}/{logical NOT}
P.5 • Be sure to specify “Comp” for Calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal
mode.

Example What is the logical AND of A and B when A = 3 and B = 2?

A AND B = 1

Operation Display
3aaAw
2aaBw
aAK6(g)6(g)
4(LOGIC)1(And)aBw 1

Example What is the logical OR of A and B when A = 5 and B = 1?

A OR B = 1

Operation Display
5aaAw
1aaBw
aAK6(g)6(g)
4(LOGIC)2(Or)aBw 1

Example Negate A when A = 10.

NOT A = 0

Operation Display
10aaAw
K6(g)6(g)
4(LOGIC)3(Not)aAw 0

51
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2-3 Function Calculations

About Logical Operations

• A logical operation always produces either 0 or 1 as its result.
• The following table shows all of possible results that can be produced by AND
and OR operations.

Value or Expression A Value or Expression B A AND B A OR B

AG0 BG0 1 1

AG0 B=0 0 1

A=0 BG0 0 1

A=0 B=0 0 0

• The following table shows the results produced by the NOT operation.

Value or Expression A NOT A

AG0 0

A=0 1

52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Numerical Calculations
3-1 Before Performing a Calculation
3-2 Differential Calculations
3-3 Quadratic Differential Calculations
3-4 Integration Calculations
3-5 Maximum/Minimum Value Calculations
3-6 Summation (Σ) Calculations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3-1 Before Performing a Calculation
The following describes the items that are available in the menus you use when
performing Solve, differential/ quadratic differential, integration, maximum/
minimum value, and Σ calculations.

P.27 When the option menu is on the display, press 4 (CALC) to display the function
analysis menu. The items of this menu are used when performing specific types of
calculations.

• {Solve}/{d/dx}/{d2/dx2}/{∫dx} ... {solve}/{differential}/{quadratic differential}/

{integration} calculations
• {FMin}/{FMax}/{Σ(} ... {minimum value}/{maximum value}/{Σ (sigma)}
calculations

Solve calculations
The following is the syntax for using the Solve function in a program.

Solve( f(x), n, a, b)
Upper limit
Lower limit
Initial estimated value
` • There are two different input methods that can be used for Solve calcula-
tions: direct assignment and variable table input.
With the direct assignment method (the one described here), you assign
values directly to variables. This type of input is identical to that used with
P.394 the Solve command used in the PRGM Mode.
P.107 Variable table input is used with the Solve function in the EQUA Mode. This
input method is recommend for most normal Solve function input.

54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3-2 Differential Calculations [OPTN]-[CALC]-[d/dx]

To perform differential calculations, first display the function analysis menu, and
then input the values shown in the formula below.

2(d/dx) f(x),a,A x)

Increase/decrease of x
Point for which you want to determine the derivative

d
d/dx ( f (x), a, Ax) ⇒ ––– f (a)
dx

The differentiation for this type of calculation is defined as:

f (a + Ax) – f (a)
f '(a) = lim –––––––––––––
Ax→0 Ax

In this definition, infinitesimal is replaced by a sufficiently small Ax, with the value
in the neighborhood of f ' (a) calculated as:

f (a + Ax) – f (a)
f '(a) –––––––––––––
Ax

In order to provide the best precision possible, this unit employs central difference
to perform differential calculations. The following illustrates central difference.

A
A

A A
A

A A

The slopes of point a and point a + Ax, and of point a and point a – Ax in function
y = f(x) are as follows:

f (a + Ax) – f (a) Ay f (a) – f (a – Ax) ∇y

––––––––––––– = ––– , ––––––––––––– = –––
Ax Ax Ax ∇x
In the above, Ay/Ax is called the forward difference, while ∇y/∇x is the backward
difference. To calculate derivatives, the unit takes the average between the value
of Ay/Ax and ∇y/∇x, thereby providing higher precision for derivatives.

55
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3-2 Differential Calculations

This average, which is called the central difference, is expressed as:

1 f (a + Ax) – f (a) f (a) – f (a – Ax)
f '(a) = –– ––––––––––––– + –––––––––––––
2 Ax Ax
f (a + Ax) – f (a – Ax)
= –––––––––––––––––
2Ax

uTo perform a differential calculation

Example To determine the derivative at point x = 3 for the function

y = x3 + 4 x2 + x – 6, when the increase/decrease of x is defined
as Ax = 1E – 5

Input the function f(x).

AK4(CALC)2(d/dx)vMd+evx+v-g,

Input point x = a for which you want to determine the derivative.

d,

Input Ax, which is the increase/decrease of x.

bE-f)
w

• In the function f(x), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other

variables (A through Z, r, θ) are treated as constants, and the value currently
assigned to that variable is applied during the calculation.
• Input of Ax and the closing parenthesis can be omitted. If you omit Ax, the
calculator automatically uses a value for Ax that is appropriate for the deriva-
tive value you are trying to determine.
• Discontinuous points or sections with drastic fluctuation can adversely affect
precision or even cause an error.

56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Differential Calculations 3-2
k Applications of Differential Calculations
• Differentials can be added, subtracted, multiplied or divided with each other.

d d
––– f (a) = f '(a), ––– g (a) = g'(a)
dx dx
Therefore:

f '(a) + g'(a), f '(a) × g'(a), etc.

• Differential results can be used in addition, subtraction, multiplication, and

division, and in functions.

2 × f '(a), log ( f '(a)), etc.

• Functions can be used in any of the terms ( f (x), a, Ax) of a differential.

d
––– (sinx + cosx, sin0.5), etc.
dx

• Note that you cannot use a Solve, differential, quadratic differential, integration,
maximum/minimum value or Σ calculation expression inside a differential
calculation term.

• Pressing A during calculation of a differential (while the cursor is not shown

on the display) interrupts the calculation.
• Always use radians (Rad Mode) as the angle unit when performing trigono-
metric differentials.

57
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3-3 Quadratic Differential Calculations
[OPTN]-[CALC]-[d2/dx2]

After displaying the function analysis menu, you can input quadratic differentials
using either of the two following formats.

3(d 2/dx 2) f(x),a,n)

Final boundary ( n = 1 to 15)

Differential coefficient point

d2 d2
–––2 ( f (x), a, n) ⇒ –––2 f (a)
dx dx

Quadratic differential calculations produce an approximate differential value using

the following second order differential formula, which is based on Newton's
polynomial interpretation.

– f(x – 2h) + 16 f(x – h) – 30 f(x) + 16 f(x + h) – f(x + 2h)

f''(x) = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
12h2
In this expression, values for “sufficiently small increments of x ” are sequentially
calculated using the following formula, with the value of m being substituted as m
= 1, 2, 3 and so on.

1
h = ––––
5m
The calculation is finished when the value of f " (x) based on the value of h
calculated using the last value of m, and the value of f " (x) based on the value of
h calculated using the current value of m are identical before the upper n digit is
reached.

• Normally, you should not input a value for n. It is recommended that you only
input a value for n when required for calculation precision.
• Inputting a larger value for n does not necessarily produce greater precision.

uTo perform a quadratic differential calculation

Example To determine the quadratic differential coefficient at the point

where x = 3 for the function y = x3 + 4x2 + x – 6
Here we will use a final boundary value of n = 6.
Input the function f(x).
AK4(CALC)3(d2/dx2) vMd+
evx+v-g,

58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quadratic Differential Calculations 3-3
Input 3 as point a, which is the differential coefficient point.
d,

Input 6 as n, which is final boundary.

g)
w

• In the function f(x), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other

variables (A through Z, r, θ) are treated as constants, and the value currently
assigned to that variable is applied during the calculation.
• Input of the final boundary value n and the closing parenthesis can be omitted.
• Discontinuous points or sections with drastic fluctuation can adversely affect
precision or even cause an error.

k Quadratic Differential Applications

• Arithmetic operations can be performed using two quadratic differentials.
d2 d2
–––2 f (a) = f ''(a), –––2 g (a) = g''(a)
dx dx
Therefore:

f ''(a) + g''(a), f ''(a) × g''(a), etc.

• The result of a quadratic differential calculation can be used in a subsequent

arithmetic or function calculation.

2 × f ''(a), log ( f ''(a) ), etc.

• Functions can be used within the terms ( f(x), a, n ) of a quadratic differential

expression.
d2
–––2 (sin x + cos x, sin 0.5), etc.
dx

• Note that you cannot use a Solve, differential, quadratic differential, integration,
maximum/minimum value or Σ calculation expression inside of a quadratic
differential calculation term.

• Use only integers within the range of 1 to 15 for the value of final boundary n.
Use of a value outside this range produces an error.
• You can interrupt an ongoing quadratic differential calculation by pressing the
A key.
• Always use radians (Rad Mode) as the angle unit when performing trigono-
metric quadratic differentials.

59
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3-4 Integration Calculations [OPTN]-[CALC]-[∫dx]

To perform integration calculations, first display the function analysis menu and
then input the values in one of the formulas shown below.
Gauss-Kronrod Rule
4(∫dx) f(x) , a , b , tol )

Tolerance
End point
Start point

∫( f(x), a, b, tol) ⇒ ∫a f(x)dx

b

∫
b
Area of f(x)dx is calculated
a

Simpson’s Rule
4(∫dx) f(x) , a , b , n )

Number of divisions (value for n in N = 2 n,

n is an integer from 1 through 9)
End point
Start point

∫( f(x), a, b, n) ⇒ ∫
b
f(x)dx, N = 2n
a

As shown in the illustration above, integration calculations are performed by

calculating integral values from a to b for the function y = f (x) where a < x < b, and
f (x) > 0*. This in effect calculates the surface area of the shaded area in the
illustration.

* When f (x) < 0 on a < x < b, the surface area calculation produces negative
values (surface area below the x-axis).

k Changing Integration Calculation Methods

This calculator can use either Gauss-Kronrod Rule or Simpson’s Rule to perform
P.6 integration calculations. To select a method, display the set up screen and select
either “Gaus” (for Gauss-Kronrod Rule) or “Simp” (for Simpson’s Rule) for the
Integration item.
All of the explanations in this manual use Gauss-Kronrod Rule.

60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Integration Calculations 3-4
uTo perform an integration calculation

Example To perform the integration calculation for the function shown

below, with a tolerance of “tol” = 1E - 4

∫
5
(2x2 + 3x + 4) dx
1

Input the function f (x).

AK4(CALC)4(∫dx)cvx+dv+e,

Input the start point and end point.

b,f,

Input the tolerance value.

bE-e)w

• In the function f(x), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other

variables (A through Z, r, θ) are treated as constants, and the value currently
assigned to that variable is applied during the calculation.
• Input of “tol” in Gauss-Kronrod Rule, “n” in Simpson’s Rule, and closing
parenthesis with both rules can be omitted. If you omit “tol”, the calculator
automatically uses a value of 1E - 5. In the case of “n”, the calculator automati-
cally selects the most appropriate value.
• Integration calculations can take a long time to complete.

k Application of Integration Calculation

• Integrals can be used in addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.

∫ ∫
b d
f (x) dx + g (x) dx, etc.
a c

• Integration results can be used in addition, subtraction, multiplication or

division, in functions.

∫ ∫
b b
2× f(x) dx, etc. log ( f(x) dx), etc.
a a

• Functions can be used in any of the terms ( f(x), a, b, n) of an integral.

∫ ∫
cos 0.5
(sin x + cos x) dx = (sin x + cos x, sin 0.5, cos 0.5, 5)
sin 0.5

• Note that you cannot use a Solve, differential, quadratic differential, integration,
maximum/minimum value or Σ calculation expression inside of an integration
calculation term.

61
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3-4 Integration Calculations

• Pressing A during calculation of an integral (while the cursor is not shown

on the display) interrupts the calculation.
• Always use radians (Rad Mode) as the angle unit when performing trigono-
metric integrations.
• Factors such as the type of function being used, positive and negative values
within divisions, and the division where integration is being performed can
cause significant error in integration values and erroneous calculation results.

Note the following points to ensure correct integration values.

(1) When cyclical functions for integration values become positive or negative for
different divisions, perform the calculation for single cycles, or divide between
negative and positive, and then add the results together.

Positive
part (S)

Negative part (S)

∫ ∫ ∫
b c b
f(x)dx = f(x)dx + (– f(x)dx)
a a c

Positive part ( S) Negative part ( S)

(2) When minute fluctuations in integration divisions produce large fluctuations in

integration values, calculate the integration divisions separately (divide the
large fluctuation areas into smaller divisions), and then add the results
together.

∫ ∫ ∫ ∫
b x1 x2 b
f(x)dx = f(x)dx + f(x)dx +.....+ f(x)dx
a a x1 x4

62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3-5 Maximum/Minimum Value Calculations
[OPTN]-[CALC]-[FMin]/[FMax]

After displaying the function analysis menu, you can input maximum/minimum
calculations using the formats below, and solve for the maximum and minimum of
a function within interval a < x < b.

uMinimum Value
6(g)1(FMin) f(x) , a , b , n )

Precision (n = 1 to 9)
End point of interval
Start point of interval

uMaximum Value
6(g)2(FMax) f(x), a , b , n )

Precision (n = 1 to 9)
End point of interval
Start point of interval

uTo perform maximum/minimum value calculations

Example 1 To determine the minimum value for the interval defined by start
point a = 0 and end point b = 3, with a precision of n = 6 for the
function y = x2 – 4x + 9
Input f(x).
AK4(CALC)6(g)1(FMin) vx-ev+j,

Input the interval a = 0, b = 3.

a,d,

Input the precision n = 6.

g)
w

63
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3-5 Maximum/Minimum Value Calculations

Example 2 To determine the maximum value for the interval defined by start
point a = 0 and end point b = 3, with a precision of n = 6 for the
function y = –x2 + 2 x + 2

Input f(x).
AK4(CALC)6(g)2(FMax) -vx+cv+c,

Input the interval a = 0, b = 3.

a,d,

Input the precision n = 6.

g)
w

• In the function f(x), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other

variables (A through Z, r, θ) are treated as constants, and the value currently
assigned to that variable is applied during the calculation.
• Input of n and the closing parenthesis following the precision value can be
omitted.
• Discontinuous points or sections with drastic fluctuation can adversely affect
precision or even cause an error.
• Note that you cannot use a Solve, differential, quadratic differential, integration,
maximum/minimum value or Σ calculation expression inside of a maximum/
minimum calculation term.
• Inputting a larger value for n increases the precision of the calculation, but it
also increases the amount of time required to perform the calculation.

• The value you input for the end point of the interval (b) must be greater than
the value you input for the start point (a). Otherwise an error is generated.
• You can interrupt an ongoing maximum/minimum calculation by pressing the
A key.
• You can input an integer in the range of 1 to 9 for the value of n. Using any
value outside this range causes an error.

64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3-6 Summation (Σ) Calculations [OPTN]-[CALC]-[Σ(]

To perform Σ calculations, first display the function analysis menu, and then input
the values shown in the formula below.

6(g)3(Σ() a k , k , α , β , n )

Distance between partitions

Last term of sequence ak
Initial term of sequence ak
Variable used by sequence ak

Σ (a k, k, α, β, n) ⇒ Σa
k=α
k

Σ calculation is the calculation of the partial sum of sequence ak, using the
following formula.

β
S = aα + aα +1 +........+ aβ =
k=α
Σa k

k Example Σ Calculation

Example To calculate the following:

6

Σ (k
k=2
2
– 3k + 5)

Use n = 1 as the distance between partitions.

Input sequence ak.
AK4(CALC)6(g)3(Σ()aKx-daK+f,

Input variable used by sequence ak.

aK,

Input the initial term of sequence ak and last term of sequence ak.
c,g,

Input n.
b)
w

65
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3-6 Summation (Σ) Calculations

• You can use only one variable in the function for input sequence ak.
• Input integers only for the initial term of sequence ak and last term of sequence
ak .
• Input of n and the closing parentheses can be omitted. If you omit n, the
calculator automatically uses n = 1.

k Σ Calculation Applications

• Arithmetic operations using Σ calculation expressions

n n
Expressions: Sn = Σ ak, Tn = Σ bk
k=1 k=1

Possible operations: Sn + Tn, Sn – Tn, etc.

• Arithmetic and function operations using Σ calculation results

2 × Sn, log (Sn), etc.

• Function operations using Σ calculation terms (ak, k)

Σ (sink, k, 1, 5), etc.

• Note that you cannot use a Solve, differential, quadratic differential,

integration, maximum/minimum value or Σ calculation expression inside of a Σ
calculation term.

• Make sure that the value used as the final term β is greater than the value
used as the initial term α. Otherwise, an error will occur.
• To interrupt an ongoing Σ calculation (indicated when the cursor is not on the
display), press the A key.

66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

4
Complex Numbers
This calculator is capable of performing the following operations
using complex numbers.
• Arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication,
division)
• Calculation of the reciprocal, square root, and square of a
complex number
• Calculation of the absolute value and argument of a complex
number
• Calculation of conjugate complex numbers
• Extraction of the real part
• Extraction of the imaginary part

4-1 Before Beginning a Complex Number Calculation

4-2 Performing Complex Number Calculations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4-1 Before Beginning a Complex Number
Calculation
Before beginning a complex number calculation, press K3 (CPLX) to display
the complex number calculation menu.

• {i} ... {imaginary unit i input}

• {Abs}/{Arg} ... obtains {absolute value}/{argument}
• {Conj} ... {obtains conjugate}
• {ReP}/{ImP} ... {real}/{imaginary} part extraction

68
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 4-2 Performing Complex Number Calculations
The following examples show how to perform each of the complex number
calculations available with this calculator.

k Arithmetic Operations [OPTN]-[CPLX]-[i]

Arithmetic operations are the same as those you use for manual calculations. You
can even use parentheses and memory.

Example 1 (1 + 2i) + (2 + 3i)

AK3(CPLX)
(b+c1(i))
+(c+d1(i))w

Example 2 (2 + i) × (2 – i)

AK3(CPLX)
(c+1(i))
*(c-1(i))w

k Reciprocals, Square Roots, and Squares

Example (3 + i)

AK3(CPLX)
!9(d+1(i))w

k Absolute Value and Argument [OPTN]-[CPLX]-[Abs]/[Arg]

The unit regards a complex number in the form a + bi as a coordinate on a
Gaussian plane, and calculates absolute value Z and argument (arg).

Example To calculate absolute value (r) and argument (θ ) for the

complex number 3 + 4i, with the angle unit set for degrees

Imaginary axis

Real axis

69
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 4-2 Performing Complex Number Calculations

AK3(CPLX)2(Abs)
(d+e1(i))w
(Calculation of absolute value)

AK3(CPLX)3(Arg)
(d+e1(i))w
(Calculation of argument)

• The result of the argument calculation differs in accordance with the current
angle unit setting (degrees, radians, grads).

k Conjugate Complex Numbers [OPTN]-[CPLX]-[Conj]

A complex number of the form a + bi becomes a conjugate complex number of the
form a – bi.

Example To calculate the conjugate complex number for the complex

number 2 + 4i

AK3(CPLX)4(Conj)
(c+e1(i))w

k Extraction of Real and Imaginary Parts

[OPTN]-[CPLX]-[ReP]/[lmP]
Use the following procedure to extract the real part a and the imaginary part b
from a complex number of the form a + bi.

Example To extract the real and imaginary parts of the complex number
2 + 5i

AK3(CPLX)5(ReP)
(c+f1(i))w
(Real part extraction)

AK3(CPLX)6(ImP)
(c+f1(i))w
(Imaginary part extraction)

70
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Performing Complex Number Calculations 4-2
k Complex Number Calculation Precautions
• The input/output range of complex numbers is normally 10 digits for the
mantissa and two digits for the exponent.
• When a complex number has more than 21 digits, the real part and imaginary
part are displayed on separate lines.
• When either the real part or imaginary part equals zero, that part is not
displayed.
P.22 • 20 bytes of memory are used whenever you assign a complex number to a
variable.
• The following functions can be used with complex numbers.
, x2, x–1
← ←
Int, Frac, Rnd, Intg, Fix, Sci, ENG, ENG, ° ’ ”, ° ’ ”, a b/c, d/c, F⇔D

71
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 72
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

5
Binary, Octal, Decimal,
and Hexadecimal
Calculations
This calculator is capable of performing the following operations
involving different number systems.
• Number system conversion
• Arithmetic operations
• Negative values
• Bitwise operations

5-1 Before Beginning a Binary, Octal, Decimal, or

Hexadecimal Calculation with Integers
5-2 Selecting a Number System
5-3 Arithmetic Operations
5-4 Negative Values and Bitwise Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5-1 Before Beginning a Binary, Octal, Decimal, or
Hexadecimal Calculation with Integers
You can use the RUN Mode and binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal settings
to perform calculations that involve binary, octal, decimal and hexadecimal values.
You can also convert between number systems and perform bitwise operations.

• You cannot use scientific functions in binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal
calculations.
• You can use only integers in binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal calcula-
tions, which means that fractional values are not allowed. If you input a value
that includes a decimal part, the unit automatically cuts off the decimal part.
• If you attempt to enter a value that is invalid for the number system (binary,
octal, decimal, hexadecimal) you are using, the calculator displays an error
message. The following shows the numerals that can be used in each number
system.
Binary: 0, 1
Octal: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Decimal: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Hexadecimal: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F

• The alphabetic characters used in the hexadecimal number appear differently

on the display to distinguish them from text characters.

Normal Text A B C D E F
Hexadecimal Values u v w x y z

Keys

• Negative binary, octal, and hexadecimal values are produced using the two’s
complement of the original value.
• The following are the display capacities for each of the number systems.

Number System Display Capacity

Binary 16 digits

Octal 11 digits

Decimal 10 digits

Hexadecimal 8 digits

74
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Before Beginning a Binary, Octal, Decimal, or Hexadecimal Calculation with Integers 5-1
• The following are the calculation ranges for each of the number systems.

Binary Values
Positive: 0 < x < 111111111111111
Negative: 1000000000000000 < x < 1111111111111111

Octal Values
Positive: 0 < x < 17777777777
Negative: 20000000000 < x < 37777777777

Decimal Values
Positive: 0 < x < 2147483647
Negative: –2147483648 < x < –1

Hexadecimal Values
Positive: 0 < x < 7FFFFFFF
Negative: 80000000 < x < FFFFFFFF

uTo perform a binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal calculation

1. In the main menu, select RUN.

P.5 2. Press !Z and then specify the defalut number system by pressing 2
(Dec), 3 (Hex), 4 (Bin), or 5 (Oct).

3. Press J to change to the screen for calculation input. This causes a function
menu with the following items to appear.
• {d~o}/{LOG} ... {number system specification}/{bitwise operation} menu

75
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5-2 Selecting a Number System
You can specify decimal, hexadecimal, binary, or octal as the default number system
using the set up screen. After you press the function key that corresponds to the
system you want to use, press w.

uTo convert a displayed value from one number system to another

Example To convert 2210 (default number system) to its binary or octal

value

A!Z2(Dec)J1(d~o)1(d)
ccw

!Z4(Bin)Jw

!Z5(Oct)Jw

uTo specify a number system for an input value

You can specify a number system for each individual value you input. While
binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal is set as the default number system, press
1 (d~o) to display a menu of number system symbols. Press the function key
that corresponds to the symbol you want to select and then input the value you
want.

• {d}/{h}/{b}/{o} ... {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal}

uTo input values of mixed number systems

Example To input 12310 or 10102, when the default number system is

hexadecimal

!Z3(Hex)J
A1(d~o)1(d)bcdw

3(b)babaw

76
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5-3 Arithmetic Operations
Example 1 To calculate 101112 + 110102

!Z4(Bin)J
Ababbb+
bbabaw

Example 2 To input and execute 1238 × ABC16, when the default number
system is decimal or hexadecimal

!Z2(Dec)J
A1(d~o)4(o)bcd*
P.74 2(h)ABCw

!Z3(Hex)Jw

77
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5-4 Negative Values and Bitwise Operations
While binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal is set as the default number system,
press 2 (LOG) to display a menu of negation and bitwise operators.

• {Neg} ... {negation}*1

• {Not}/{and}/{or}/{xor}/{xnor} ... {NOT}*2/{AND}/{OR}/{XOR}/{XNOR}*3

k Negative Values

Example To determine the negative of 1100102

!Z4(Bin)J
A2(LOG)1(Neg)
bbaabaw

k Bitwise Operations

Example 1 To input and execute “12016 and AD16”

!Z3(Hex)J
Abca2(LOG)
P.74 3(and)ADw

Example 2 To display the result of “368 or 11102” as an octal value

!Z5(Oct)JJ
Adg2(LOG)
4(or)J1(d~o)3(b)
bbbaw

Example 3 To negate 2FFFED16

!Z3(Hex)JJ
A2(LOG)2(Not)
P.74 cFFFEDw

*1 two’s complement
*2 one’s complement (bitwise complement)
*3 bitwise AND, bitwise OR, bitwise XOR, bitwise XNOR

78
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Matrix Calculations
26 matrix memories (Mat A through Mat Z) plus a Matrix Answer
6
Memory (MatAns), make it possible to perform the following
matrix operations.
• Addition, subtraction, multiplication
• Scalar multiplication calculations
• Determinant calculations
• Matrix transposition
• Matrix inversion
• Matrix squaring
• Raising a matrix to a specific power
• Absolute value, integer part extraction, fractional part extraction,
maximum integer calculations
• Matrix modification using matrix commands

6-1 Before Performing Matrix Calculations

6-2 Matrix Cell Operations
6-3 Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands
6-4 Matrix Calculations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6-1 Before Performing Matrix Calculations
In the Main Menu, select the MAT icon to enter the Matrix Mode and display its
initial screen.
2 (row) × 2 (column) matrix

Not dimension preset

• {DEL}/{DEL·A} ... deletes {a specific matrix}/{all matrices}

• The maximum number of rows that can be specified for a matrix is 255, and the
maximum number of columns is 255.

k About Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns)

The calculator automatically stores matrix calculation results in Matrix Answer
Memory. Note the following points about Matrix Answer Memory.
• Whenever you perform a matrix calculation, the current Matrix Answer Memory
contents are replaced by the new result. The previous contents are deleted and
cannot be recovered.
P.92 • Inputting values into a matrix does not affect Matrix Answer Memory contents.

k Creating a Matrix
To create a matrix, you must first define its dimensions (size) in the MATRIX list.
Then you can input values into the matrix.

uTo specify the dimensions of a matrix

Example To create a 2-row × 3-column matrix in the area named Mat B

Highlight Mat B.
c

80
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Before Performing Matrix Calculations 6-1
Specify the number of rows.
cw
Specify the number of columns.
d
w

• All of the cells of a new matrix contain the value 0.

• If “Mem ERROR” remains next to the matrix area name after you input the
dimensions, it means there is not enough free memory to create the matrix you
want.

uTo input cell values

Example To input the following data into Matrix B :

1 2 3
4 5 6

Select Mat B.
c

Highlighted cell (up to six digits

can be displayed)
w
bwcwdw
ewfwgw
(Data is input into the highlighted cell.
Each time you press w, the highlight-
ing move to the next cell to the right.)
Value in currently highlighted cell

• Displayed cell values show positive integers up to six digits, and negative
integers up to five digits (one digit used for the negative sign). Exponential
values are shown with up to two digits for the exponent. Fractional values are
not displayed.
• You can see the entire value assigned to a cell by using the cursor keys to
move the highlighting to the cell whose value you want to view.
• The amount of memory required for a matrix is ten bytes per cell. This means
that a 3 × 3 matrix requires 90 bytes of memory (3 × 3 × 10 = 90).

81
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6-1 Before Performing Matrix Calculations

k Deleting Matrices
You can delete either a specific matrix or all matrices in memory.

uTo delete a specific matrix

1. While the MATRIX list is on the display, use f and c to highlight the matrix
you want to delete.

2. Press 1 (DEL).

3. Press 1 (YES) to delete the matrix or 6 (NO) to abort the operation without
deleting anything.

• The indicator “None” replaces the dimensions of the matrix you delete.

uTo delete all matrices

1. While the MATRIX list is on the display, press 2 (DEL·A).

2. Press 1 (YES) to delete all matrices in memory or 6 (NO) to abort the

operation without deleting anything.

• The indicator “None” is shown for all the matrices.

82
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6-2 Matrix Cell Operations
Use the following procedure to prepare a matrix for cell operations.
1. While the MATRIX list is on the display, use f and c to highlight the name
of the matrix you want to use.

2. Press w and the function menu with the following items appears.
• {R·OP} ... {row calculation menu}
• {ROW}/{COL} ... {row}/{column} operation menu

All of the following examples use Matrix A recalled by the above operation.

k Row Calculations
The following menu appears whenever you press 1 (R·OP) while a recalled
matrix is on the display.

• {Swap} ... {row swap}

• {×Rw} ... {product of specified row and scalar}
• {×Rw+} ... {addition of one row and the product of a specified row with a scalar}
• {Rw+} ... {addition of specified row to another row}

uTo swap two rows

Example To swap rows 2 and 3 of the following matrix :

1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

1(R·OP)1(Swap)

Input the number of the rows you want to swap.

cwdw

83
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6-2 Matrix Cell Operations

uTo calculate the product of a row

Example To calculate the product of row 2 of the following matrix and the
scalar 4 :
1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6
1(R·OP)2(×Rw)
Input multiplier value.
ew
Specify row number.
cw

uTo calculate the product of a row and add the result to another row

Example To calculate the product of row 2 of the following matrix and

the scalar 4, then add the result to row 3 :
1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6
1(R·OP)3(×Rw+)
Input multiplier value.
ew
Specify the row number whose product should
be calculated.
cw
Specify the row number where result should be
added.
dw

uTo add two rows together

Example To add row 2 to row 3 of the following matrix :

1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6
1(R·OP)4(Rw+)
Specify the row number to be added.
cw
Specify the row number to be added to.
dw

84
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Matrix Cell Operations 6-2
k Row Operations
The following menu appears whenever you press 2 (ROW) while a recalled
matrix is on the display.

• {DEL} ... {delete row}

• {INS} ... {insert row}
• {ADD} ... {add row}

uTo delete a row

Example To delete row 2 of the following matrix :

1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

2(ROW)c

1(DEL)

uTo insert a row

Example To insert a new row between rows 1 and 2 of the following

matrix :
1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

2(ROW)c

2(INS)

85
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6-2 Matrix Cell Operations

uTo add a row

Example To add a new row below row 3 of the following matrix :

1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

2(ROW)cc

3(ADD)

k Column Operations
The following menu appears whenever you press 3 (COL) while a recalled
matrix is on the display.

• {DEL} ... {delete column}

• {INS} ... {insert column}
• {ADD} ... {add column}

uTo delete a column

Example To delete column 2 of the following matrix :

1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

3(COL)e

1(DEL)

86
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Matrix Cell Operations 6-2
uTo insert a column

Example To insert a new column between columns 1 and 2 of the

following matrix :
1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

3(COL)e

2(INS)

uTo add a column

Example To add a new column to the right of column 2 of the following

matrix :
1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

3(COL)e

3(ADD)

87
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6-3 Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands
[OPTN]-[MAT]

uTo display the matrix commands

1. From the Main Menu, select the RUN icon and press w.

P.27 2. Press K to display the option menu.

3. Press 2 (MAT) to display the matrix operation menu.

The following describes only the matrix command menu items that are used for
creating matrices and inputting matrix data.

• {Mat} ... {Mat command (matrix specification)}

P.91 • {M→L} ... {Mat→List command (assign contents of selected column to list file)}
• {Aug} ... {Augment command (link two matrices)}
• {Iden} ... {Identity command (identity matrix input)}
• {Dim} ... {Dim command (dimension check)}
• {Fill} ... {Fill command (identical cell values)}

k Matrix Data Input Format

The following shows the format you should use when inputting data to create a
matrix using the matrix operation menu’s Mat command.

a11 a12 a1n

a21 a22 a2n

am1 am2 amn

= [ [a11, a12, ..., a1n] [a21, a22, ..., a2n] .... [am1, am2, ..., amn] ]
→ Mat [letter A through Z]

• The maximum value of both m and n is 255.

Example 1 To input the following data as Matrix A :

1 3 5
2 4 6

K2(MAT)
![![b,d,f
!]![c,e,g
!]!]a1(Mat)aA

88
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands 6-3
w Matrix name

• An error occurs if memory becomes full as you are inputting data.

• You can also use the above format inside a program that inputs matrix data.

uTo input an identity matrix

Use the matrix operation menu’s Identity command (1) to create an identity
matrix.

Example 2 To create a 3 × 3 identity matrix as Matrix A

K2(MAT)6(g)1(Iden)
da6(g)1(Mat)aAw
Number of rows/columns

uTo check the dimensions of a matrix

Use the matrix operation menu’s Dim command (2) to check the dimensions of
an existing matrix.

Example 3 To check the dimensions of Matrix A, which was input in

Example 1

K2(MAT)6(g)2(Dim)6(g)
Number of rows
1(Mat) aAw

Number of columns

The display shows that Matrix A consists of two rows and three columns.

You can also use {Dim} to specify the dimensions of the matrix.

Example 4 To specify dimensions of 2 rows and 3 columns for Matrix B

!{c,d!}aK
2(MAT)6(g)2(Dim)6(g)
1(Mat)aBw

89
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6-3 Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands

k Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands

You can also use matrix commands to assign values to and recall values from an
existing matrix, to fill in all cells of an existing matrix with the same value, to
combine two matrices into a single matrix, and to assign the contents of a matrix
column to a list file.

uTo assign values to and recall values from an existing matrix

Use the following format with the matrix operation menu’s Mat command (1) to
specify a cell for value assignment and recall.

Mat X [m, n]
X ..................... matrix name (A through Z, or Ans)
m ..................... row number
n ...................... column number

Example 1 Assign 10 to the cell at row 1, column 2 of the following matrix :

1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

baaK2(MAT)1(Mat)
aA![b,c!]w

Example 2 Multiply the value in the cell at row 2, column 2 of the above
matrix by 5

K2(MAT)1(Mat)
aA![c,c!]
*fw

u To fill a matrix with identical values and to combine two matrices

into a single matrix
Use the matrix operation menu’s Fill command (3) to fill all the cells of an
existing matrix with an identical value, or the Augment command (5) to combine
two existing matrices into a single matrix.

Example 1 To fill all of the cells of Matrix A with the value 3

K2(MAT)6(g)3(Fill)
d,6(g)1(Mat)aAw
Filler value

90
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands 6-3

Example 2 To combine the following two matrices :

1 3
A= B=
2 4

K2(MAT)5(Aug)1(Mat)
aA,1(Mat)aBw

• The two matrices you combine must have the same number of rows. An error
occurs if you try to combine two matrices that have different numbers of rows.

uTo assign the contents of a matrix column to a list file

Use the following format with the matrix operation menu’s Mat→List command
(2) to specify a column and a list file.

Mat → List (Mat X, m) → List n

X = matrix name (A through Z, or Ans)
m = column number
n = list number

Example To assign the contents of column 2 of the following matrix to list

file 1 :
1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

K2(MAT)2(M→L)1(Mat)
aA,c)a
Column number
K1(LIST)1(List)bw

You can use Matrix Answer Memory to assign the results of the above matrix
input and edit operations to a matrix variable. To do so, use the following
syntax.
• Fill (n, Mat α) → Mat β
• Augment (Mat α, Mat β) → Mat γ
In the above, α, β, and γ are any variable names A through Z, and n is any
value.
The above does not affect the contents of Matrix Answer Memory.

91
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6-4 Matrix Calculations [OPTN]-[MAT]

Use the matrix command menu to perform matrix calculation operations.

uTo display the matrix commands

1. From the Main Menu, select the RUN icon and press w.

P.27 2. Press K to display the option menu.

3. Press 2 (MAT) to display the matrix command menu.

The following describes only the matrix commands that are used for matrix
arithmetic operations.

• {Mat} ... {Mat command (matrix specification)}

• {Det} ... {Det command (determinant command)}
• {Trn} ... {Trn command (transpose matrix command)}
• {Iden} ... {Identity command (identity matrix input)}

All of the following examples assume that matrix data is already stored in memory.

k Matrix Arithmetic Operations

Matrix 1 Arithmetic operator key Matrix 2

Mat A Mat A
+
- w
Mat Z Mat Z
*
MatAns MatAns

Example 1 To add the following two matrices (Matrix A + Matrix B) :

1 1 2 3
A= B=
2 1 2 1

1(Mat)aA+
1(Mat)aBw

Example 2 To multiply the two matrices in Example 1 (Matrix A × Matrix B)

1(Mat)aA*
1(Mat)aBw

92
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Matrix Calculations 6-4
• The two matrices must have the same dimensions in order to be added or
subtracted. An error occurs if you try to add or subtract matrices of different
dimensions.
• For multiplication, the number of columns in Matrix 1 must match the number of
rows in Matrix 2. Otherwise, an error occurs.

• You can use an identity matrix in place of Matrix 1 or Matrix 2 in the matrix
arithmetic format. Use the matrix command menu’s Identity command (1)
to input the identity matrix.

Example 3 To multiply Matrix A (from Example 1) by a 2 × 2 identity matrix

1(Mat)aA*
6(g)1(Iden)cw
Number of rows and columns.

k Matrix Scalar Multiplication

The following is the format for calculating a matrix scalar multiplication, which
multiplies the value in each cell of the matrix by the same value.

Scalar value Matrix

Mat A
k w
Mat Z
MatAns

Example Calculate the product of the following matrix using a multiplier

value of 4 :
1 2
Matrix A =
3 4

e1(Mat)aAw

k Determinant
Matrix

Mat A
3 (Det) w
Mat Z
MatAns

93
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6-4 Matrix Calculations

Example Obtain the determinant for the following matrix :

1 2 3
Matrix A = 4 5 6
–1 –2 0

3(Det)1(Mat)aAw

• Determinants can be obtained only for square matrices (same number of rows
and columns). Trying to obtain a determinant for a matrix that is not square
produces an error.

• The determinant of a 2 × 2 matrix is calculated as shown below.

a11 a12
|A|= = a11a22 – a12a21
a21 a22

• The determinant of a 3 × 3 matrix is calculated as shown below.

a11 a12 a13
|A|= a21 a22 a23
a31 a32 a33
= a11a22a33 + a12a23a31 + a13a21a32
– a11a23a32 – a12a21a33 – a13a22a31

k Matrix Transposition
A matrix is transposed when its rows become columns and its columns become
rows. The following is the format for matrix transposition.

Matrix

Mat A
4 (Trn) w
Mat Z
MatAns

Example To transpose the following matrix :

1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

4(Trn)1(Mat)aAw

94
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Matrix Calculations 6-4
k Matrix Inversion

Matrix

Mat A
!X w
Mat Z
MatAns

Example To invert the following matrix :

1 2
Matrix A =
3 4

1(Mat)aA!Xw

• Only square matrices (same number of rows and columns) can be inverted.
Trying to invert a matrix that is not square produces an error.
• A matrix with a value of zero cannot be inverted. Trying to invert a matrix with
value of zero produces an error.
• Calculation precision is affected for matrices whose value is near zero.

• A matrix being inverted must satisfy the conditions shown below.

1 0
A A–1 = A–1 A = E =
0 1

• The following shows the formula used to invert Matrix A into inverse matrix
A–1.
a b
A=
c d

1 d –b
A–1 =
ad – bc –c a Note that ad – bc G 0.

95
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6-4 Matrix Calculations

k Squaring a Matrix

Matrix

Mat A
x w
Mat Z
MatAns

Example To square the following matrix :

1 2
Matrix A =
3 4

1(Mat)aAxw

k Raising a Matrix to a Power

Matrix Natural number

Mat A
M k w
Mat Z
MatAns

Example To raise the following matrix to the third power :

1 2
Matrix A =
3 4

1(Mat)aAMdw

k Determining the Absolute Value, Integer Part, Fraction

Part, and Maximum Integer of a Matrix

Function command Matrix

Abs Mat A
Frac
w
Int Mat Z
Intg MatAns

96
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Matrix Calculations 6-4

Example To determine the absolute value of the following matrix :

1 –2
Matrix A =
–3 4

K6(g)4(NUM)1(Abs)
K2(MAT)1(Mat)aAw

• Determinants and inverse matrices are calculated using the elimination

method, so errors (such as dropped digits) may be generated.
• Matrix operations are performed individually on each cell, so calculations
may require considerable time to complete.
• The calculation precision of displayed results for matrix calculations is ± 1 at
the least significant digit.
• If a matrix calculation result is too large to fit into Matrix Answer Memory, an
error occurs.
• You can use the following operation to transfer Matrix Answer Memory
contents to another matrix (or when Matrix Answer Memory contains a
determinant to a variable).
MatAns → Mat α
In the above, α is any variable name A through Z. The above does not affect
the contents of Matrix Answer Memory.

97
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 98
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Equation Calculations

7
Your graphic calculator can perform the following three types of
calculations:
• Linear equations with two to six unknowns
• High-order equations (quadratic, cubic)
• Solve calculations

7-1 Before Beginning an Equation Calculation

7-2 Linear Equations with Two to Six Unknowns
7-3 Quadratic and Cubic Equations
7-4 Solve Calculations
7-5 What to Do When an Error Occurs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7-1 Before Beginning an Equation Calculation
Before beginning an equation calculation you have to first enter the correct mode,
and you must also clear the equation memories of any data that might be left over
from a previous calculation.

k Entering an Equation Calculation Mode

In the Main Menu, select the EQUA icon to enter the Equation Mode.

• {SIML} ... {linear equation with two to six unknowns}

• {POLY} ... {quadratic or cubic equation}
• {SOLV} ... {solve calculation}

k Clearing Equation Memories

1. Enter the equation calculation mode (SIML or POLY) you want to use and
perform the function key operation required for that mode.
• In the case of the SIML Mode (1), use function keys 1 (2) through 5 (6)
to specify the number of unknowns.
• In the case of the POLY Mode (2), use function keys 1 (2) or 2 (3) to
specify the degree of the polynomial.
• If your pressed 3 (SOLV), advance directly to step 2.

2. Press 2 (DEL).

3. Press 1 (YES) to delete the applicable equation memories, or 6 (NO) to

abort the operation without deleting anything.

100
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7-2 Linear Equations with Two to Six Unknowns
You can use the procedures described here to solve linear equations with
unknowns that match the following formats:

Two unknowns a1x + b1y = c1

a2x + b2y = c2

Six unknowns a1x + b1y + c1z + d1t + e1u + f1v = g1

a2x + b2y + c2z + d2t + e2u + f2v = g2
a3x + b3y + c3z + d3t + e3u + f3v = g3
a4x + b4y + c4z + d4t + e4u + f4v = g4
a5x + b5y + c5z + d5t + e5u + f5v = g5
a6x + b6y + c6z + d6t + e6u + f6v = g6

• You can also solve linear equations with three, four, and five unknowns. In
each case, the format is similar to those shown above.

k Specifying the Number of Unknowns

While in the Equation Mode, press 1 (SIML) and then specify the number of
unknowns.

• {2}/{3}/{4}/{5}/{6} ... linear equation with {2}/{3}/{4}/{5}/{6} unknowns

101
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7-2 Linear Equations with Two to Six Unknowns

k Solving Linear Equations with Three Unknowns

Example To solve the following linear equations for x, y, and z:

4x + y – 2z = –1
x + 6y + 3z = 1
–5x + 4y + z = –7

1. While in the Linear Equation Mode (SIML), press 2 (3), because the linear
equations being solved have three unknowns.

2. Input each coefficient. Coefficient input cells

ewbw-cw-bw
bwgwdwbw
-fwewbw-hw

1 2 3 4 5 6
Value being input into highlighted cell

Each time you press w, the input value is registered in the highlighted cell.
Each press of w inputs values in the following sequence:

coefficient a1 → coefficient b1 → coefficient c1 → coefficient d1 →

·
·
·
·
coefficient an → coefficient bn → coefficient cn → coefficient dn (n = 2 to 6)
• You can input fractions and value memory contents as coefficients.

3. After inputting the coefficients, solve the equations.

1(SOLV)

1 2 3 4 5 6
Highlighted solution cell value

102
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Linear Equations with Two to Six Unknowns 7-2
• Internal calculations are performed using a 15-digit mantissa, but results are
displayed using a 10-digit mantissa and 2-digit exponent.
• This unit performs simultaneous linear equations by placing the coefficients
inside of a matrix. Because of this, as the coefficient matrix approaches zero,
precision in the inverse matrix is reduced and so precision in the results
produced also deteriorates. For example, the solution for a linear equation with
three unknowns would be calculated as shown below.

x a1 b1 c1 –1
d1
y = a2 b2 c2 d2
z a3 b3 c3 d3

• An error occurs whenever the unit is unable to solve the equations.

• Pressing 1 (REPT) returns to the initial display of the Linear Equation Mode.

Depending on the coefficients that you use, it may take considerable time for
the calculation result of simultaneous linear equations to appear on the
display. Failure of a result to appear immediately does not mean that the unit
is not functioning properly.

k Changing Coefficients
You can change a coefficient either before or after you register it by pressing w.

uTo change a coefficient before registering it with w

Press the A key to clear the current value and then input another one.

uTo change a coefficient after registering it with w

Use the cursor keys to highlight the cell that contains the coefficient that you want
to change. Next, input the value that you want to change to.

k Clearing All the Coefficients

While in the Linear Equation Mode, press the 3 (CLR) function key. This
operation clears all the coefficients to zero.

103
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7-3 Quadratic and Cubic Equations
This calculator can also solve quadratic and cubic equations that match the
following formats (when a G 0):

• Quadratic: ax2 + bx + c = 0
• Cubic: ax3 + bx2 + cx + d = 0

k Specifying the Degree of an Equation

While in the Equation Mode, press 2 (POLY) and then specify the degree of the
equation.

• {2}/{3} ... {quadratic}/{cubic} equation

k Solving a Quadratic or Cubic Equation

Example To solve the following cubic equation:

x3 – 2 x 2 – x + 2 = 0

1. Press 2 (3) to enter the Cubic Equation Mode.

2. Input each coefficient.

bw-cw-bwcw

• Each time you press w, the input value is registered in the highlighted cell.
Each press of w inputs values in the following sequence:
coefficient a → coefficient b → coefficient c → coefficient d
Input for coefficient d is required only for cubic equations.
• You can input fractions and value memory contents as coefficients.

3. After inputting the coefficients, press 1 (SOLV) to solve the equations.

Highlighted solution cell value

104
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Quadratic and Cubic Equations 7-3
• Internal calculations are performed using a 15-digit mantissa, but results are
displayed using a 10-digit mantissa and 2-digit exponent.
• An error occurs whenever the unit is unable to solve the equations.
• Pressing 1 (REPT) returns to the initial display of the Cubic Equation Mode.

k Multiple root (1 or 2) solutions or imaginary number

solutions
The following examples illustrate how multiple-root solutions and imaginary
number solutions are handled.

uTo solve a cubic equation that produces a multiple-value solution

Example To solve the following cubic equation:

x3 – 4x2 + 5x – 2 = 0

bw-ewfw-cw
1(SOLV)

uTo solve a cubic equation that produces an imaginary number

solution

Example To solve the following cubic equation:

x3 + x2 + x – 3 = 0

bwbwbw-dw
1(SOLV)

It may take considerable time for the calculation result of cubic equations to
appear on the display. Failure of a result to appear immediately does not
mean that the unit is not functioning properly.

105
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7-3 Quadratic and Cubic Equations

k Changing Coefficients
You can change a coefficient either before or after you register it by pressing w.

uTo change a coefficient before registering it with w

Press the A key to clear the current value and then input another one.

uTo change a coefficient after registering it with w

Use the cursor keys to highlight the cell that contains the coefficient that you want
to change. Next, input the value that you want to change to.

k Clearing All the Coefficients

While in the Quadratic or Cubic Equation Mode, press the 3 (CLR) function key.
This operation clears all the coefficients to zero.

106
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7-4 Solve Calculations
You can determine the value of any variable you are using without having to solve
the equation.
Input the equation, and a table of variables appears on the display. Use the table
to assign values to variables and then execute the calculation to obtain a solution
and display the value of the unknown variable.

P.394 • You cannot use the variable table in the Program Mode. When you want to use
the Solve calculation function in the Program Mode, you have to use program
commands to assign values to variables.

k Entering the Solve Calculation Mode

While in the Equation Mode, press 3 (SOLV). The Solve input screen appears.

Input the expression. You can input numbers, alpha-characters, and operation
symbols. If you do not input an equals sign, the calculator assumes that the
expression is to the left of the equals sign and there is a zero to the right. To
specify a value other than zero to the right of the equals sign, you must input the
equals sign and the value.

u To perform solve calculations

Example To calculate initial velocity of an object thrown into the air and
taking a time of 2 seconds to reach a height of 14 meters, when
gravitational acceleration is 9.8 m/s2

The following formula expresses the relationship between height H, initial velocity
V, time T, and gravitational acceleration G of a free falling object.
1
H = VT – –– GT 2
2
1. Press 2 (DEL) 1 (YES) to clear any previously input equations.

2. Input the equation.

aH!=aVaT-(b/c)aGaTx
w

107
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7-4 Solve Calculations

3. Input the values.

bew(H=14)
aw(V=0)
cw(T=2)
j.iw (G=9.8)

4. Press f to move the highlighting to V = 0.

5. Press 6 (SOLV) to obtain the solution.

Equation
Solution

• An error occurs if you input more than one equals sign.

• “Lft” and “Rgt” indicate the left and right sides that are calculated using the
approximate value. The closer the difference between these two values is to
zero, the greater the accuracy of the result.

Solve Calculations
The solution of the function is approximated using Newton’s method.

u Newton’s method
This method is based on the assumption
that f(x) can be approximated by a linear
expression within a very narrow range.
First, a starting value (predicted value) xo is
given. Using this starting value as a base,
approximate value x1 is obtained, and then
the left side and right side calculation
results are compared. Next, approximate
value x1 is used as the initial value to
calculate the next approximate value x2.
This procedure is repeated until the
difference between the left side and right
side calculated values is less than some
minute value.

• Solutions obtained using Newton’s method may include errors.

• To check results, plug them into the original expression and perform the
calculation.

108
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Solve Calculations 7-4
• Solve uses Newton’s method to calculate approximations. The following can
sometimes occur when this method is used.
—Solutions may be impossible to obtain for certain initial estimated values.
Should this happen, try inputting another value that you assume to be in
the vicinity of the solution and perform the calculation again.
—The calculator may be unable to obtain a solution, even though a solution
exists.
• Due to certain characteristics of Newton’s method, solutions for the following
types of functions tend to be difficult to calculate.
—Periodic functions (i.e. y = sinx – a)
—Functions whose graph produce sharp slopes (i.e. y = ex, y = 1/ x)
—Inverse proportion expressions and other discontinuous functions.

109
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7-5 What to Do When an Error Occurs
uError during coefficient value input
Press the A key to clear the error and return to the value that was registered for
the coefficient before you input the value that generated the error. Try inputting a
new value again.

uError during calculation

Press the A key to clear the error and display coefficient a. Try inputting values
for the coefficients again.

110
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Graphing
A collection of versatile graphing tools plus a large 127 × 63-dot
display makes it easy to draw a variety of function graphs quickly
and easily. This calculator is capable of drawing the following
types of graphs.

8
• Rectangular coordinate (Y =) graphs
• Polar coordinate (r =) graphs
• Parametric graphs
• X = constant graphs
• Inequality graphs
• Integration graphs (in the RUN mode only)
A selection of graph commands also makes it possible to incor-
porate graphing into programs.

8-1 Before Trying to Draw a Graph

8-2 View Window (V-Window) Settings
8-3 Graph Function Operations
8-4 Graph Memory
8-5 Drawing Graphs Manually
8-6 Other Graphing Functions
8-7 Picture Memory
8-8 Graph Background

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8-1 Before Trying to Draw a Graph
k Entering the Graph Mode
On the Main Menu, select the GRAPH icon and enter the GRAPH Mode. When
you do, the Graph Function menu appears on the display. You can use this menu
to store, edit, and recall functions and to draw their graphs.

Memory area
Use f and c to change selection.

• {SEL} ... {draw/non-draw status}

• {DEL} ... {function delete}
• {TYPE} ... {graph type menu}
• {COLR} ... {graph color}
CFX
• {GMEM} ... {graph memory save/recall}
• {DRAW} ... {graph draw}

112
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-2 View Window (V-Window) Settings
Use the View Window to specify the range of the x-and y-axes, and to set the
spacing between the increments on each axis. You should always set the View
Window parameters you want to use before drawing a graph.

1. Press !3(V·Window) to display

the View Window.

X min ............ Minimum x-axis value

X max ........... Maximum x-axis value
X scale ......... Spacing of x-axis increments
Y min ............ Minimum y-axis value
Y max ........... Maximum y-axis value
Y scale .......... Spacing of y-axis increments

P.115 • {INIT}/{TRIG}/{STD} ... View Window {initial settings}/{initial settings using

specified angle unit}/{standardized settings}
P.116 • {STO}/{RCL} ... View Window setting {store}/{recall}

The nearby illustration shows the meaning

Y max
of each of these parameters. X min
X scale (x, y)

Y scale
Y min X max

2. Input a value for a parameter and press w. The calculator automatically

selects the next parameter for input.
• You can also select a parameter using the c and f keys.
• There are actually nine View Window parameters. The remaining three
parameters appear on the display when you move the highlighting down past
the Y scale parameter by inputting values and pressing c.

T, θ min .......... T, θ minimum values

T, θ max ......... T, θ maximum values
T, θ pitch ........ T, θ pitch

113
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-2 View Window (V-Window) Settings

The nearby illustration shows the meaning min

of each of these parameters. pitch (r, θ) or
(X, Y )

max

3. To exit the View Window, press J or ! Q.

• Pressing w without inputting any value also exits the View Window.

• The following is the input range for View Window parameters.

–9.9999E+97 to 9.99999E+97
• You can input parameter values up to 14 digits long. Values greater than 107
or less than 10-2, are automatically converted to a 7-digit mantissa (including
negative sign) plus a 2-digit exponent.
• The only keys that enabled while the View Window is on the display are: a
to j, ., E, -, f, c, d, e, +, -, *, /, (, ), ! 7,
J, ! Q. You can use - or - to input negative values.
• The existing value remains unchanged if you input a value outside the
allowable range or in the case of illegal input (negative sign only without a
value).
• Inputting a View Window range so the min value is greater than the max
value, causes the axis to be inverted.
• You can input expressions (such as 2π) as View Window parameters.
• When the View Window setting does not allow display of the axes, the scale
for the y-axis is indicated on either the left or right edge of the display, while
that for the x-axis is indicated on either the top or bottom edge.
• When View Window values are changed, the graph display is cleared and the
newly set axes only are displayed.
• View Window settings may cause irregular scale spacing.
• Setting maximum and minimum values that create too wide of a View
Window range can result in a graph made up of disconnected lines (because
portions of the graph run off the screen), or in graphs that are inaccurate.
• The point of deflection sometimes exceeds the capabilities of the display with
graphs that change drastically as they approach the point of deflection.
• Setting maximum and minimum values that create to narrow of a View
Window range can result in an error.

114
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 View Window (V-Window) Settings 8-2
k Initializing and Standardizing the View Window

uTo initialize the View Window

You can use either of the following two methods to initialize the View Window.

Normal initialization
Press !3 (V-Window) 1 (INIT) to initialize the View Window to the following
settings.

Xmin = –6.3 Ymin = –3.1

Xmax = 6.3 Ymax = 3.1
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

Trigonometric initialization
Press ! 3 (V-Window) 2 (TRIG) to initialize the View Window to the
following settings.

Deg Mode
Xmin = –540 Ymin = –1.6
Xmax = 540 Ymax = 1.6
Xscale = 90 Yscale = 0.5

Rad Mode
Xmin = –9.4247779
Xmax = 9.42477796
Xscale = 1.57079632

Gra Mode
Xmin = –600
Xmax = 600
Xscale = 100

• The settings for Y min, Y max, Y pitch, T/θ min, T/θ max, and T/θ pitch remain
unchanged when you press 2 (TRIG).

uTo standardize the View Window

Press !3 (V-Window) 3 (STD) to standardize the View Window to the
following settings.

Xmin = –10 Ymin = –10

Xmax = 10 Ymax = 10
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

115
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-2 View Window (V-Window) Settings

k View Window Memory

You can store up to six sets of View Window settings in View Window memory for
recall when you need them.

uTo store View Window settings

Inputting View Window values and then pressing 4 (STO) 1 (V·W1) stores the
View Window contents in View Window memory V·W1.
• There are six View Window memories numbered V·W1 to V·W6.
• Storing View Window settings in a memory area that already contains settings
replaces the existing settings with the new ones.

uTo recall View Window settings

Pressing 5 (RCL) 1 (V·W1) recalls the contents of View Window memory
V·W1.

• Recalling View Window settings causes the settings currently on the display to
be deleted.

• You can change View Window settings in a program using the following
syntax.
View Window [X min value], [X max value], [X scale value],
[Y min value], [Y max value], [Y scale value],
[T, θ min value], [T, θ max value], [T, θ pitch value]

116
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-3 Graph Function Operations
You can store up to 20 functions in memory. Functions in memory can be edited,
recalled, and graphed.

k Specifying the Graph Type

Before you can store a graph function in memory, you must first specify its graph
type.

1. While the Graph Function Menu is on the display, press 3 (TYPE) to display
the graph type menu, which contains the following items.

• {Y=}/{r=}/{Parm}/{X=c} ... {rectangular coordinate}/{polar coordinate}/

{parametric}/{X=constant} graph
• {Y>}/{Y<}/{Yt
t}/{Ys
s} ... {Y>f(x)}/{Y<f(x)}/{Y>f(x)}/{Y<f(x)} inequality graph

2. Press the function key that corresponds to the graph type you want to specify.

k Storing Graph Functions

uTo store a rectangular coordinate function (Y =)

Example To store the following expression in memory area Y1 :

y = 2 x2 – 5

3(TYPE)1(Y =) (Specifies rectangular coordinate expression.)

cvx-f(Inputs expression.)
w (Stores expression.)

• You will not be able to store the expression in an area that already contains a
parametric function. Select another area to store your expression or delete the
existing parametric function first. This also applies when storing r = expres-
sions, X = constant expressions, and ineqalities.

uTo store a polar coordinate function (r =)

Example To store the following expression in memory area r2 :

r = 5 sin 3 θ

3(TYPE)2(r =) (Specifies polar coordinate expression.)

fsdv(Inputs expression.)
w(Stores expression.)

117
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-3 Graph Function Operations

uTo store a parametric function

Example To store the following functions in memory areas Xt3 and Yt3 :
x = 3 sin T
y = 3 cos T

3(TYPE)3(Parm) (Specifies parametric expression.)

dsvw(Inputs and stores x expression.)
dcvw(Inputs and stores y expression.)

• You will not be able to store the expression in an area that already contains a
rectangular coordinate expression, polar coordinate expression, X = constant
expression or inequality. Select another area to store your expression or delete
the existing expression first.

uTo store an X = constant expression

Example To store the following expression in memory area X4 :

X=3

3(TYPE)4(X = c) (Specifies X = constant expression.)

d(Inputs expression.)
w(Stores expression.)

• Inputting X, Y, T, r, or θ for the constant in the above procedures causes an

error.

uTo store an inequality

Example To store the following inequality in memory area Y5 :

y > x2 – 2x – 6

3(TYPE)6(g)1(Y>) (Specifies an inequality.)

vx-cv-g(Inputs expression.)
w(Stores expression.)

118
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Graph Function Operations 8-3
k Editing Functions in Memory
uTo edit a function in memory

Example To change the expression in memory area Y1 from y = 2x2 – 5

to y = 2x2 – 3

e (Displays cursor.)
eeeed(Changes contents.)
w(Stores new graph function.)

uTo delete a function

1. While the Graph Function Menu is on the display, press f or c to display
the cursor and move the highlighting to the area that contains the function you
want to delete.

2. Press 2 (DEL).

3. Press 1 (YES) to delete the function or 6 (NO) to abort the procedure

without deleting anything.

Parametric functions come in pairs (Xt and Yt).

When editing a parametric function, clear the graph functions and re-input from
the beginning.

k Drawing a Graph
uTo specify the graph color
CFX
The default color for graph drawing is blue, but you can change the color to
orange or green if you want.

1. While the Graph Function Menu is on the display, press f or c to display

the cursor and move the highlighting to the area that contains the function
whose graph color you want to change.

2. Press 4 (COLR) to display a color menu, which contains the following items.
• {Blue}/{Orng}/{Grn} ... {blue}/{orange}/{green}

3. Press the function key for the color you want to use.

119
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-3 Graph Function Operations

uTo specify the draw/non-draw status of a graph

Example To select the following functions for drawing :

Y1 = 2x2 – 5 r2 = 5 sin3θ
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –5 Ymin = –5
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 5
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

cc
(Select a memory area that contains a
function for which you want to specify
non-draw.)

1(SEL)
(Specify non-draw.)

Unhighlights
cc1(SEL)
c1(SEL)

6(DRAW) or w
(Draws the graphs.)

• Pressing ! 6 (G↔T) or A returns to the Graph Function Menu.

120
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Graph Function Operations 8-3
• You can use the set up screen settings to alter the appearance of the graph
screen as shown below.

• Grid: On (Axes: On Label: Off)

P.6 This setting causes dots to appear at the grid intersects on the display.

• Axes: Off (Label: Off Grid: Off)

This setting clears the axis lines from the display.

• Label: On (Axes: On Grid: Off)

This setting displays labels for the x- and y-axes.

• A polar coordinate (r =) or parametric graph will appear coarse if the settings

you make in the View Window cause the T, θ pitch value to be too large,
relative to the differential between the T, θ min and T, θ max settings. If the
settings you make cause the T, θ pitch value to be too small relative to the
differential between the T, θ min and T, θ max settings, on the other hand, the
graph will take a very long time to draw.
• Attempting to draw a graph for an expression in which X is input for an X =
constant expression results in an error.

121
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Graph Function Operations 8-3

8-4 Graph Memory

Graph memory lets you store up to six sets of graph function data and recall it
later when you need it.
A single save operation saves the following data in graph memory.

• All graph functions in the currently displayed Graph Function Menu (up to 20)
• Graph types
• Graph colors
CFX
• Draw/non-draw status
• View Window settings (1 set)

u To store graph functions in graph memory

Pressing 5(GMEM) 1(STO) 1(GM1) stores the selected graph function into
graph memory GM1.
• There are six graph memories numbered GM1 to GM6.
• Storing a function in a memory area that already contains a function replaces
the existing function with the new one.
• If the data exceeds the calculator’s remaining memory capacity, an error
occurs.

u To recall a graph function

Pressing 5 (GMEM) 2 (RCL) 1 (GM1) recalls the contents of graph memory
GM1.
• Recalling data from graph memory causes any data currently on the Graph
Function Menu to be deleted.

122
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-5 Drawing Graphs Manually
After you select the RUN icon in the Main Menu and enter the RUN Mode, you
can draw graphs manually. First press ! 4 (Sketch) 5 (GRPH) to recall the
Graph Command Menu, and then input the graph function.

• {Y=}/{r=}/{Parm}/{X=c}/{G∫dx} ... {rectangular coordinate}/{polar coordinate}/

{parametric}/{X = constant}/{integration} graph
• {Y>}/{Y<}/{Yt
t}/{Ys
s } ... {Y>f(x)}/{Y<f(x)}/{Y>f(x)}/{Y<f(x)} inequality graph

uTo graph using rectangular coordinates (Y =) [Sketch]-[GRPH]-[Y=]

You can graph functions that can be expressed in the format y = f (x).

Example To graph y = 2x2 + 3x – 4

Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –5 Ymin = –10
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 10
Xscale = 2 Yscale = 5

1. In the set up screen, specify “Y=” for Func Type and then press J.

2. Input the rectangular coordinate (Y =) expression.

!4(Sketch)1(Cls)w
5(GRPH)1(Y =) cvx+dv-e

3. Press w to draw the graph.

• You can draw graphs of the following built-in scientific functions.

• sin x • cos x • tan x • sin–1 x • cos–1 x

• tan–1 x • sinh x • cosh x • tanh x • sinh–1 x
• cosh–1 x • tanh–1 x • • x2 • log x
• lnx • 10 x
•e x
•x –1
•3

View Window settings are made automatically for built-in graphs.

123
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-5 Drawing Graphs Manually

uTo graph using polar coordinates (r =) [Sketch]-[GRPH]-[r=]

You can graph functions that can be expressed in the format r = f (θ).

Example To graph r = 2 sin3θ

Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –3 Ymin = –2 T, θ min = 0
Xmax = 3 Ymax = 2 T, θ max = π
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1 T, θ pitch = π÷36

1. In the set up screen, specify “r =” for Func Type.

2. Specify “Rad” as the angle unit and then press J.

3. Input the polar coordinate expression (r =).

!4(Sketch)1(Cls)w
5(GRPH)2(r =)csdv

4. Press w to draw the graph.

• You can draw graphs of the following built-in scientific functions.

• sin θ • cos θ • tan θ • sin–1 θ • cos–1 θ

• tan–1 θ • sinh θ • cosh θ • tanh θ • sinh–1 θ
• cosh–1 θ • tanh–1 θ • θ • θ2 • log θ
• lnθ • 10 θ
•e θ
•θ –1
•3 θ

View Window settings are made automatically for built-in graphs.

124
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Drawing Graphs Manually 8-5
uTo graph parametric functions [Sketch]-[GRPH]-[Parm]
You can graph parametric functions that can be expressed in the following format.
(X, Y) = ( f (T), g (T))

Example To graph the following parametric functions:

x = 7 cos T – 2 cos 3.5T y = 7 sin T – 2 sin 3.5T
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –20 Ymin = –12 T, θ min = 0
Xmax = 20 Ymax = 12 T, θ max = 4π
Xscale = 5 Yscale = 5 T, θ pitch = π÷36

1. In the set up screen, specify “Parm” for Func Type.

2. Specify “Rad” (radians) as the angle unit and then press J.

3. Input the parametric functions.

!4(Sketch)1(Cls)w
5(GRPH)3(Parm)
hcv-ccd.fv,
hsv-csd.fv)

4. Press w to draw the graph.

uTo graph X = constant [Sketch]-[GRPH]-[X=c]

You can graph functions that can be expressed in the format X = constant.

Example To graph X = 3
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –5 Ymin = –5
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 5
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

1. In the set up screen, specify “X=c” for Func Type and then press J.

125
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-5 Drawing Graphs Manually

2. Input the expression.

!4(Sketch)1(Cls)w
5(GRPH)4(X = c)d

3. Press w to draw the graph.

uTo graph inequalities [Sketch]-[GRPH]-[Y>]/[Y<]/[Y≥]/[Y≤]

You can graph inequalities that can be expressed in the following four formats.
• y > f (x) • y < f (x) • y > f (x) • y < f (x)

Example To graph the inequality y > x2 – 2x – 6

Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –6 Ymin = –10
Xmax = 6 Ymax = 10
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 5

1. In the set up screen, specify “Y>” for Func Type and then press J.

2. Input the inequality.

!4(Sketch)1(Cls)w
5(GRPH)6(g) 1(Y>)vx-cv-g

3. Press w to draw the graph.

126
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Drawing Graphs Manually 8-5
uTo draw an integration graph [Sketch]-[GRPH]-[G∫dx]
You can graph an integration calculation performed using the function y = f(x).

Example To graph the following, with a tolerance of “tol” = 1E - 4:

∫
1
(x + 2) (x – 1) (x – 3) dx
–2

Use the following View Window parameters.

Xmin = –4 Ymin = –8
Xmax = 4 Ymax = 12
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 5

1. In the set up screen, specify “Y=” for Func Type and then press J .

2. Input the integration graph expression.

!4(Sketch)1(Cls)w
5(GRPH)5(G∫dx)(v+c)(v-b)
(v-d),-c,b,bE-e

3. Press w to draw the graph.

• Before drawing an integration graph, be sure to always press ! 4 (Sketch)

1 (Cls) to clear the screen.
• You can also incorporate an integration graph command into programs.

127
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-6 Other Graphing Functions
The functions described in this section tell you how to read the x- and y-coordi-
nates at a given point, and how to zoom in and zoom out on a graph.
• These functions can be used with rectangular coordinate, polar coordinate,
parametric, X = constant, and inequality graphs only.

k Connect Type and Plot Type Graphs (Draw Type)

P.5 You can use the Draw Type setting of the set up screen to specify one of two
graph types.
• Connect
Points are plotted and connected by lines to create a curve.
• Plot
Points are plotted without being connected.

k Trace
With trace, you can move a flashing pointer along a graph with the cursor keys
and obtain readouts of coordinates at each point. The following shows the different
types of coordinate readouts produced by trace.

• Rectangular Coordinate Graph • Polar Coordinate Graph

• Parametric Function Graph • X = Constant Graph

• Inequality Graph

uTo use trace to read coordinates

Example To determine the points of intersection for graphs produced by

the following functions:
Y1 = x2 – 3 Y2 = –x + 2

Use the following View Window parameters.

Xmin = –5 Ymin = –10
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 10
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 2

128
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Other Graphing Functions 8-6
1. After drawing the graphs, press 1 (Trace) to display the pointer in the center
of the graph.

• The pointer may not be visible on the graph

when you press 1 (Trace).

2. Use d to move the pointer to the first intersection.

d~d

x / y coordinate values

• Pressing d and e moves the pointer along the graph. Holding down either
key moves the pointer at high speed.

3. Use f and c to move the pointer between the two graphs.

4. Use e to move the pointer to the other intersection.

e~e

• To abort a trace operation, press 1 (Trace).

• Do not press the A key while performing a trace operation.

uTo display the derivative

P.5 If the Derivative item in the set up screen is set to “On”, the derivative appears on
the display along with the coordinate values.

129
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-6 Other Graphing Functions

• The following shows how the display of coordinates and the derivative changes
according to the Graph Type setting.

• Rectangular Coordinate Graph • Polar Coordinate Graph

• Parametric Function Graph • X = Constant Graph

• Inequality Graph

• The derivative is not displayed when you use trace with a built-in scientific
function.

• Setting the Coord item in the set up screen to “Off” turns display of the
coordinates for the current pointer location off.
P.6

uScrolling
When the graph you are tracing runs off the display along either the x- or y-axis,
pressing the e or d cursor key causes the screen to scroll in the correspond-
ing direction eight dots.

• You can scroll only rectangular coordinate and inequality graphs while tracing.
You cannot scroll polar coordinate graphs, parametric function graphs, or X =
constant graphs.
P.7 • The graph on the screen does not scroll when you are tracing while the Dual
Screen Mode is set to “Graph” or “G to T”.

• Trace can be used only immediately after a graph is drawn. It cannot be used
after changing the settings of a graph.
• The x- and y-coordinate values at the bottom of the screen are displayed
using a 12-digit mantissa or a 7-digit mantissa with a 2-digit exponent. The
derivative is displayed using a 6-digit mantissa.
• You cannot incorporate trace into a program.
• You can use trace on a graph that was drawn as the result of an output
command (^), which is indicated by the “-Disp-” indicator on the screen.

k Scroll
You can scroll a graph along its x- or y-axis. Each time you press f, c, d, or
e, the graph scrolls 12 dots in the corresponding direction.

130
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Other Graphing Functions 8-6
k Graphing in a Specific Range
You can use the following syntax when inputting a graph to specify a start point
and end point.

<function> , ! [ <start point> , <end point> ! ] w

Example To graph y = x2 + 3x – 5 within the range of –2 < x < 4

Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –3 Ymin = –10
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 30
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 5

3(TYPE)1(Y =)
(Specifies graph type.)
vx+dv-f,
![-c,e!]w
(Stores expression.)
6(DRAW) or w(Draws graph.)

• You can specify a range for rectangular coordinate, polar coordinate, paramet-
ric, and inequality graphs.

k Overwrite
Using the following syntax to input a graph causes multiple versions of the graph
to be drawn using the specified values. All versions of the graph appear on the
display at the same time.

<function with one variable> , ! [ <variable name> ! =

<value> , <value> , .... <value> ! ] w

Example To graph y = A x2 – 3, substituting 3, 1, and –1 for the value of A

Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –5 Ymin = –10
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 10
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 2

3(TYPE)1(Y =) (Specifies graph type.)

aAvx-d,![aA!=
d,b,-b!]w(Stores expression.)

131
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-6 Other Graphing Functions

6(DRAW) (Draws graph.)

• The function that is input using the above syntax can have only one variable.
• You cannot use X, Y, r, θ, or T as the variable name.
• You cannot assign a variable to the variable in the function.
P.7 • When the set up screen’s Simul Graph item is set to “On”, the graphs for all the
variables are drawn simultaneously.
• You can use overwrite with rectangular coordinate, polar coordinate, paramet-
ric, and inequality graphs.

k Zoom
The zoom feature lets you enlarge and reduce a graph on the display.

uBefore using zoom

Immediately after drawing a graph, press 2 (Zoom) to display the Zoom Menu.

• {BOX} ... {graph enlargement using box zoom}

• {FACT} ... {displays screen for specification of zoom factors}
• {IN}/{OUT} ... {enlarges}/{reduces} graph using zoom factors
P.135 • {AUTO} ... {automatically sizes the graph so it fills the screen along the y-axis}
• {ORIG} ... {original size}
P.136 • {SQR} ... {adjusts ranges so x-range equals y-range}
P.136 • {RND} ... {rounds coordinates at current pointer location}
P.137 • {INTG} ... {converts View Window x-axis and y-axis values to integers}
P.138 • {PRE} ... {after a zoom operation, returns View Window parameters to previous
settings}

132
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Other Graphing Functions 8-6
uTo use box zoom [Zoom]-[BOX]
With box zoom, you draw a box on the display to specify a portion of the graph,
and then enlarge the contents of the box.

Example To use box zoom to enlarge a portion of the graph y = (x + 5)

(x + 4) (x + 3)
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –8 Ymin = –4
Xmax = 8 Ymax = 2
Xscale = 2 Yscale = 1

1. After graphing the function, press 2 (Zoom).

1 2 3 4 5 6

2. Press 1 (BOX), and then use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the
location of one of the corners of the box you want to draw on the screen. Press
w to specify the location of the corner.

3. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the location of the corner that is
diagonally across from the first corner.

4. Press w to specify the location of the second corner. When you do, the part
of the graph inside the box is immediately enlarged so it fills the entire screen.

133
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-6 Other Graphing Functions

• To return to the original graph, press 2 (Zoom) 6 (g) 1 (ORIG).

• Nothing happens if you try to locate the second corner at the same location
or directly above the first corner.
• You can use box zoom for any type of graph.

uTo use factor zoom [Zoom]-[FACT]-[IN]/[OUT]

With factor zoom, you can zoom in or zoom out on the display, with the current
pointer location being at the center of the new display.

• Use the cursor keys to move the pointer around the display.

Example Graph the two functions below, and enlarge them five times in
order to determine whether or not they are tangential.
Y1 = (x + 4) (x + 1) (x – 3) Y2 = 3x + 22

Use the following View Window parameters.

Xmin = –8 Ymin = –30
Xmax = 8 Ymax = 30
Xscale = 5 Yscale = 10

1. After graphing the functions, press 2 (Zoom), and the pointer appears on the
screen.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the location that you want to be the
center of the new display.

1 2 3 4 5 6

3. Press 2 (FACT) to display the factor specification screen, and input the factor
for the x- and y-axes.
2(FACT)
fwfw

134
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Other Graphing Functions 8-6
4. Press J to return to the graphs, and then press 3 (IN) to enlarge them.

This enlarged screen makes it clear that the graphs of the two expressions are not
tangential.
Note that the above procedure can also be used to reduce the size of a graph
(zoom out). In step 4, press 4 (OUT).

• The above procedure automatically converts the x-range and y-range View
Window values to 1/5 of their original settings. Pressing 6 (g) 5 (PRE)
changes the values back to their original settings.
• You can repeat the factor zoom procedure more than once to further enlarge or
reduce the graph.

uTo initialize the zoom factor

Press 2 (Zoom) 2 (FACT) 1 (INIT) to initialize the zoom factor to the
following settings.
Xfact = 2 Yfact = 2

• You can use the following syntax to incorporate a factor zoom operation into
a program.
Factor <X factor>, <Y factor>
• You can specify only positive value up to 14 digits long for the zoom factors.
• You can use factor zoom for any type of graph.

k Auto View Window Function [Zoom]-[AUTO]

The auto View Window feature automatically adjusts y-range View Window values
so that the graph fills the screen along the y-axis.

Example To graph y = x2 – 5 with Xmin = –3 and Xmax = 5, and then use

auto View Window to adjust the y-range values

1. After graphing the function, press 2 (Zoom).

2. Press 5 (AUTO).

135
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-6 Other Graphing Functions

k Graph Range Adjustment Function [Zoom]-[SQR]

This function makes the View Window x-range value the same as the y-range
value. It is helpful when drawing circular graphs.

Example To graph r = 5sin θ and then adjust the graph.

Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –8 Ymin = –1
Xmax = 8 Ymax = 5
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

1. After drawing the graph, press 2 (Zoom) 6 (g).

1 2 3 4 5 6

2. Press 2 (SQR) to make the graph a circle.

k Coordinate Rounding Function [Zoom]-[RND]

This feature rounds the coordinate values at the pointer location to the optimum
number of significant digits. Rounding coordinates is useful when using trace and
plot.

Example To round the coordinates at the points of intersection of the

two graphs drawn on page 128
Use the same View Window parameters as in the example on page
128.

1. After graphing the functions, press 1 (Trace) and move the pointer to the first
intersection.

136
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Other Graphing Functions 8-6
2. Press 2 (Zoom) 6 (g).

3. Press 3 (RND) and then 1 (Trace). Use d to move the pointer to the
other intersection. The rounded coordinate values for the pointer position
appear on the screen.

k Integer Function [Zoom]-[INTG]

This function makes the dot width equal 1, converts axis values to integers, and
redraws the graph.
If one x-axis dot is Ax and one y-axis dot is Ay:

Xmax – Xmin Ymax – Ymin

Ax = Ay =
126 62

137
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-6 Other Graphing Functions

k Notes on the Auto View Window, Graph Range Adjustment,

Coordinate Rounding, Integer, and Zoom Functions

• These functions can be used with all graphs.

• These functions cannot be incorporated into programs.
• These functions can be used with a graph produced by a multi-statement
connected by “ : ”, even if the multi-statement includes non-graph operations.
• When any of these functions is used in a statement that ends with a display
result command {^} to draw a graph, these functions affect the graph up to
the display result command {^} only. Any graphs drawn after the display
result command {^} are drawn according to normal graph overwrite rules.

k Returning the View Window to Its Previous Settings

[Zoom]-[PRE]
The following operation returns View Window parameters to their original settings
following a zoom operation.
6 (g) 5 (PRE)

• You can use PRE with a graph altered by any type of zoom operation.

138
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-7 Picture Memory
You can save up to six graphic image in picture memory for later recall. You can
overdraw the graph on the screen with another graph stored in picture memory.

uTo store a graph in picture memory

Pressing K1(PICT)1(STO)1(Pic1) stores the graph drawn on the display
in picture memory Pic1.
• There are six picture memories numbered Pic1 to Pic6.
• Storing a graph in a memory area that already contains data replaces the
existing data with the new data.

uTo recall a stored graph

In the GRAPH Mode, pressing K1(PICT)2(RCL)1(Pic1) recalls the
contents of picture memory Pic1.

• Dual Graph screens or any other type of graph that uses a split screen cannot
be saved in picture memory.

139
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8-8 Graph Background
You can use the set up screen to specify the memory contents of any picture
memory area (Pict 1 through Pict 6) as the Background item. When you do, the
P.6 contents of the corresponding memory area is used as the background of the
graph screen.
• You can use a background in the RUN, STAT, GRAPH, DYNA, TABLE,
RECUR, CONICS Modes.

Example 1 With the circle graph X2 + Y2 = 1 as the background, use

Dynamic Graph to graph Y = X2 + A as variable A changes value
from –1 to 1 in increments of 1.

Recall the background graph.

(X2 + Y2 = 1)

Draw the dynamic graph.

(Y = X2 – 1)

↓↑
(Y = X )
2

↓↑
(Y = X + 1)
2

P.193 • See “14. Conic Section Graphs” for details on drawing a circle graph, and
P.181 “13. Dynamic Graph” for details on using the Dynamic Graph feature.

140
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Graph Background 8-8

Example 2 With a statistical histogram as the background, graph a normal

distribution

Recall the backgound graph.

(Histogram)

Graph the normal distribution.

P.249 • See “18. Statistical Graphs and Calculations” for details on drawing a statistical
graphs.

141
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 142
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Graph Solve
You can use any of the following methods to analyze function
graphs and approximate results.
• Calculating the root
• Determination of the local maximum value and local minimum
value
• Determination of the y-intercept
• Determination of the intersection of two graphs

9
• Determination of the coordinates at any point (y for a given x/
x for a given y)
• Determination of the integral for any range

9-1 Before Using Graph Solve

9-2 Analyzing a Function Graph

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 9-1 Before Using Graph Solve
After using the GRAPH Mode to draw the graph, press ! 5 (G-Solv) to
display a function menu that contains the following items.

• {ROOT}/{MAX}/{MIN}/{Y-ICPT}/{ISCT} ... {root}/{local maximum value}/{local

minimum value}/{y-intercept}/{intersections of two graphs}
• {Y-CAL}/{X-CAL}/{∫dx} ... {y-coordinate for a given x-coordinate}/{x-coordinate
for a given y-coordinate}/{integral for a given range}

144
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 9-2 Analyzing a Function Graph
The following two graphs are used for all of the examples in this section, except
for the example for determining the points of intersection for two graphs.
Memory location Y1 = x + 1 Y2 = x(x + 2)(x – 2)
Use the View Window to specify the following parameters.

(A) (B)
Xmin = –5 Ymin = –5 Xmin = –6.3 Ymin = –3.1
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 5 Xmax = 6.3 Ymax = 3.1
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1 Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

k Determining Roots

Example To determine the roots for y = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

View Window: (B)

!5(G-Solv)
1(ROOT)
(This puts the unit into standby waiting
for selection of a graph.)

• A “ k ” cursor appears on the graph that has the lowest memory area number.

Specify the graph you want to use.

c

• Use f and c to move the cursor to the

graph whose roots you want to find.

Determine the root.

w

• Roots are found starting from the left.

145
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 9-2 Analyzing a Function Graph

Search for the next root to the right.

e

• If there is no root to the right, nothing

happens when you press e.

• You can use d to move back to the left.

• If there is only one graph, pressing 1(ROOT) directly displays the root
(selection of the graph is not required).
• Note that the above operation can be performed on rectangular coordinate
(Y=) and inequality graphs only.

k Determining Local Maximum Values and Local Minimum

Values

Example To determine the local maximum value and local minimum

value for y = x (x + 2) (x – 2)
View Window: (A)

!5(G-Solv)
2(MAX)
(This puts the unit into standby waiting
for selection of a graph.)

Specify the graph and determine the local maximum value.

cw

146
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Analyzing a Function Graph 9-2
Specify the graph and determine the local minimum value.
!5(G-Solv)
3(MIN) cw

• If there is more than one local maximum/minimum value, you can use d and
e to move between them.
• If there is only one graph, pressing 2 (MAX) / 3 (MIN) directly displays the
local maximum/minimum value (selection of the graph is not required).
• Note that the above operation can be performed on rectangular coordinate (Y=)
and inequality graphs only.

k Determining y-intercepts

Example To determine the y-intercept for y = x + 1

View Window: (B)

!5(G-Solv)
4(Y-ICPT)
(This puts the unit into standby waiting
for selection of a graph.)

Determine the y-intercept.

w

• y-intercepts are the points where the graph intersects the y-axis.
• If there is only one graph, pressing 4 (Y-ICPT) directly displays the
y-intercepts (selection of the graph is not required).
• Note that the above operation can be performed on rectangular coordinate
(Y=) and inequality graphs only.

147
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 9-2 Analyzing a Function Graph

k Determining Points of Intersection for Two Graphs

Example To draw the following three graphs and then determine the
points of intersection for the Graph Y1 and Graph Y3.
View Window: (A)
Y1 = x + 1
Y2 = x (x + 2) (x – 2)
Y3 = x2

!5(G-Solv)
5(ISCT)
(This puts the unit into standby waiting
for selection of a graph.)

Specify Graph Y1.

w

• Pressing w changes “ k ” into “ ◆ ” for

specification of the first graph.

Specify the second graph (Graph Y3, here) to determine the points of intersection.
cw

• Use f and c to move “ k ” on the

second graph.
• Intersections are found starting from the left.

• The next intersection to the right is found. If

there is no intersection to the right, nothing
happens when you perform this operation.

• You can use d to move back to the left.

• If there are only two graphs, pressing 5 (ISCT) directly displays the intersec-
tions (selection of the graph is not required).
• Note that the above operation can be performed on rectangular coordinate (Y=)
and inequality graphs only.

148
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Analyzing a Function Graph 9-2
k Determining a Coordinate (x for a given y/y for a given x)

Example To determine the y-coordinate for x = 0.5 and the x-coordinate

for y = 3.2 in the graph y = x (x + 2) (x – 2)
View Window: (B)

!5(G-Solv)6(g)1(Y-CAL)

Specify a graph.
cw

• At this time, the unit waits for input of an

x-coordinate value.

Input the x-coordinate value.

a.f

Determine the corresponding y-coordinate value.

w

Specify a graph.
!5(G-Solv)6(g)
2(X-CAL) cw

• At this time, the unit waits for input of a

y-coordinate value.

Input the y-coordinate value.

d.c

Determine the corresponding x-coordinate value.

w

149
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 9-2 Analyzing a Function Graph

• If there is more than one x-coordinate value for a given y-coordinate value or
more than one y-coordinate value for a given x-coordinate value, use e and
d to move between them.
• The display used for the coordinate values depends on the graph type as
shown below.

• Polar Coordinate Graph

• Parametric Graph

• Inequality Graph

• Note that you can not determine a y-coordinate for a given x-coordinate with a
parametric graph.
• If there is only one graph, pressing 1 (Y-CAL) / 2 (X-CAL) directly displays
the x-coordinate/y-coordinate (selection of the graph is not required).

k Determining the Integral for Any Range

∫
0
Example x (x + 2) (x – 2) dx
–1.5

View Window: (A)

!5(G-Solv)6(g)
3(∫dx)
(Graph selection standby)

Select graph.
cw

• The display is prompting input of the lower limit

of the integration range.

Move the pointer and input the lower limit.

d~dw

150
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Analyzing a Function Graph 9-2
Input the upper limit and determine the integral.
e~e(Upper limit; x = 0)
w

• The lower limit must be less than the upper limit when specifying the integration
range.
• Note that the above operation can be performed on rectangular coordinate (Y=)
graphs only.

k Graph Solve Precautions

• Depending on the View Window parameter settings, there may be some error
in solutions produced by Graph Solve.
• If no solution can be found for any of the above operations, the message “Not
Found” appears on the display.
• The following conditions can interfere with calculation precision and may make
it impossible to obtain a solution.
— When the solution is a point of tangency to the x-axis.
— When the solution is a point of tangency between two graphs.

151
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 152
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Sketch Function
The sketch function lets you draw lines and graphs on an existing
graph.
• Note that Sketch function operation in the STAT, GRAPH,
TABLE, RECUR and CONICS Modes is different from Sketch
function operation in the RUN and PRGM Modes.

10-1 Before Using the Sketch Function

10-2 Graphing with the Sketch Function

10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10-1 Before Using the Sketch Function
Press ! 4 (Sketch) to display the sketch menu.

STAT, GRAPH, TABLE, RECUR, CONICS Mode

P.166 • {Cls} ... {clears drawn line and point}

P.155 • {Tang}/{Norm}/{Inv} ... {tangent}/{line normal to a curve}/{inverse graph}
~ P.157
• {Tang}, {Norm}, and {Inv} menus appear only when you display the sketch
menu while in the GRAPH and TABLE Modes.

P.158 • {PLOT} ... {plot menu}

P.160 • {LINE} ... {line menu}
P.162 • {Crcl}/{Vert}/{Hztl} ... {circle}/{vertical line}/{horizontal line}
P.163 • {PEN} ... {freehand drawing}
P.164 • {Text} ... {comment text}

RUN, PRGM Mode

• {GRPH} ... {graph command menu}

P.165 • {PIXL} ... {pixel menu}
P.166 • {Test} ... {tests pixel on/off status}

• Other menu items are identical to those in the STAT, GRAPH, TABLE, RECUR,
CONICS Mode menu.

154
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 10-2 Graphing with the Sketch Function
The sketch function lets you draw lines and plot points on a graph that is already
on the screen.
All the examples in this section that show operations in the STAT, GRAPH, TABLE,
RECUR, and CONICS Modes are based on the assumption that the following
P.112 function has already been graphed in the GRAPH Mode.

Memory Area Y1 = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

The following are the View Window parameters used when drawing the graph.
Xmin = –5 Ymin = –5
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 5
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

k Tangent [Sketch]-[Tang]
This function lets you draw a line that is tangent to a graph at any point.

uTo draw a tangent in the GRAPH or TABLE Mode

Example To draw a line that is tangent to point (x = 2, y = 0) of y = x(x + 2)

(x – 2)

1. After graphing the function, display the sketch menu and press 2 (Tang).

2. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer the position of the point where you
want to draw the line.

3. Press w to draw the line.

155
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 10 - 2 Graphing with the Sketch Function

uTo draw a tangent in the RUN or PRGM Mode

The following is the command syntax for drawing a tangent in these modes.

Tangent <graph function>, <x-coordinate>

P.30 • Use the variable data (VARS) menu to specify the function to be graphed.

Example To draw a line that is tangent to point (x = 2, y = 0) of y = x(x + 2)

(x – 2)

1. In the RUN Mode, display the sketch menu, press 2 (Tang), and then
perform the following input.
J4(GRPH)1(Y)b,c

2. Press w to draw the tangent line.

k Line Normal to a Curve [Sketch]-[Norm]

With this function you can draw a line that is normal to the curve at a specific
point.

• A line that is normal to the curve at a given point is one that is perpendicular to
the tangent line at that point.

uTo draw a line normal to a curve in the GRAPH or TABLE Mode

Example To draw a line that is normal to the curve at point (x = 2, y = 0) of

y = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

1. After graphing the function, display the sketch menu and press 3 (Norm).

2. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer the position of the point where you
want to draw the line.

156
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Graphing with the Sketch Function 10 - 2
3. Press w to draw the line.

uTo draw a line normal to a curve in the RUN or PRGM Mode

The following is the syntax for drawing a line normal to a curve in these modes.

Normal <graph function>, <x-coordinate>

P.30 • Use the variable data (VARS) menu to specify the function to be graphed.

k Graphing an Inverse Function [Sketch]-[Inv]

This function lets you graph the inverse of the function used to produce your
original graph.

uTo graph an inverse function in the GRAPH or TABLE Mode

Example To graph the inverse of y = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

After graphing the function, display the sketch menu and press 4 (Inv).

• When graphing an inverse function when there is more than one graph function
stored in memory, select one of the functions and then press w.

uTo graph an inverse function in the RUN or PRGM Mode

The following is the syntax for graphing an inverse function in these modes.

Inverse <graph function>

P.30 • Use the variable data (VARS) menu to specify the function to be graphed.

• You can only graph the inverse of functions whose graph type is specified as
rectangular coordinate type.

157
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 10 - 2 Graphing with the Sketch Function

k Plotting Points [Sketch]-[PLOT]

When plotting points on a graph, first display the sketch menu and then press 6
(g) 1 (PLOT) to display the plot menu.

• {Plot} ... {plot a point}

• {Pl·On} ... {plot point at specific coordinates}
• {Pl·Off} ... {delete point at specific coordinates}
• {Pl·Chg} ... {switch status of point at specific coordinates}

uTo plot points in the STAT, GRAPH, TABLE, RECUR and CONICS
Modes [Sketch]-[PLOT]-[Plot]

Example To plot a point on the graph of y = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

1. After drawing the graph, display the sketch menu and press 6 (g) 1 (PLOT)
1 (Plot) to display the pointer in the center of the screen.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer the locations of the points you want to
plot and press w to plot.
• You can plot as many points as you want.

• The current x- and y-coordinate values are assigned respectively to variables

X and Y.

uTo plot points in the RUN or PRGM Mode [Sketch]-[PLOT]-[Plot]

The following is the syntax for plotting points in these modes.

Plot <x-coordinate>, <y-coordinate>

Example To plot a point at (2, 2)

Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –5 Ymin = –10
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 10
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 2

158
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Graphing with the Sketch Function 10 - 2
1. After entering the RUN Mode, display the sketch menu and perform the
following operation.
!4(Sketch)6(g)
1(PLOT)1(Plot)c,c

2. Press w and the pointer appears on the display. Press w again to plot a
point.

• You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer around the screen.

• If you do not specify coordinates, the pointer is located in the center of the
graph screen when it appears on the display.
• If the coordinates you specify are outside the range of the View Window
parameters, the pointer will not be on the graph screen when it appears on
the display.
• The current x- and y-coordinate values are assigned respectively to variables
X and Y.

k Turning Plot Points On and Off

[Sketch]-[PLOT]-[Pl·On]/[Pl·Off]/[Pl·Chg]
Use the following procedures to turn specific plot points on and off.

uTo turn plot points on and off in the STAT, GRAPH, TABLE, RECUR
and CONICS Modes

• To turn a plot point on

1. After drawing the graph, display the sketch menu and press 6 (g) 1
(PLOT) 2 (Pl·On) to display the pointer in the center of the screen.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the location where you want to plot
a point and then press w.

• To turn a plot point off

Perform the same procedure as described under “To turn a plot point on” above,
except press 3 (Pl·Off) in place of 2 (Pl·On).

• To change the on/off status of a plot point

Perform the same procedure as described under “To turn a plot point on” above,
except press 4 (Pl·Chg) in place of 2 (Pl·On).

159
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 10 - 2 Graphing with the Sketch Function

uTo turn plot points on and off in the RUN or PRGM Mode
The following are the syntax for turning plot points on and off in these modes.

• To turn a plot point on

PlotOn <x-coordinate>, <y-coordinate>

• To turn a plot point off

PlotOff <x-coordinate>, <y-coordinate>

• To change the on/off status of a plot point

PlotChg <x-coordinate>, <y-coordinate>

k Drawing a Line [Sketch]-[LINE]

To draw a line on a graph, first display the sketch menu and then press 6 (g)
2 (LINE) to display the line menu.

• {Line} ... {Draw a line between two plotted points}

• {F·Line} ... {Draw a line}

uTo connect two plotted points with a line in the STAT, GRAPH,
TABLE, RECUR and CONICS Modes [Sketch]-[LINE]-[Line]

Example To draw a line between the local maximun and local minimum
on the graph of y = x(x + 2)(x – 2)
Use the same View Window parameters as in the example on page
155.

1. After drawing a graph, display the sketch menu and then press 6 (g) 1
(PLOT) 1 (Plot) to display the pointer in the center of the screen.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the local maximum and press w to
plot it.

3. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the local minimum.

160
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Graphing with the Sketch Function 10 - 2
4. Display the sketch menu and then press 6 (g) 2 (LINE) 1 (Line) to draw
a line to the second dot.

uTo draw a line between any two points in the STAT, GRAPH,
TABLE, RECUR and CONICS Modes [Sketch]-[LINE]-[F·Line]

Example To draw a line between the local maximun and local minimum
on the graph of y = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

1. After drawing a graph, display the sketch menu and then press 6 (g) 2
(LINE) 2 (F·Line) to display the pointer in the center of the screen.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the local maximum and press w.

3. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the local minimum and press w to
draw the line.

uTo draw a line in the RUN or PRGM Mode

The following is the syntax for drawing lines in these modes.
F-Line <x-coordinate 1>, <y-coordinate 1>, <x-coordinate 2>, <y-coordinate 2>

161
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 10 - 2 Graphing with the Sketch Function

k Drawing a Circle [Sketch]-[Crcl]

You can use the following procedures to draw a circle on a graph.

uTo draw a circle in the STAT, GRAPH, TABLE, RECUR and CONICS
Modes

Example To draw a circle with a radius of R = 1 centered at point (1, 0)

on the graph of y = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

1. After drawing a graph, display the sketch menu and then press 6 (g) 3
(Crcl) to display the pointer in the center of the screen.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the location where you want the
center point of the circle to be and press w to plot it.

3. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to a point on the circumference of the
circle (here to point x = 0) and then press w to draw the circle.

uTo draw a circle in the RUN or PRGM Mode

The following is the syntax for drawing circles in these modes.
Circle <center point x-coordinate>, <center point y-coordinate>, <radius R
value>

• Certain View Window parameters can make a circle appear as an ellipse.

162
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Graphing with the Sketch Function 10 - 2
k Drawing Vertical and Horizontal Lines [Sketch]-[Vert]/[Hztl]
The procedures presented here draw vertical and horizontal lines that pass
through a specific coordinate.

uTo draw vertical and horizontal lines in the STAT, GRAPH, TABLE,
RECUR and CONICS Modes

Example To draw a vertical line on the graph of y = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

1. After drawing a graph, display the sketch menu and then press 6 (g) 4
(Vert) to display the pointer along with a vertical line in the center of the screen.

2. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the line left and right, and press w
to draw the line at the current location.

To draw a horizontal line, simply press 5 (Hztl) in place of 4 (Vert), and use the
f and c cursor keys to move the horizontal line on the display.

uTo draw vertical and horizontal lines in the RUN or PRGM Mode
The following is the syntax for drawing vertical and horizontal lines in these
modes.

• To draw a vertical line

Vertical <x-coordinate>

• To draw a horizontal line

Horizontal <y-coordinate>

k Freehand Drawing [Sketch]-[PEN]

This function lets you make freehand drawings on a graph, just as if you were
using a pen.

• Freehand drawing is available only in the STAT, GRAPH, TABLE, RECUR and
CONICS Modes.

163
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 10 - 2 Graphing with the Sketch Function

Example To draw on the graph of y = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

1. After drawing a graph, display the sketch menu and then press 6 (g) 6 (g)
1 (PEN) to display the pointer in the center of the screen.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the location where you want to start
drawing and press w to plot it.

3. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer, drawing a line as it moves. Press w to
stop the draw operation of the pointer.

• Press A to quit the freehand draw operation.

k Comment Text [Sketch]-[Text]

Use the following procedure to insert text for comments and labels into a graph.

uTo insert text in the STAT, GRAPH, TABLE, RECUR and CONICS
Modes

Example To insert the graph function as comment text into the graph of
y = x(x + 2)(x – 2)

1. After drawing a graph, display the sketch menu and then press 6 (g) 6 (g)
2 (Text) to display the pointer in the center of the screen.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the location where you want to insert
the comment text, and then input the text.
e ~ ef ~ f
aY!=v
(v+c)(v-c)

164
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Graphing with the Sketch Function 10 - 2
uTo insert text in the RUN or PRGM Mode
The following is the syntax for inserting text in these modes.

Text <line number>, <column number>, “<text>”

• The line number can be specified within the range of 1 to 63, while the column
number can be specified in the range of 1 to 127.

• The following are the characters that can be used inside of comment text in
the STAT, GRAPH, TABLE, RECUR, or CONICS Mode.
A~Z, r, θ, space, 0~9, ., +, –, ×, ÷, (–), EXP, π, Ans, {, (, ), [, ], {, }, comma, →,
x2, ^, log, In, , x , 10x, ex, 3 , x–1, sin, cos, tan, sin–1, cos–1, tan–1
• A newline operation cannot be performed when inserting comment text. To
input multiple lines, you have to perform the above comment text insert
operation more than once.

k Turning Pixels On and Off [Sketch]-[PIXL]

The following procedure lets you turn each individual screen pixel on and off. You
can specify any pixel from the upper left-hand corner (1, 1) to the lower right-hand
corner (63, 127) of the screen.

Line range: 1 to 63
Column range: 1 to 127

• Note that you can turn pixels on and off only in the RUN and PRGM Modes.
When turning pixels on and off, first display the sketch menu and then press 6
(g) 6 (g) 3 (PIXL) to display the pixel menu.
• {On} ... {turns specified pixel on}
• {Off} ... {turns specified pixel off}
• {Chg} ... {switches status of specified pixel}

uTo turn pixels on and off [Sketch]-[PIXL]-[On]/[Off]/[Chg]

• To turn a pixel on
PxlOn <line number>, <column number>

• To turn a pixel off

PxlOff <line number>, <column number>

• To change the on/off status of a pixel

PxlChg <line number>, <column number>

165
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 10 - 2 Graphing with the Sketch Function

uTo check the on/off status of a pixel [Sketch]-[Test]

While the sketch menu is on the screen, press 6 (g) 6 (g) 4 (Test) and then
input the command shown below to check the status of the specified pixel. 1 is
returned when the pixel is on, and 0 is returned when the pixel is off.
PxlTest <line number>, <column number>

• Specify a line in the range of 1 to 63 and a column in the range of 1 to 127.

• Trying to perform one of the above operations without specifying a line and
column number results in an error.
• Pixel operations are valid only within the allowable line and column ranges.

k Clearing Drawn Lines and Points [Sketch]-[Cls]

The following operation clears all drawn lines and points from the screen.

uTo clear lines and points in the STAT, GRAPH, TABLE, RECUR and
CONICS Modes
Lines and points drawn using sketch menu functions are temporary. Display the
sketch menu and press 1 (Cls) to clear drawn lines and points, leaving only the
original graph.

uTo clear drawn lines and points in the RUN or PRGM Mode
The following is the syntax for clearing drawn lines and points, as well as the
graph itself.
Cls

166
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Dual Graph
Dual Graph lets you split the display between two different
screens, which you can then use to draw different graphs at the
same time. Dual Graph gives you valuable graph analysis
capabilities.
• You should be familiar with the contents of “8-3 Graph Function
Operations” before reading this chapter.

11-1 Before Using Dual Graph

11-2 Specifying the Left and Right View Window
Parameters
11-3 Drawing a Graph in the Active Screen
11-4 Displaying a Graph in the Inactive Screen

11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 11-1 Before Using Dual Graph
1. From the Main Menu, enter the GRAPH Mode. Next, display the set up screen
and specify “Graph” for Dual Screen.
P.7
2. Press J.

• For further details about the function key menu at the bottom of the display, see
P.112 “8-1 Before Trying to Draw a Graph”.
• 8,192 bytes of memory are used whenever you set the Dual Screen setting to
“Graph”.

k About Dual Graph Screen Types

The screen on the left side of the display is called the active screen, and the graph
on the left side of the display is called the active graph. Conversely, the right side
is the inactive screen, which contains the inactive graph. Any function that you
execute while using Dual Graph is always applied to the active graph. To execute
a function on the right-side inactive graph, you must first make it active by moving
it into the active screen.

Active Screen
Actual graph drawing is done here.

Inactive Screen
Use the inactive screen to make copies of active screen graphs, and for the result of
Zoom operations.

• Indicators appear to the right of the formulas in the function memory list to tell
where graphs are drawn with Dual Graph.

Indicates inactive graph (on right side of

display)
Indicates graph drawn on both sides of display

Performing a draw operation with the function marked “ R ” in the above example
screen causes the graph to be drawn on the right (inactive) side on the display.
The function marked “ B ” is drawn on both sides of the graph.
Pressing 1 (SEL) while one of the function’s is highlighted would causes its
“ R ” or “ B ” indicator to be cleared. A function without an indicator is drawn as
the active graph (on the left side of the display).

168
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Before Using Dual Graph 11 - 1

11-2 Specifying the Left and Right View Window

Parameters
You can specify different View Window parameter for the left and right sides of the
graph display.

uTo specify View Window parameters

Press !3 (V-Window) to display the View Window parameter setting screen
for the active (left side) graph.

P.115 • {INIT}/{TRIG}/{STD} ... View Window {normal initialization}/{trigonometric

initialization}/{standardization}
P.116 • {STO}/{RCL} ... View Window setting {store}/{recall}
• {RIGHT}/{LEFT} ... {active (left)}/{inactive (right)} screen View Window setting
swap

P.113 • Use the procedures described under “View Window (V-Window) Settings” to
input parameter values.

• Use the following key operations to change to different screens while inputting
View Window parameters for the left and right side screens.

While the View Window parameter setting screen for the active graph is shown:

• 6 (RIGHT) .... displays the inactive graph View Window parameter setting
screen

While the View Window parameter setting screen for the inactive graph is
shown:

• 6 (LEFT) ...... displays the active graph View Window parameter setting
screen

169
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 11-3 Drawing a Graph in the Active Screen
You can draw graphs in the active screen. You can then copy or move the graph to
the inactive screen.

uDrawing a graph in the active screen

Example To draw the graph of y = x (x + 1) (x – 1) in the active screen

Use the following View Window parameters:
Xmin = –2 Ymin = –2
Xmax = 2 Ymax = 2
Xscale = 0.5 Yscale = 1

Input the function.

v(v+b)(v-b)

Store the function.

w

Draw the graph.

6 (DRAW) or w

170
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 11-4 Displaying a Graph in the Inactive Screen
There are two methods you can use to display a graph in the inactive screen. You
can copy a graph from the active screen to the inactive screen, or you can move
the graph from the active screen to the inactive screen. In both cases, you must
first draw the graph in the left-side active screen.

k Before Displaying a Graph in the Inactive Screen

After drawing a graph in the active screen, press K, and the Dual Graph
function menu appears at the bottom of the display.

• {COPY} ... {copies active graph to inactive screen}

• {SWAP} ... {switches active screen and inactive screen}
P.139 • {PICT} ... {picture function}

k Copying the Active Graph to the Inactive Screen

Example To draw the graph for y = x (x + 1) (x – 1) on the active screen

and the inactive screen

Use the following View Window parameters:

Active (Left) Screen Inactive (Right) Screen
View Window parameters View Window parameters
Xmin = –2 Ymin = –2 Xmin = –4 Ymin = –3
Xmax = 2 Ymax = 2 Xmax = 4 Ymax = 3
Xscale = 0.5 Yscale = 1 Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

Assume that the function being graphed is stored in memory area Y1.

Draw the graph in the active screen. Copy the graph to the inactive
6(DRAW) (right) screen.
K1(COPY)

• The graph is reproduced using the inactive screen View Window parameters.

171
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 11 - 4 Displaying a Graph in the Inactive Screen

k Switching the Contents of the Active and Inactive Screens

Switch the screens.
K2(SWAP)

• Note that using 2 (SWAP) to switch the screens also switches their View
Window parameters.

k Drawing Different Graphs on the Active Screen and

Inactive Screen

Example To draw the graphs of the following functions on the screens

noted:
Active Screen: y = x (x + 1) (x – 1)
Inactive Screen: y = 2x2 – 3

Use the View Window parameters shown below.

Active (Left) Screen Inactive (Right) Screen
View Window parameters View Window parameters
Xmin = –4 Ymin = –5 Xmin = –2 Ymin = –2
Xmax = 4 Ymax = 5 Xmax = 2 Ymax = 2
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1 Xscale = 0.5 Yscale = 1

Assume that the functions being graphed are stored in memory areas Y1 and Y2.

Select the function for the graph that you want to end up in the inactive (right)
screen.
1(SEL)

Draw the graph in the active screen.

6(DRAW)

172
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying a Graph in the Inactive Screen 11 - 4
Swap the screens so the graph is on the inactive (right) screen.
K2(SWAP)

Select the function for the graph that you want in the now-empty active (left)
screen.
A1(SEL)

Draw the graph.

6(DRAW)

• At this point, you could perform a copy operation and superimpose the active
graph over the inactive graph.
K1(COPY)

• Pressing !6 (G ↔ T) lets you switch between display of the active and

inactive graphs, using the entire display for each.
!6(G ↔ T)

!6(G ↔ T)

!6(G ↔ T)

173
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 11 - 4 Displaying a Graph in the Inactive Screen

k Other Graph Functions with Dual Graph

After drawing a graph using Dual Graph, you can use the trace, zoom, sketch and
scroll functions. Note, however, that these functions are available only for the
P.128 active (left) graph. For details on using these functions, see “8-6 Other Graphing
Functions”.

• To perform any of the above operations on the inactive graph, first move the
inactive graph to the active screen.
• The graph screen will not scroll while a trace operation is being performed on
the active graph.

The following shows some example operations using the zoom function.

Example 1 To use box zoom to enlarge the graph of y = x (x + 1) (x – 1)

Use the following View Window parameters for the active graph.
Xmin = –2 Ymin = –2
Xmax = 2 Ymax = 2
Xscale = 0.5 Yscale = 1

Assume that the function is already stored in memory area Y1.

Press 6 (DRAW) or w to draw the graph.

!2(Zoom)1(BOX)

• Use the cursor keys to move the pointer to

one of the corners of the box and then press
w.

• Use the cursor keys to move to the opposite corner of the box and then press
w to enlarge the graph.

• The zoom operation changes the View Window parameters of the inactive
screen, so the graph in the inactive screen is cleared.

174
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Graph-to-Table
With this function, the screen shows both a graph and a table.
You can move a pointer around the graph and store its current
coordinates inside the table whenever you want. This function is
very useful for summarizing graph analysis results.
• Be sure to read “Chapter 8 Graphing” and “Chapter 9 Graph
Solve” before trying to perform any of the operations described
in this chapter.

12-1 Before Using Graph-to-Table

12-2 Using Graph-to-Table

12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 12-1 Before Using Graph-to-Table
1. In the Main Menu, select the GRAPH icon and enter the GRAPH Mode. Next,
use the set up screen to set the Dual Screen item to “G to T”.
P.7
2. Press J and the Graph-to-Table menu appears.

• For the meaning of the items in the function menu at the bottom of the screen,
P.112 see “8-1 Before Trying to Draw a Graph”.

• Whenever the set up screen’s Dual Screen item is set to “G to T”, you can
only store rectangular coordinate (Y=), polar coordinate (r=), and parametric
function graphs in memory.
• You cannot use Graph-to-Table to display split graph/table screens using
X=constant or inequality graphs of functions stored in the GRAPH or TABLE
Mode.

176
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 12-2 Using Graph-to-Table
uTo store graph pointer coordinates in a table
P.5 • If the Derivative item in the set up screen is set to “On”, the derivative at the
location of the trace pointer is also stored in the table.

Example To store the points of intersection and the coordinates for the
following graphs where X = 0:
Y1 = x2 – 3 Y2 = –x + 2
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –5 Ymin = –10
Xmax = 5 Ymax = 10
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 2

1. Input the two functions.

2. Press 6 (DRAW) (or w) to draw the

graph in the left half of the screen.

3. Press 1 (Trace) and then use d to move the pointer to the first intersection.

4. Press w to store the coordinates of

the pointer location in the table on the
right side of the screen.

x / y-coordinate value

5. Use e to move the pointer to the point

where X = 0 and then press w.
Next, move the pointer to the next
intersection and press w again.

177
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 12 - 2 Using Graph-to-Table

6. Pressing A causes the highlighting to

appear in the table. You can then use
the cursor keys to move the highlighting
around the table and check its values.
Press A again to return the pointer to
the graph screen.

uTo save numeric table values in a list file

You can save columns of values into list files. Up to six values can be stored in a
list file.
• The highlighting can be located in any row of the column whose data you want
to save in the list.

Example To save the x-coordinate data of the previous example in List 1.

1. Starting from the screen that appears in step 6 of the previous example, press
K. The following function menu appears.
• {CHNG} ... {changes the active screen (between left and right)}
• {LMEM} ... {saves table column to list file}
P.139 • {PICT} ... {saves graph data to graph memory}

2. Press 2 (LMEM).

3. Press 1 (List1) to store the data in the x-coordinate column into List 1.
• Table data uses the same memory as TABLE menu table data.
• Always be sure to store table data into a list.
• Any of the following operations causes table data to be deleted.
— Editing expression data
— Changing set up screen or View Window settings
— Changing to a different mode
• If you save data into a list that already contains data, the previous data is
replaced with the new data.
P.229 • For details on recalling numeric data saved in a list file, see “17. List Function”.

178
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Using Graph-to-Table 12 - 2
k Graph-to-Table Precautions
• The only coordinates that can be saved in the table are those where the
pointer can move to using trace and graph solve.
• The only graph functions that can be used with a graph produced using the
Graph-to-Table are: trace, scroll, zoom, and graph solve (excluding integra-
tion calculations).
• Graph functions cannot be used while the highlighting is blinking in the table.
To clear the highlighting and make the graph side the active screen, press
K 1 (CHNG).
• K key operation is disabled whenever a graph and table are both on the
screen and there is no numeric data in the table, and when the screen is not
split (i.e. when either the graph or table only is on the display).
• An error occurs if a graph for which a range is specified or an overwrite graph
is included among the graph expressions.

179
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 180
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 13
Chapter

Dynamic Graph
The Dynamic Graph Mode of this calculator shows you real-time
representations of changes in a graph as coefficients and terms
are changed. It lets you see what happens to a graph when such
changes are made. For example, you can see the graph change
as illustrated here as the value of coefficient A changes in the
formula y = A x 2.

13-1 Before Using Dynamic Graph

13-2 Storing, Editing, and Selecting Dynamic Graph
Functions
13-3 Drawing a Dynamic Graph
13-4 Using Dynamic Graph Memory
13-5 Dynamic Graph Application Examples

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 13-1 Before Using Dynamic Graph
In the Main Menu, select the DYNA icon and enter the DYNA Mode. When you do
the dynamic function list appears on the screen.

Selected memory area

Press c and f to move.

• {SEL} ... {dynamic Graph draw/non-draw status}

• {DEL} ... {function delete}
• {TYPE} ... {function type specification}
• {VAR} ... {coefficient menu}
P.184 • {B·IN} ... {menu of built-in functions*}
P.190 • {RCL} ... {recall and execution of Dynamic Graph conditions and screen data}

* The built-in function menu contains the following seven functions.

•Y=AX+B
•Y=A(X+B)2+C
•Y=AX2+BX+C
•Y=AX^3+BX2+CX+D
•Y=Asin(BX+C)
•Y=Acos(BX+C)
•Y=Atan(BX+C)

182
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 13-2 Storing, Editing, and Selecting Dynamic
Graph Functions
In addition to the seven built-in functions, you can input 20 of your own Dynamic
Functions. Once a function is stored in memory, it can be edited and selected
when needed for graphing.
All of the procedures you need to use for storing, editing, and selecting Dynamic
Graph functions are identical to those you use in the GRAPH Mode. For details,
P.117 see “8-3 Graph Function Operations”.

• Dynamic Graphs can be one of the following three types only: rectangular
coordinate (Y=), polar coordinate (r=), and parametric.
• You cannot use Dynamic Graph with X=constant or inequality graphs of
functions stored in the GRAPH or TABLE Mode.
• If you try to use Dynamic Graph with a function that does not contain a
variable, a “No Variable” error occurs. If this happens, press A to clear the
error.
• Dynamic Graph always uses blue to draw graphs. This cannot be changed.
CFX

183
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 13-3 Drawing a Dynamic Graph
The following is the general procedure you should use to draw a Dynamic Graph.
1. Select or input a function.

2. Define the dynamic coefficient.

• This is a coefficient whose value changes in order to produce the different
graphs.
• If the dynamic coefficient is already defined from a previous operation, you can
skip this step.

3. Assign values to each of the coefficients of the function.

4. Specify the range of the dynamic coefficient.

• If the range of the dynamic coefficient is already defined from a previous
operation, you can skip this step.

5. Specify the speed of the draw operation.

• If the speed is already defined from a previous operation, you can skip this
step.

6. Draw the Dynamic Graph.

uTo set Dynamic Graph conditions

Example To use Dynamic Graph to graph y = A (x–1)2 –1 as the value of

A changes from 2 to 5 in increments of 1
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = – 6.3 Ymin = – 3.1
Xmax = 6.3 Ymax = 3.1
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

1. Input the function you want to graph. Here we will edit a built-in function to
input our function.
5(B·IN)

1 2 3 4 5 6

c1(SEL)

184
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Drawing a Dynamic Graph 13 - 3
2. Display the coefficient menu.
4(VAR) or w
Function being graphed
Coefficient whose value will change
Coefficients in function

• {SEL} ... {selects dynamic coefficient}

• {RANG} ... {dynamic coefficient range settings}
• {SPEED} ... {dynamic Graph drawing speed}
• {AUTO} ... {automatic setting of end and pitch values to match coefficient
values}
• {DYNA} ... {dynamic Graph draw operation}

• The calculator automatically makes the first variable it finds the dynamic
coefficient. To select a different coefficient, use c and f to move the
highlighting to the coefficient you want to use, and the press 1 (SEL).
• The letters representing each coefficient are variables, and so the values that
appears on the screen are those currently assigned to each variable. If a
complex number is assigned to a variable, only the integer part appears.
• All variables contained in the currently selected function appear on the display
in alphabetical order.
• If there is more than one function that can be drawn using Dynamic Graph, the
message “Too Many Functions” appears on the display.
• If the value of the dynamic variable is zero and you press 5 (AUTO), the
dynamic variable automatically changes to 1 and Dynamic Graphing is
performed.

3. Specify the value of each coefficient.

cw-bw-bw

• If there is more than one coefficient, use f and c to move the highlighting
to each coefficient and input its value.
• Values you input for coefficients are also assigned to the corresponding
variable.

4. Recall the coefficient range menu.

2(RANG)
Dynamic coefficient
Start value
End value
Increment

• The range you set remains in effect until you change it.

185
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 13 - 3 Drawing a Dynamic Graph

5. Change the range settings.

cw J

• If you want to change the Dynamic Graph

speed, press 3 (SPEED).

1 2 3 4 5 6
You can set the Dynamic Graph speed to any one of the following settings.
P.188 Stop & Go: Each step of the Dynamic Graph draw operation is performed
each time you press w.
Slow: 1/2 Normal
Normal: Default speed
Fast: Double Normal

1. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the speed you want to use.

2. Press 1 (SEL) to set the highlighted speed.

uTo start the Dynamic Graph draw operation

There are four different variations for Dynamic Graphing.

k 10-time Continuous Drawing

Select “Stop” as the draw type (Dynamic Type) to perform 10-time continuous
drawing. With this drawing style, 10 versions of the graph are drawn and then the
draw operation stops automatically.

Example To use 10-time continuous drawing to draw the same graph

that you drew in the previous example (page 184)
1. Display the coefficient menu. Next, display the set up screen and specify
P.7 “Stop” for Dynamic Type and then press J.

2. Start drawing of the Dynamic Graph.

6(DYNA)

186
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Drawing a Dynamic Graph 13 - 3

1 2

→
←

↓↑
4 3

→
←

The above sequence continues to repeat from 1 through 4.

Graph is drawn 10 times.

• While the message “One Moment Please!” is shown on the display, you can
press A to interrupt drawing of the graph and return to the coefficient range
setting display.
• Pressing A while the Dynamic Graph is being drawn changes to the drawing
speed setting display. The draw operation is suspended at this time, and you
can view the graph by pressing !6 (G ↔ T).
• If you do not want the function and coefficient values shown on the display with
P.6 the graph, use the graph function set up display to switch Graph Func “Off”.
• Pressing 5 (AUTO) draws up to 11 versions of the Dynamic Graph, starting
from the start (Start) value of the dynamic coefficient.

k Continuous Drawing
When the Dynamic Graph draw type (Dynamic Type) is set to “Cont” (continuous),
drawing of the Dynamic Graph continues until you press A.

Example To continuously draw the same graph that you input in the
previous example (page 184)

1. Display the coefficient menu. Next, display the set up screen and specify
P.7 “Cont” for Dynamic Type and then press J.

2. Start drawing of the Dynamic Graph.

6(DYNA)

···→
←···

187
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 13 - 3 Drawing a Dynamic Graph

• Pressing A while the Dynamic Graph is being drawn changes to the drawing
speed setting display. The draw operation is suspended at this time, and you
can view the graph by pressing !6 (G ↔ T).
• Selecting “Cont” and then executing a Dynamic Graph operation causes the
graphing operation to repeat until you press A. Be sure that you do not forget
to stop the Dynamic Graph operation after you are finished. Allowing it to
continue will run down the batteries.

k Stop & Go Drawing

By selecting “STOP & GO ” as the graph drawing speed, you can draw graphs
one by one. A graph is drawn each time you press w.

Example To use Stop & Go to draw the same graph that you drew in the
previous example (page 184)

1. Display the coefficient value specification display and press 3 (SPEED).

2. Use f and c to select “STOP & GO ( )” and press 1 (SEL) J.

3. Start drawing of the Dynamic Graph.

6(DYNA)

w
···→
←···
w

• Pressing A while the Dynamic Graph is being drawn changes to the drawing
speed setting display. The draw operation is suspended at this time, and you
can view the graph by pressing !6 (G ↔ T).

k Overwriting
CFX
By turning “On” the locus (Locus) setting of the Dynamic Graph, graphs are
sequentially drawn on the same display. The newest graph drawn is easily
identifiable because its color is different from graphs that were previously on the
display.

Example To switch the locus setting on and draw the same graph that
you drew in the previous example (page 184)

1. Display the coefficient menu. Next, display the set up screen and specify “On”
for Locus and then press J.

188
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Drawing a Dynamic Graph 13 - 3
2. Start drawing of the Dynamic Graph.
CFX
6(DYNA)

w
···→
←···
w

• Pressing A while the Dynamic Graph is being drawn changes to the drawing
speed setting display. The draw operation is suspended at this time, and you
can view the graph by pressing !6 (G↔T).

• Depending on the complexity of the graphs being drawn, it may take some
time for them to appear on the display.
• Trace and zoom features cannot be used on a Dynamic Graph screen.

uTo adjust the Dynamic Graph speed

You can use the following procedure to adjust the Dynamic Graph speed while the
draw operation is taking place.

1. While a Dynamic Graph draw operation is being performed, press A to

change to the speed adjustment menu.

• {tg
tg} ... {Each step of the Dynamic Graph draw operation is performed each
tg
time you press w.}
• {>}/{g
g}/{h
h} ... {slow (1/2 speed)}/{normal (default speed)}/{fast (double speed)}
P.190 • {STO} ... {stores graph conditions and screen data in Dynamic Graph memory}
P.190 • {DEL} ... {deletes Dynamic Graph screen data}

2. Press the function key (1 to 4) that corresponds to the speed you want to
change to.

• To clear the speed adjustment menu without changing anything, press w.

• Press ! 6 (G↔T) to return to the graph screen.

189
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 13-4 Using Dynamic Graph Memory
You can store Dynamic Graph conditions and screen data in Dynamic Graph
memory for later recall when you need it. This lets you save time, because you
can recall the data and immediately begin a Dynamic Graph draw operation. Note
that you can store one set of data in memory at any one time.

The following is all of the data that makes up a set.

• Graph functions (up to 20)
• Dynamic Graph conditions
• Set up screen settings
• View Window contents
• Dynamic Graph screen

uTo save data in Dynamic Graph memory

P.189 1. While a Dynamic Graph draw operation is being performed, press A to
change to the speed adjustment menu.

2. Press 5 (STO) to store the data.

• If there is already data stored in Dynamic Graph memory, the above operation
replaces it with the new data.

uTo recall data from Dynamic Graph memory

P.182 1. Display the Dynamic Graph function list.

2. Press 6 (RCL) to recall all the data stored in Dynamic Graph memory.
• Data recalled from Dynamic Graph memory replaces the calculator’s current
graph functions, draw conditions, and screen data. The previous data is lost
when it is replaced.

uTo delete Dynamic Graph screen data

P.189 1. Press A6 (DEL).

2. Press 1 (YES) to delete the Dynamic Graph screen data, or 6 (NO) to

abort the operation without deleting anything.

190
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Drawing a Dynamic Graph 13 - 3

13-5 Dynamic Graph Application Examples

Example To use Dynamic Graph to graph the parabolas produced by
balls thrown in the air at an initial velocity of 20m/second, at
angles of 30, 45, and 60 degrees. (Angle: Deg)
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –1 Ymin = –1 Tθ min = 0
Xmax = 42 Ymax = 16 Tθ max = 6
Xscale = 5 Yscale = 2 pitch = 0.1

With the initial velocity defined as V and the angle defined as θ, the parabolas can
be obtained using the following expressions.

X = Vcos θ T
Y = Vsin θ T – (1/2)gT2
g = 9.8 meters per second

1. Input the functions, making sure to specify

them a “Param” (parametric) type.

2. Display the coefficient menu and specify the dynamic coefficient.

4(VAR)daw

3. Display the coefficient range menu and specify the range values.
2(RANG)
dawgawbfw

4. Start the Dynamic Graph draw operation.

J6(DYNA)

···→
←···

191
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 192
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter
14

Conic Section Graphs

You can graph any one of the following types of conic sections
using the calculator’s built-in functions.
• Parabolic graph
• Circle graph
• Elliptical graph
• Hyperbolic graph

14-1 Before Graphing a Conic Section

14-2 Graphing a Conic Section
14-3 Conic Section Graph Analysis

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 14-1 Before Graphing a Conic Section
k Entering the CONICS Mode
1. In the Main Menu, select the CONICS icon and enter the CONICS Mode.
When you do, the following built in function menu appears on the screen.

2. Use f and c to highlight the built-in function you want, and then press w.

The following nine functions are built in.

Graph Type Function

Parabola X = A (Y – K) + H
2

X = AY2 + BY + C
Y = A (X – H)2 + K
Y = AX2 + BX + C

Circle (X – H)2 + (Y – K)2 = R2

AX2 + AY2 + BX + CY + D = 0

Ellipse (X – H)2 (Y – K)2

–––––––– + –––––––– =1
A 2
B2

Hyperbola (X – H)2 (Y – K)2

–––––––– – –––––––– =1
A2 B2
(Y – K)2 (X – H)2
–––––––– – –––––––– = 1
A2 B2

194
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 14-2 Graphing a Conic Section

Example 1 To graph the circle (X – 1)2 + (Y – 1)2 = 22

Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –6.3 Ymin = –3.1
Xmax = 6.3 Ymax = 3.1
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

1. Select the function whose graph you want to draw.

cccc

2. Press w and the variable input screen appears.

Graph function

Function variables

• The values that appear are the values currently assigned to each variable,
which are general variables used by the calculator. If the values include an
imaginary part, only the real part appears on the display.

3. Assign values to each variable.

bwbwcw

• You can also use f and c to highlight a variable and then input a value.

4. Press 6 (DRAW) to draw the graph.

• Certain View Window parameters can make a circle graph come out looking
like an ellipse. When this happens, you can use the graph correction function
P.136 (SQR) to make corrections and produce a perfect circle.

195
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 14 - 2 Graphing a Conic Section

(X – 3)2 (Y – 1)2
Example 2 To graph the hyperbola –––––––––– – –––––––––– =1
22 22
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –8 Ymin = –10
Xmax = 12 Ymax = 10
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

1. Select the function whose graph you want to draw.

ccccccc

2. Press w and the variable input screen appears.

3. Assign values to each variable.

cwcwdwbw

4. Press 6 (DRAW) to draw the graph.

k Conic Section Graphing Precautions

• Assigning the following types of values to variables contained in built-in
function produces an error.

(1) Parabola graph

A=0
(2) Circle graph
R = 0 for (X – H)2 + (Y – K)2 = R2
A = 0 for AX2 + AY2 + BX + CY + D = 0
(3) Ellipse/hyperbola graph
A = 0 or B = 0

196
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Graphing a Conic Section 14 - 2
• Conic section graphs can be drawn in blue only.
CFX
• You cannot overwrite conic section graphs.
• The calculator automatically clears the screen before drawing a new conic
section graph.
• You can use trace, scroll, zoom, or sketch after graphing a conic section.
However, a conic section graph cannot be scrolled while using trace.
• You cannot incorporate graphing of a conic section into a program.

• A parabola is the locus of points equidistant from fixed line l and fixed point F
not on the line. Fixed point F is the “focus,” fixed line l is the “directrix,” the
horizontal line that passes through the focus directrix is the “axis of symme-
try,” the length of a straight line that intersects the parabola, passes through
the locus, and is parallel to fixed line l is the “latus rectum,” and point A where
the parabola intersects the axis of symmetry is the “vertex.”
Directrix l

Latus rectum
Vertex A
Axis of symmetry
Focus F (p, 0)

• An ellipse is the locus of points the sum of the distances of each of which
from two fixed points F and F’ is constant. Points F and F’ are the “foci,”
points A, A’, B, and B’ where the ellipse intersects the x- and y-axes are the
“vertexes,” the x-coordinate values of vertexes A and A’ are called
x-intercepts, and the y-coordinate values of vertexes B and B’ are called
y-intercepts.

y-intercept B

x-intercept A’ x-intercept A
Focus F’ Focus F

y-intercept B’

197
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 14 - 2 Graphing a Conic Section

• A hyperbola is the locus of points related to two given points F and F’ such
that the difference in distances of each point from the two given points is
constant.
Points F and F’ are the “foci,” points A and A’ where the hyperbola intersects
the x-axis are the “vertexes,” the x-coordinate values of vertexes A and A’ are
called x-intercepts, the y-coordinate values of vertexes A and A’ are called y-
intercepts, and straight lines l and l' , which get closer to the hyperbola as
they move away from the foci are “asymptotes.”

Asymptote l

Vertex Vertex
A’ A
Focus F' Focus F

Asymptote l'

198
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 14-3 Conic Section Graph Analysis
You can determine approximations of the following analytical results using conic
section graphs.

• Focus/vertex calculation
• Latus rectum calculation
• Center/radius calculation
• x-/y-intercept calculation
• Directrix/axis of symmetry drawing and analysis
• Asymptote drawing and analysis

After graphing a conic section, press 5 (G-Solv) to display the Graph Analysis
Menu.

Parabolic Graph Analysis

• {FOCS} ... {determines the focus}
• {SYM}/{DIR} ... draws the {axis of symmetry}/{directrix}
• {VTX}/{LEN} ... determines the {vertex}/{latus rectum}

Circle Graph Analysis

• {CNTR}/{RADS} ... determines the {center}/{radius}

Ellipse Graph Analysis

• {FOCS}/{X-IN}/{Y-IN} ... determines the {focus}/{x-intercept}/{y-intercept}

Hyperbolic Graph Analysis

• {FOCS}/{X-IN}/{Y-IN}/{VTX} ... determines the {focus}/{x-intercept}/{y-intercept}/
{vertex}
• {ASYM} ... {draws the asymptote}

The following examples show how to use the above menus with various types of
conic section graphs.

uTo calculate the focus and vertex [G-Solv]-[FOCS]/[VTX]

Example To determine the focus and vertex for the parabola

X = (Y – 2)2 + 3
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –1 Ymin = –5
Xmax = 10 Ymax = 5
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

199
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 14 - 3 Conic Section Graph Analysis

5 (G-Solv)
1 (FOCS)
(Calculates the focus.)

5 (G-Solv)
4 (VTX)
(Calculates the vertex.)

• When calculating two foci for an ellipse or hyperbolic graph, press e to

calculate the second focus. Pressing d returns to the first focus.
• When calculating two vertexes for a hyperbolic graph, press e to calculate
the second vertex. Pressing d returns to the first vertex.

uTo calculate the latus rectum [G-Solv]-[LEN]

Example To determine the latus rectum for the parabola X = (Y – 2)2 + 3

Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –1 Ymin = –5
Xmax = 10 Ymax = 5
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

5 (G-Solv)
5 (LEN)
(Calculates the latus rectum.)

uTo calculate the center and radius [G-Solv]-[CNTR]/[RADS]

Example To determine the center and radius for the circle

X2 + Y2 – 2X – 2Y – 3 = 0
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –6.3 Ymin = –3.1
Xmax = 6.3 Ymax = 3.1
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

200
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Conic Section Graph Analysis 14 - 3
5 (G-Solv)
1 (CNTR)
(Calculates the center.)

5 (G-Solv)
2 (RADS)
(Calculates the radius.)

uTo calculate the x- and y-intercepts [G-Solv]-[X-IN]/[Y-IN]

Example To determine the x- and y-intercepts for the hyperbola

(X – 1)2 (Y – 1)2
–––––––––– – –––––––––– = 1
22 22
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –6.3 Ymin = –3.1
Xmax = 6.3 Ymax = 3.1
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

5 (G-Solv)
2 (X-IN)
(Calculates the x-intercept.)

5 (G-Solv)
3 (Y-IN)
(Calculates the y-intercept.)

• Press e to calculate the second set of x-/y-intercepts. Pressing d returns to

the first set of intercepts.

201
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 14 - 3 Conic Section Graph Analysis

uTo draw and analyze the axis of symmetry and directrix

[G-Solv]-[SYM]/[DIR]

Example To draw the axis of symmetry and directrix for the parabola
X = 2(Y – 1)2 + 1
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –6.3 Ymin = –3.1
Xmax = 6.3 Ymax = 3.1
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

5 (G-Solv)
2 (SYM)
(Draws the axis of symmetry.)

5 (G-Solv)
3 (DIR)
(Draws the directrix.)

uTo draw and analyze the asymptotes [G-Solv]-[ASYM]

Example To draw the asymptotes for the hyperbola

(X – 1)2 (Y – 1)2
–––––––––– – –––––––––– = 1
22 22
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = –6.3 Ymin = –5
Xmax = 6.3 Ymax = 5
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

5 (G-Solv)
5 (ASYM)
(Draws the asymptotes.)

202
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Conic Section Graph Analysis 14 - 3
• Certain View Window parameters can produce errors in values produced as
graph analysis result.
• The message ”Not Found” appears on the display when graph analysis is
unable to produce a result.
• The following can result in inaccurate analysis results or may even make it
impossible to obtain a solution at all.
— When the solution is tangent to the x-axis.
— When the solution is a point of tangency between two graphs.

203
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 204
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

15

Table & Graph

With Table & Graph, you can generate tables of discreet data
from functions and recursion formulas, and then use the values
for graphing. Because of this, Table & Graph makes it easy to
grasp the nature of numeric tables and recursion formulas.

15-1 Before Using Table & Graph

15-2 Storing a Function and Generating a Numeric Table
15-3 Editing and Deleting Functions
15-4 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs
15-5 Copying a Table Column to a List

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 15-1 Before Using Table & Graph
First select the TABLE icon on the Main Menu and then enter the TABLE Mode.
When you do, the table function list appears on the display.

• {SEL} ... {numeric table generation/non-generation status}

• {DEL} ... {function delete}
• {TYPE} ... {function type specification}
• {COLR} ... {graph color specification}
CFX
• {RANG} ... {table range specification screen}
• {TABL} ... {start numeric table generation}

• Note that the {RANG} item does not appear when a list name is specified for
the Variable item in the set up screen.

206
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 15-2 Storing a Function and Generating a Numeric
Table
uTo store a function

Example To store the function y = 3x2 – 2 in memory area Y1

Use f and c to move the highlighting in the TABLE Mode function list to the
memory area where you want to store the function. Next, input the function and
press w to store it.

k Variable Specifications
There are two methods you can use to specify value for the variable x when
generating a numeric table.

• Table range method

With this method, you specify the conditions for the change in value of the
variable.

• List
With this method, you substitute the values contained in a previously created
list for the value of the variable.

uTo generate a table using a table range

Example To generate a table as the value of variable x changes from –3 to

3, in increments of 1

5(RANG)
-dwdwbw

The numeric table range defines the conditions under which the value of variable x
changes during function calculation.

Start ................ Variable x start value

End ................. Variable x end value
pitch ................ Variable x value change

After specifying the table range, press J to return to the function list.

207
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 15 - 2 Storing a Function and Generating a Numeric Table

uTo generate a table using a list

1. In the TABLE Mode, display the set up screen.

2. Highlight Variable and then press 2 (LIST) to display the list menu.

3. Select the list you want to use.

• To select List 6, for example, press 6 (List6). This causes the setting of the
Variable item of the set up screen to change to List 6.

4. After specifying the list you want to use, press J to return to the previous
screen.
• Note that the {RANG} item of the TABLE Mode function list does not appear
when a list name is specified for the Variable item of the set up screen.

k Generating a Table

Example To generate a table of values for the functions stored in

memory areas Y1 and Y3 of the TABLE Mode function list
Use f and c to move the highlighting to the function you want to generate a
table for and press 1 (SEL) to select it.
The “=” sign of selected functions is highlighted on the screen. To deselect a
function, move the cursor to it and press 1 (SEL) again.

Press 6 (TABL) or w to generate a numeric table using the functions you

selected. The value of variable x changes according to the range or the contents
of the list you specified.

Each cell can contain up to six digits, including negative sign.

208
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Storing a Function and Generating a Numeric Table 15 - 2
You can use cursor keys to move the highlighting around the table for the following
purposes.
• To display the selected cell’s value at the bottom of the screen, using the
calculator’s current number of decimal place, number of significant digit, and
exponential display range settings.
• To scroll the display and view parts of the table that do not fit in the display.
• To display at the top of the screen the scientific function that produced the
value in the selected cell (in columns Y1, Y2, etc.)
• To change x variable values by replacing values in column X.
Press 1 (FORM) to return to the TABLE Mode function list.

uTo generate a differential numeric table

P.5 Changing the setting of set up screen's Derivative item to “On” causes a numeric
table that includes the derivative to be displayed whenever you generate a
numeric table.
Locating the cursor at a differential
coefficient displays “dy/dx” in the top line
to indicate differential.

• An error occurs if a graph for which a range is specified or an overwrite graph

is included among the graph expressions.

k Specifying the function type

You can specify a function as being one of three types.
• Rectangular coordinate (Y=)
• Polar coordinate (r =)
• Parametric (Parm)

1. To display the menu of function types, press 3 (TYPE) while the function list
is on the screen.

2. Press the function key that corresponds to the function type you want to
specify.
• When you generate a numeric table, a table is generated only for the function
type you specify here.

209
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 15 - 2 Storing a Function and Generating a Numeric Table

15-3 Editing and Deleting Functions

uTo edit a function

Example To change the function in memory area Y1 from y = 3x2 – 2 to

y = 3x2 – 5
Use f and c to move the highlighting in the TABLE Mode list to the
function you want to edit.

Use d and e to move the cursor to the location of the change.

eeeeef

6(TABL)

• The Function Link Feature automatically reflects any changes you make to
functions in the TABLE Mode list, in the GRAPH Mode and DYNA Mode lists.

uTo delete a function

1. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the function you want to delete and
then press 2 (DEL).

2. Press 1 (YES) to delete the function or 6 (NO) to abort the operation

without deleting anything.

210
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 15-4 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs
You can use the table menu to perform any of the following operations once you
generate a table.
• Change the values of variable x
• Edit (delete, insert, and append) rows
• Delete a table
• Draw a connect type graph
• Draw a plot type graph

While the Table & Graph menu is on the display, press 6 (TABL) to display the
table menu.

• {FORM} ... {display function list}

• {DEL} ... {delete table}
• {ROW} ... {display menu of row operations}
P.128 • {G·CON}/{G·PLT} ... {connected type}/{draw plot type} graph draw

uTo change variable values in a table

Example To change the value in Column x, Row 3 of the table generated

on page 208 from – 1 to – 2.5

cc -c.fw

• When you change a variable value in Column x, all values in the columns to
the right are recalculated and displayed.
• If you try to replace a value with an illegal operation (such as division by zero),
an error occurs and the original value remains unchanged.
• You cannot directly change any values in the other (non-x) columns of the
table.

211
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 15 - 4 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs

k Row Operations
The following menu appears whenever you press 3 (ROW) while the table menu
is on the display.

• {DEL} ... {delete row}

• {INS} ... {insert row}
• {ADD} ... {add row}

uTo delete a row

Example To delete Row 2 of the table generated on page 208

3(ROW)c 1(DEL)

1 2 3 4 5 6
uTo insert a row

Example To insert a new row between Rows 1 and 2 in the table gener-
ated on page 208

3(ROW)c 2(INS)

1 2 3 4 5 6

uTo add a row

Example To add a new row below Row 7 in the table generated on page
208

3(ROW)cccccc 3(ADD)

1 2 3 4 5 6

212
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs 15 - 4
k Deleting a Table
1. Display the table you want to delete and then press 2 (DEL).

2. Press 1 (YES) to delete the table or 6 (NO) to abort the operation without
deleting anything.

k Graphing a Function
Before drawing a function graph, you must first specify the following.
• Graph color (blue, orange, green)
CFX
• Draw/non-draw status of the function

uTo specify the graph color

CFX
The default color for a graph is blue. Use the following procedure to change the
graph color to orange or green.

1. Display the function list and then use f and c to highlight the function
whose graph color you want to change.

2. Press 4 (COLR).

3. Press the function key that corresponds to the color you want to specify.
• {Blue}/{Orng}/{Grn} .. {blue}/{orange}/{green}

uTo specify the draw/non-draw status of a formula

There are two options for the draw/non-draw status of a function graph.
• For the selected function only
• Overlay the graphs for all functions

P.208 To specify the draw/non-draw status, use same procedure as that for specifying
table generation/non-generation status.

213
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 15 - 4 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs

uTo graph only a selected function

Example To graph y = 3x2 – 2, which is stored in memory area Y1, as a

connect type graph.
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = 0 Ymin = –2
Xmax = 6 Ymax = 106
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 2

c1(SEL)
(Specifies graph non-draw.)
No highlighting

6(TABL) 5(G·CON)
(Specifies connect type graph.)

uTo graph all of the functions

Example To use the values in the numeric table generated using the
Table Range and the View Window parameters from the
previous example to graph all functions stored in memory as
plot type graphs.

6(TABL) 6(G·PLT)
(Specifies plot type graph.)

• After you graph a function, you can press !6 (G↔T) or A to return to the
function’s numeric table.
• After graphing a function, you can use the trace, zoom, sketch functions. For
P.128 details, see “8-6 Other Graphing Functions”.

214
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs 15 - 4
uTo graph a function using Dual Screen
P.7 Selecting “T+G” for the Dual Screen item of the set up screen makes it possible to
display both the graph and its numeric table of values.

Example To graph y = 3x2 – 2 in memory area Y1, displaying both the

graph and its table
Use the same View Window parameters as in the example on page
214.
Display the set up screen and specify “T+G” for Dual Screen. Press
J.

6(TABL)
(Shows the table.)

1 2 3 4 5 6

6(G·PLT)
(Draws plot type graph.)

• Pressing !6 (G↔T) causes the graph on the left side of the Dual Screen
to fill the entire display. Note that you cannot use the sketch function while a
graph is displayed using !6 (G↔T).

215
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 15-5 Copying a Table Column to a List
A simple operation lets you copy the contents of a numeric table column into a list.

uTo copy a table to a list

Example To copy the contents of Column x into List 1

K1(LIST)2(LMEM)

1 2 3 4 5 6

• You can select any row of the column you want to copy.
Press the function key that corresponds the list you want to copy to.
1(List1)

216
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

16
Recursion Table and
Graph
You can input two formulas for any of the three following types of
recursion, which you can then use to generate a table and draw
graphs.
• General term of sequence {an}, made up of an and n
• Formulas for linear recursion between two terms, made up of
an+1, an, and n
• Formulas for linear recursion between three terms, made up of
an+2, an+1, an, and n

16-1 Before Using the Recursion Table and Graph Function

16-2 Inputting a Recursion Formula and Generating a Table
16-3 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 16-1 Before Using the Recursion Table and
Graph Function
uTo enter the RECUR Mode
On the Main Menu, select the RECUR icon and enter the RECUR Mode. This
causes the Recursion Menu to appear.

Selected storage area

Press f and c to move.

• All recursion formulas that are stored in memory appear in the Recursion
Menu.

CFX
• {SEL+C} ... {menus for control of table generation and graph color}
fx-9750G
PLUS
• {SEL} ... {recursion formula generation/non-generation status}
• {DEL} ... {recursion formula delete}
• {TYPE} ... {recursion formula type specification}
• {n, an ···} ... {menu for input of variable n and general terms an and bn}
• {RANG} ... {screen for setting of table range}
• {TABL} ... {recursion formula table generation}

uTo specify the recursion formula type

Before inputting a recursion formula, you must first specify its type.

1. In the Recursion Menu, press 3 (TYPE).

• In this display, “an = A n + B” is the general term (an = A × n + B) of {an}.

2. Press the function key for the recursion formula type you want to set.
• {an}/{an+1}/{an+2} ... {general term of sequence {an}}/{linear recursion between two
terms}/{linear recursion between three terms}

218
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 16-2 Inputting a Recursion Formula and
Generating a Table
Example 1 To input an+1 = 2an + 1 and generate a table of values as the
value of n change from 1 to 6
Make a1 = 1.
1. Specify the recursion formula type as linear recursion between two terms and
then input the formula.
c4(n, an···) 2(an) +b

2. Press w5 (RANG) to display the table range setting screen, which contains
the following items.
• {a0}/{a1} ... setting of value for {a0(b0)}/{a1(b1)}

The table range settings specify the conditions that control the value of variable n
in the recursion formula, and the initial term of the numeric value table. You should
also specify a starting point for the pointer when drawing a convergence/diver-
P.225 gence graph (WEB graph) for a formula for linear recursion between two terms.

Start ................ Starting value of variable n

End ................. Ending value of variable n
a0, b0 ............... Value of 0th term a0/b0 (a1, b1 .... Value of 1st term a1/b1)
anStr, bnStr ...... Pointer starting point for convergence/divergence graph
(WEB graph)

• The value of variable n increments by 1.

3. Specify the range of the table.

2(a1)
bwgwbw

4. Display the table of the recursion formula. At this time, a menu of table
functions appears at the bottom of the screen.
J6(TABL)

Currently selected cell (up to six digits)

Value in currently highlighted cell

219
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 16 - 2 Inputting a Recursion Formula and Generating a Table

• Displayed cell values show positive integers up to six digits, and negative
integers up to five digits (one digit used for negative sign). Exponential display
can use up to three significant digits.
• You can see the entire value assigned to a cell by using the cursor keys to
move the highlighting to the cell whose value you want to view.
P.7 • You can also display the sums of the terms (Σan or Σbn) by turning on Σ Display.

Example 2 To input an+2 = an+1 + an (Fibonacci series) and generate a table

of values as the value of n change from 1 to 6
Make a1 = 1 and a2 = 1.

1. Specify the recursion formula type as linear recursion between three terms and
then input the formula.
3(TYPE)3(an+2) 4(n, an···)
3(an+1)+2(an)

2. Press w and then press 5 (RANG) to display the table range setting
screen, which contains the following items.
• {a0}/{a1} ... setting of value for {a0 (b0) and a1 (b1)}/{a1 (b1) and a2 (b2)}

The table range settings specify the conditions that control the value of variable n
in the recursion formula, and the initial term of the numeric value table.
Start ................ Starting value of variable n
End ................. Ending value of variable n
a0, a1, a2 .......... Values of 0th term a0/b0, 1st term a1/b1, and 2nd term a2/b2.

• The value of variable n increments by 1.

3. Specify the range of the table.

2(a1)
bwgwbwbw

220
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Inputting a Recursion Formula and Generating a Table 16 - 2
4. Display the table of the recursion formula. At this time, a menu of table
functions appears at the bottom of the screen.

J6(TABL)

Currently selected cell (up to six digits)

Value in currently highlighted cell

• There can be only one recursion table stored in memory at one time.
• Except for linear expression n, any of the following can be input for general
term {an} to generate a table: exponential expressions (such as an = 2n – 1),
fractional expressions (such as an = (n + 1)/n), irrational expressions (such as
an = n – n – 1 ), trigonometric expressions (such as an = sin 2nπ).

• Note the following points when specifying a table range.

• If a negative value is specified as a start or end value, the calculator
drops the negative sign. If a decimal value or fraction is specified, the unit
uses only the integer part of the value.
• When Start = 0 and a1/b1 is selected as the initial term, the calculator
changes to Start = 1 and generates the table.
• When Start > End, the calculator swaps the Start and End values and
generates the table.
• When Start = End, the calculator generates a table for Start values only.
• If the start value is very large, it may take a long time to generate a table
for linear recursion between two terms and linear recursion between
three terms.
• Changing the angle unit setting while a table generated from a trigonometric
expression is on the display does not cause the displayed values to change.
To cause the values in the table to be updated using the new setting, display
the table, press 1 (FORM), change the angle unit setting, and then press
6 (TABL).

221
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 16 - 2 Inputting a Recursion Formula and Generating a Table

uTo specify the generation/non-generation status of a formula

Example To specify generation of a table for recursion formula an+1 =

2an + 1 while there are two formulas stored

c
1(SEL+C) 1(SEL) ... 1(SEL)
J
(Selects recursion formula to which
non-generation status is to be Unhighlights this formula
assigned and then specifies non-
generation status.)

6(TABL)
(Generates table.)

• Each press of 1 (SEL) toggles a table between generation and non-

generation.

uTo change the contents of a recursion formula

Changing the contents of a recursion formula causes the values in the table to be
updated using the current table range settings.

Example To change an+1 = 2an + 1 to an+1 = 2an – 3

e (Displays the cursor.)

ee-dw
(Changes the formula contents.)
6(TABL)

uTo delete a recursion formula

1. Use f and c to highlight the formula you want to delete. Press 2 (DEL).

2. Press 1 (YES) to delete the formula or 6 (NO) to abort the operation

without deleting anything.

222
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 16-3 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs
You get a choice of four options for editing tables and drawing graphs.
• Deletion of a recursion formula table
• Drawing of a connect type graph
• Drawing of a plot type graph
• Drawing of a graph and analysis of convergence/divergence (WEB)

You can access these options from the function menu that appears at the bottom
of the screen whenever a table is displayed.

• {FORM} ... {returns to Recursion Menu}

• {DEL} ... {table delete}
P.225 • {WEB} ... {convergence/divergence (WEB) graph draw}
P.128 • {G·CON}/{G·PLT} ... {connected type}/{draw plot type} recursion graph draw

• The {WEB} item is available only when a table generated using a formula for
linear recursion between two terms (an+1 =, bn+1 =) is on the display.

uTo delete a recursion table

1. Display the recursion table you want to delete and then press 2 (DEL).

2. Press 1 (YES) to delete the table or 6 (NO) to abort the operation without
deleting anything.

k Before Drawing a Graph for a Recursion Formula

You must first specify the following.
• Graph color (blue, orange, green) ............................... {BLUE}/{ORNG}/{GRN}
CFX
• Draw/non-draw status of for the recursion formula ..... {SEL}
• The type of data to be plotted ..................................... Σ Display

223
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 16 - 3 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs

uTo specify the color of the graph ({BLUE}/{ORNG}/{GRN})

CFX
The default color for a graph is blue. Use the following procedure to change the
graph color to orange or green.

1. Display the Recursion Menu and then use f and c to highlight the formula
whose graph color you want to change.

2. Press 1 (SEL+C).

3. Press the function key that corresponds to the color you want to specify.

uTo specify the draw/non-draw status of a formula ({SEL})

There are two options for the draw/non-draw status of a recursion formula graph.
• Draw the graph for the selected recursion formula only
• Overlay the graphs for both recursion formulas
P.222 To specify the draw/non-draw status, use same procedure as that for specifying
generation/non-generation status.

uTo specify the type of data to be plotted (Σ Display: On)

You can specify one of two types of data for plotting.
• an on the vertical axis, n on the horizontal axis
• Σan on the vertical axis, n on the horizontal axis

In the function menu that appears while a table is on the display, press 5
(G·CON) or 6 (G·PLT) to display the plot data menu.
• {an}/{Σan} ... {an}/{Σan} on vertical axis, n on horizontal axis

Example 1 Draw a graph of an+1 = 2an + 1 with an on the vertical axis and n
on the horizontal axis, and with the points connected.
Set the following parameters in the View Window.
Xmin = 0 Ymin = 0
Xmax = 6 Ymax = 65
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 5

6(TABL)5(G·CON)
(Selects connected type.)
1(an)
(Draws graph with an on the vertical
axis.)

224
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs 16 - 3

Example 2 Draw a graph of an+1 = 2an + 1 with Σan on the vertical axis and n
on the horizontal axis, and with the points unconnected.
Use the same View Window parameters as those provided in
Example 1.

6(TABL)6(G·PLT)
(Selects plot type.)
6(Σan)
(Draws graph with Σan on the vertical
axis.)

• To input a different recursion formula after a graph is drawn, press ! Q.

This displays the Recursion Menu where you can input a new formula.

k Drawing a Convergence/Divergence Graph (WEB graph)

With this feature, you can draw a graph of an+1 = f (an) where an+1 and an are the
terms of linear recursion between two terms, substituted respectively for y and x in
the function y = f (x). The resulting graph can then be viewed to determine whether
or not the graph is convergent or divergent.

Example 1 To determine whether or not the recursion formula an+1 = –3an2

+ 3an is convergent or divergent.
Use the following table range.
Start = 0 End = 6
a0 = 0.01 an Str = 0.01
b0 = 0.11 bn Str = 0.11
Use the following View Window parameters.
Xmin = 0 Ymin = 0
Xmax = 1 Ymax = 1
Xscale = 1 Yscale = 1

This example assumes that the following two recursion formulas are already
stored in memory.

1. Press 6(TABL) 4(WEB) to draw the graph.

225
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 16 - 3 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs

2. Press w, and the pointer appears at the pointer start point (anStr = 0.01).

• The Y value for the pointer start point is always 0.

3. Each press of w draws web-like lines on the display.

w
↓

w
↓

This graph indicates that recursion formula an+1 = –3an2 + 3an is convergent.

Example 2 To determine whether or not the recursion formula bn+1 =

3bn + 0.2 is convergent or divergent.
Use the following table range.
Start = 0 End = 6
b0 = 0.02 bn Str = 0.02
Use the View Window parameters from Example 1.

1. Press 6 (TABL) 4 (WEB) to draw the graph.

226
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs 16 - 3
2. Press w and then either f or c to make the pointer appear at the pointer
start point (bnStr = 0.02).

• The Y value for the pointer start point is always 0.

3. Each press of w draws web-like lines on the display.

w
↓

w
↓

This graph indicates that recursion formula bn+1 = 3bn + 0.2 is divergent.
• Inputting bn or n for the expression an+1, or Inputting an or n for the expression
bn+1 for linear recursion between two terms causes an error.

227
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 16 - 3 Editing Tables and Drawing Graphs

k Drawing a Recursion Formula Graph Using Dual Screen

P.7 Selecting “T+G” for the Dual Screen item of the set up screen makes it possible to
display both the graph and its numerical table of values.

P.224 Example To draw the graph of an+1 = 2an + 1 from Example 1, displaying
both the graph and its table
Display the set up screen and specify “T+G” for Dual Screen. Press
J.
6(TABL)
(Shows the table.)

6(G·PLT)
(Draws plot type graph.)

• Pressing !6 (G↔T) causes the graph on the left side of the Dual Screen
to fill the entire display. Note that you cannot use the sketch function while a
graph is displayed using !6 (G↔T).

228
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

17
List Function
A list is a kind of container that you can use to store multiple data
items.
This calculator lets you store up to six lists in a single file, and up
to six files in memory. Stored lists can be used in arithmetic,
statistical, and matrix calculations, and for graphing.
Element number Display range Cell Column

List 1 List 2 List 3 List 4 List 5 List 6 List name

1 56 1 107 3.5 4 0
2 37 2 75 6 0 0
3 21 4 122 2.1 0 0
4 69 8 87 4.4 2 0
5 40 16 298 3 0 0
6 48 32 48 6.8 3 0
7 93 64 338 2 9 0
Row
8 30 128 49 8.7 0 0
• • • • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • •

17-1 List Operations

17-2 Editing and Rearranging Lists
17-3 Manipulating List Data
17-4 Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists
17-5 Switching Between List Files

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 List Data Linking

Operation Graph
List operation
Example:
List 1 + List 2
{1, 2, 3} + {4, 5, 6}
List 1 + 3

List internal operations List graphing

Y1=List 1X

From a graph to a list

↓w
Table data generated by
GRAPH TO TABLE to a list

LIST

Copying the column of a

Memory transfer specific table to a specific list.

Generating a table by
defining a list as the
variable.

Memory transfer
↓w K
1(LIST)
2(LMEM)
4(List4)

Inside list
↓w

Example: To send column 1

of Mat A to a list
Matrix Table
230
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17-1 List Operations
Select the LIST icon in the Main Menu and enter the LIST Mode to input data into
a list and to manipulate list data.

uTo input values one-by-one

Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the list name or cell you want to
select. Note that c does not move the highlighting to a cell that does not contain
a value.

The screen automatically scrolls when the highlighting is located at either edge of
the screen.
The following example procedure is performed starting with the highlighting
located at Cell 1 of List 1.

1. Input a value and press w to store it in the list.

dw

2. The highlighting automatically moves down to the next cell for input.
• Note that you can also input the result of an expression in a cell. The following
operation shows how to input the value 4 in the second cell and then input the
result of 2 + 3 in the next cell.
ewc+dw

231
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17 - 1 List Operations

uTo batch input a series of values

1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to another list.

2. Press !{, and then input the values you want, pressing , between each
one. Press !} after inputting the final value.

!{g,h,i!}

3. Press w to store all of the values in your list.

• Remember that a comma separates values, so you should not input a

comma after the final value of the set you are inputting.
Right: {34, 53, 78}
Wrong: {34, 53, 78,}

You can also use list names inside of a mathematical expression to input values
into another cell. The following example shows how to add the values in each row
in List 1 and List 2, and input the result into List 3.

1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the list where you
want the calculation results to be input.

2. Press K and input the expression.

K1(LIST)1(List)b+
1(List)cw

232
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17-2 Editing and Rearranging Lists
k Editing List Values

uTo change a cell value

Use d or e to move the highlighting to the cell whose value you want to
change. Input the new value and press w to replace the old data with the new
one.

uTo delete a cell

1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the cell you want to delete.
ddc

2. Press 3 (DEL) to delete the selected cell and cause everything below it to be
shifted up.

• Note that the above cell delete operation does not affect cells in other lists. If
the data in the list whose cell you delete is somehow related to the data in
neighboring lists, deleting a cell can cause related values to become
misaligned.

uTo delete all cells in a list

Use the following procedure to delete all the data in a list.
1. Use the cursor key to move the highlighting to any cell of the list whose data
you want to delete.

2. Press 4 (DEL-A). The function menu changes to confirm whether you really
want to delete all the cells in the list.

3. Press 1 (YES) to delete all the cells in the selected list or 6 (NO) to abort
the delete operation without deleting anything.

233
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17 - 2 Editing and Rearranging Lists

uTo insert a new cell

1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the location where you want to
insert the new cell.

2. Press 5 (INS) to insert a new cell, which contains a value of 0, causing

everything below it to be shifted down.

• Note that the above cell insert operation does not affect cells in other lists. If
the data in the list where you insert a cell is somehow related to the data in
neighboring lists, inserting a cell can cause related values to become
misaligned.

k Sorting List Values

You can sort lists into either ascending or descending order. The highlighting can
be located in any cell of the list.

uTo sort a single list

Ascending order
1. While the lists are on the screen, press 1 (SRT-A).

2. The prompt “How Many Lists? (H)” appears to ask how many lists you want to
sort. Here we will input 1 to indicate we want to sort only one list.
bw

234
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Editing and Rearranging Lists 17 - 2
3. In response to the “Select List (L)” prompt, input the number of the list you want
to sort. Here we will input 2 to specify sorting of List 2.
cw

Descending order
Use the same procedure as that for the ascending order sort. The only difference
is that you should press 2 (SRT-D) in place of 1 (SRT-A).

uTo sort multiple lists

You can link multiple lists together for a sort so that all of their cells are rearranged
in accordance with the sorting of a base list. The base list is sorted into either
ascending order or descending order, while the cells of the linked lists are
arranged so that the relative relationship of all the rows is maintained.

Ascending order
1. While the lists are on the screen, press 1 (SRT-A).

2. The prompt “How Many Lists? (H)” appears to ask how many lists you want to
sort. Here we will sort one base list linked to one other list, so we should input 2.
cw

3. In response to the “Select Base List (B)” prompt, input the number of the list
you want to sort into ascending order. Here we will specify List 1.
bw

4. In response to the “Select Second List (L)” prompt, input the number of the list
you want to link to the base list. Here we will specify List 2.
cw

235
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17 - 2 Editing and Rearranging Lists

Descending order
Use the same procedure as that for the ascending order sort. The only difference
is that you should press 2 (SRT-D) in place of 1 (SRT-A).
• You can sort up to six lists at one time.
• If you specify a list more than once for a single sort operation, an error occurs.
An error also occurs if lists specified for sorting do not have the same number of
values (rows).

236
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17-3 Manipulating List Data
List data can be used in arithmetic and function calculations. In addition, various
list data manipulation functions makes manipulation of list data quick and easy.
You can use list data manipulation functions in the RUN, STAT, MAT, LIST,
TABLE, EQUA and PRGM Modes.

k Accessing the List Data Manipulation Function Menu

All of the following examples are performed in the RUN Mode.
Press K and then 1 (LIST) to display the list data manipulation menu, which
contains the following items.
• {List}/{L→M}/{Dim}/{Fill}/{Seq}/{Min}/{Max}/{Mean}/{Med}/{Sum}/{Prod}/
{Cuml}/{%}/{A
A}

Note that all closing parentheses at the end of the following operations can be
omitted.

uTo count the number of values [OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim]

K1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List) <list number 1-6> w
• The number of cells that contain data in a list is called its “dimension.”

Example To enter the RUN Mode and count the number of values in List
1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)

AK1(LIST)3(Dim)
1(List) bw

u To create a list or matrix by specifying the number of data

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim]
Use the following procedure to specify the number of data items in the assignment
statement and create a list.
<number of data n>aK1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List)
<list number 1-6>w
n = 1 ~ 255

237
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17 - 3 Manipulating List Data

Example To create five data items (each of which contains 0) in List 1

AfaK1(LIST) 3(Dim)
1(List) bw

Use the following procedure to specify the number of data rows and columns, the
matrix name in the assignment statement, and to create a matrix.
!{<number of row m> ,<number of column n> !}a
K1(LIST)3(Dim)J2(MAT)1(Mat)a<matrix name>w
m, n = 1 ~ 255, matrix name; A ~ Z

Example To create a 2-row × 3-column matrix (with each cell

containing 0) in Matrix A

A!{c,d!}a
K1(LIST)3(Dim)J
2(MAT)1(Mat)aAw

uTo replace all cell values with the same value [OPTN]-[LIST]-[Fill]
K 1 (LIST) 4 (Fill) <value> , 1 (List) <list number 1-6> ) w

Example To replace all values in List 1 with the number 3

AK1(LIST)4(Fill)
d,1(List)b)w

The following shows the new contents of List 1.

uTo generate a sequence of numbers [OPTN]-[LIST]-[Seq]

K 1 (LIST) 5 (Seq) <expression> , <variable name> , <start
value> , <end value> , <pitch> ) w
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.

238
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Manipulating List Data 17 - 3

Example To input the number sequence 12, 62, 112 into a list
Use the following settings.
Variable: x Ending value: 11
Starting value: 1 Pitch: 5

AK1(LIST)5(Seq)v
x,v,b,bb,f)w

Specifying an ending value of 12, 13, 14, or 15 produces the same result as
shown above since they are less than the value produced by the next increment
(16).

uTo find the minimum value in a list [OPTN]-[LIST]-[Min]

K1(LIST)6(g)1(Min)6(g)6(g)1(List) <list number 1-6>
)w

Example To find the minimum value in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)

AK1(LIST)6(g)1(Min)
6(g)6(g)1(List)b)w

uTo find the maximum value in a list [OPTN]-[LIST]-[Max]

Use the same procedure as when finding the minimum value (Min), except press
2 (Max) in place of 1 (Min).

uTo find which of two lists contains the smallest value

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Min]
K1(LIST)6(g)1(Min)6(g)6(g)1 (List) <list number 1-6>
,1 (List) <list number 1-6> )w
• The two lists must contain the same number of data items. Otherwise, an error
occurs.
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.

Example To find whether List 1 (75, 16, 98, 46, 56) or List 2 (35, 89, 58, 72,
67) contains the smallest value

K1(LIST)6(g)1(Min)
6(g)6(g)1(List)b,
1(List)c)w

239
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17 - 3 Manipulating List Data

uTo find which of two lists contains the greatest value

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Max]
Use the same procedure as that for the smallest value, except press 2 (Max) in
place of 1 (Min).
• The two lists must contain the same number of data items. Otherwise, an error
occurs.

uTo calculate the mean of list values [OPTN]-[LIST]-[Mean]

K1(LIST)6(g)3(Mean)6(g)6(g)1(List) <list number 1-6>
)w

Example To calculate the mean of values in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)

AK1(LIST)6(g)3(Mean)
6(g)6(g)1(List)b)w

uTo calculate the mean of values of specified frequency

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Mean]
This procedure uses two lists: one that contains values and one that contains the
number of occurrences of each value. The frequency of the data in Cell 1 of the
first list is indicated by the value in Cell 1 of the second list, etc.
• The two lists must contain the same number of data items. Otherwise, an error
occurs.
K1(LIST)6(g)3(Mean)6(g)6(g)1(List)<list number 1-6
(data)>,1(List)<list number 1-6 (frequency)>)w

Example To calculate the mean of values in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56),
whose frequency is indicated by List 2 (75, 89, 98, 72, 67)

AK1(LIST)6(g)3(Mean)
6(g)6(g)1(List)b,
1(List)c)w

uTo calculate the median of values in a list [OPTN]-[LIST]-[Med]

K1(LIST)6(g)4(Med)6(g)6(g)1(List)<list number 1-6>
)w

Example To calculate the median of values in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)

AK1(LIST)6(g)4(Med)
6(g)6(g)1(List)b)w

240
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Manipulating List Data 17 - 3
uTo calculate the median of values of specified frequency
[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Med]
This procedure uses two lists: one that contains values and one that contains the
number of occurrences of each value. The frequency of the data in Cell 1 of the
first list is indicated by the value in Cell 1 of the second list, etc.
• The two lists must contain the same number of data items. Otherwise, an error
occurs.
K1(LIST)6(g)4(Med)6(g)6(g)1(List) <list number 1-6
(data)> ,1(List) <list number 1-6 (frequency)> )w

Example To calculate the median of values in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56),
whose frequency is indicated by List 2 (75, 89, 98, 72, 67)

AK1(LIST)6(g)4(Med)
6(g)6(g)1(List)b,
1(List)c)w

uTo calculate the sum of values in a list [OPTN]-[LIST]-[Sum]

K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)1(Sum)6(g)1(List)<list number 1-6>
w

Example To calculate the sum of values in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)

AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)
1(Sum)6(g)1(List)bw

uTo calculate the product of values in a list [OPTN]-[LIST]-[Prod]

K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)2(Prod)6(g)1(List)<list number 1-6>w

Example To calculate the product of values in List 1 (2, 3, 6, 5, 4)

AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)
2(Prod)6(g)1(List)bw

uTo calculate the cumulative frequency of each value

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Cuml]
K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)3(Cuml)6(g)1(List) <list number 1-6>
w

• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.

241
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17 - 3 Manipulating List Data

Example To calculate the cumulative frequency of each value in List 1

(2, 3, 6, 5, 4)

AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)
3(Cuml)6(g)1(List)bw
2+3=
2+3+6=
2+3+6+5=
2+3+6+5+4=

uTo calculate the percentage represented by each value

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[%]
K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)4(%)6(g)1(List)<list number 1-6>w
• The above operation calculates what percentage of the list total is represented
by each value.

• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.

Example To calculate the percentage represented by each value in List 1

(2, 3, 6, 5, 4)

AK1(LIST)6(g)6(g)
4(%)6(g)1(List)bw
2/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
3/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
6/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
5/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
4/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =

uTo calculate the differences between neighboring data inside a list

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[A
A]
K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)5(A)6(g)<list number 1-6>w

• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns memory.

Example To calculate the difference between the values in List 1

(1, 3, 8, 5, 4)

AK1(LIST)6(g)
3–1=
6(g)5(A)bw 8–3=
5–8=
4–5=

242
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Manipulating List Data 17 - 3
• You can specify the location of the new list (List 1 through List 6) with a
statement like: A List 1 → List 2. You cannot specify another memory or
ListAns as the destination of the A List operation. An error also occurs if you
specify a A List as the destination of the results of another A List operation.
• The number of cells in the new list is one less than the number of cells in the
original list.
• Note that an error occurs if you execute A List for a list that has no data or only
one data item.

uTo transfer list contents to Matrix Answer Memory

[OPTN]-[LIST]-[L→M]
K1(LIST)2(L→M)1(List) <list number 1-6> ,1(List) <list
number 1-6> ) w
• You can input the following as many times as necessary to specify more than
one list in the above operation.
, <list number 1-6>

Example To transfer the contents of List 1 (2, 3, 6, 5, 4) and List 2 (11, 12,
13, 14, 15) to Matrix Answer Memory

AK1(LIST)2(L→M)
1(List)b,1(List)c)w

243
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17-4 Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists
You can perform arithmetic calculations using either two lists or one list and a
numeric value.

ListAns Memory
+
List − List Calculation results are
= List
Numeric Value × Numeric Value stored in ListAns Memory.
÷

k Error Messages
• A calculation involving two lists performs the operation between corresponding
cells. Because of this, an error occurs if the two lists do not have the same
number of values (which means they have different “dimensions”).
• An error occurs whenever an operation involving any two cells generates a
mathematical error.

k Inputting a List into a Calculation

There are two methods you can use to input a list into a calculation.

uTo input a specific list by name

Example To input List 6

1. Press K to display the first Operation Menu.

• This is the function key menu that appears in the RUN Mode when you press
K.

2. Press 1 (LIST) to display the List Data Manipulation Menu.

3. Press 1 (List) to display the “List” command and input the number of the list
you want to specify.

uTo directly input a list of values

You can also directly input a list of values using {, }, and ,.

244
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists 17 - 4

Example 1 To input the list: 56, 82, 64

!{fg,ic,
ge!}

( )
41 6
Example 2 To multiply List 3 = 65 by the list 0
22 4

K1(LIST)1(List)d*!{g,a,e!}w

246
The resulting list 0 is stored in ListAns Memory.
88

u To assign the contents of one list to another list

Use a to assign the contents of one list to another list.

Example 1 To assign the contents of List 3 to List 1

K1(LIST)1(List)da1(List)bw

In place of 1 (List) d in the above procedure, you could input

!{e b,gf,cc!}.

Example 2 To assign the list in ListAns Memory to List 1

K1(LIST)1(List)!Ka1(List)bw

uTo input a single list cell value into a calculation

You can extract the value in a specific cell of a list and use it in a calculation.
Specify the cell number by enclosing it between square brackets using the [
and ] keys.

Example To calculate the sine of the value stored in Cell 3 of List 2

sK1(LIST)1(List)c![d!]w

uTo input a value into a specific cell

You can input a value into a specific cell inside a list. When you do, the value that
was previously stored in the cell is replaced with the new value you input.

Example To input the value 25 into Cell 2 of List 3

cfaK1(LIST)1(List)d![c!]w

245
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17 - 4 Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists

k Recalling List Contents

Example To recall the contents of List 1

K1(LIST)1(List)bw
• The above operation displays the contents of the list you specify and stores
them in ListAns Memory, which allows you to use the ListAns Memory contents
in a calculation.

uTo use list contents in ListAns Memory in a calculation

Example To multiply the list contents in ListAns Memory by 36

K1(LIST)1(List)!K*dgw
• The operation K 1 (LIST) 1 (List) ! K recalls ListAns Memory
contents.
• This operation replaces current ListAns Memory contents with the result of the
above calculation.

k Graphing a Function Using a List

When using the graphing functions of this calculator, you can input a function such
as Y1 = List1 X. If List 1 is {1, 2, 3}, this function will produces three graphs: Y = X,
Y = 2X, Y = 3X.
P.111 There are certain limitations on using lists with graphing functions.

k Inputting Scientific Calculations into a List

You can use the numeric table generation functions in the Table & Graph Menu to
input values that result from certain scientific function calculations into a list. To do
P.216 this, first generate a table. Next, use the “list copy” function to copy the values
from the table to the list.

k Performing Scientific Function Calculations Using a List

Lists can be used just as numeric values are in scientific function calculations.
When the calculation produces a list as a result, the list is stored in ListAns
Memory.
41
Example 1 To use List 3 65 to perform sin (List 3)
22
Use radians as the angle unit.

sK1(LIST)1(List)dw

246
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists 17 - 4
–0.158
The resulting list 0.8268 is stored in ListAns Memory.
–8E–3

In place of the 1 (List) d operation in the above procedure, you could input
!{ eb,gf,cc!}.

1 4
Example 2 To use List 1 2 and List 2 5 to perform List 1List 2
3 6

List1MList2w

This creates a list with the results of 14, 25, 36.

1
The resulting list 32 is stored in ListAns Memory.
729

247
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 17-5 Switching Between List Files
You can store up to six lists (List 1 to List 6) in each file (File 1 to File 6). A simple
operation lets you switch between list files.

uTo switch between list files

In the Main Menu, select the LIST icon and enter the LIST Mode.
Press ! Z to display the LIST Mode set up screen.

Press the function key to select the file you want.

Example To select File 3

3(File3)
J

All subsequent list operations are applied to the lists contained in the file you
select (List File3 in the above example).

248
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Statistical Graphs and

Calculations
This chapter describes how to input statistical data into lists, how
to calculate the mean, maximum and other statistical values, how
to perform various statistical tests, how to determine the confi-
18
dence interval, and how to produce a distribution of statistical
data. It also tells you how to perform regression calculations.

18-1 Before Performing Statistical Calculations

18-2 Paired-Variable Statistical Calculation Examples
18-3 Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable Statistical
Data
18-4 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical
Data
18-5 Performing Statistical Calculations
18-6 Tests
18-7 Confidence Interval
18-8 Distribution

Important!
• This chapter contains a number of graph screen shots. In each case, new
data values were input in order to highlight the particular characteristics of
the graph being drawn. Note that when you try to draw a similar graph, the
unit uses data values that you have input using the List function. Because of
this, the graphs that appears on the screen when you perform a graphing
operation will probably differ somewhat from those shown in this manual.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 18-1 Before Performing Statistical Calculations
In the Main Menu, select the STAT icon to enter the STAT Mode and display the
statistical data lists.
Use the statistical data lists to input data and to perform statistical calculations.

Use f, c, d and e to move

the highlighting around the lists.

P.251 • {GRPH} ... {graph menu}

P.270 • {CALC} ... {statistical calculation menu}
P.277 • {TEST} ... {test menu}
P.294 • {INTR} ... {confidence interval menu}
P.304 • {DIST} ... {distribution menu}
P.234 • {SRT·A}/{SRT·D} ... {ascending}/{descending} sort
P.233 • {DEL}/{DEL·A} ... deletes {highlighted data}/{all data}
P.234 • {INS} ... {inserts new cell at highlighted cell}

• The procedures you should use for data editing are identical to those you use
P.229 with the list function. For details, see “17. List Function”.

250
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18-2 Paired-Variable Statistical Calculation
Examples
Once you input data, you can use it to produce a graph and check for tendencies.
You can also use a variety of different regression calculations to analyze the data.

Example To input the following two data groups and perform statistical
calculations
{0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2}
{–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4}

k Inputting Data into Lists

Input the two groups of data into List 1 and List 2.
a.fwb.cw
c.ewewf.cw
e
-c.bwa.dw
b.fwcwc.ew

Once data is input, you can use it for graphing and statistical calculations.
• Input values can be up to 10 digits long.
• You can use the f, c, d and e keys to move the highlighting to any cell
in the lists for data input.

k Plotting a Scatter Diagram

Use the data input above to plot a scatter diagram.
1(GRPH)1(GPH1)

• To return to the statistical data list, press J or !Q.

• View Window parameters are normally set automatically for statistical

graphing. If you want to set View Window parameters manually, you must
change the Stat Wind item to “Manual”.
Note that View Window parameters are set automatically for the following
types of graphs regardless of whether or not the Stat Wind item is set to
“Manual”.
1-Sample Z Test, 2-Sample Z Test, 1-Prop Z Test, 2-Prop Z Test, 1-Sample
t Test, 2-Sample t Test, χ2 Test, 2-Sample F Test (x-axis only disregarded).

251
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 2 Paired-Variable Statistical Calculation Examples

While the statistical data list is on the display, perform the following procedure.
!Z2(Man)
J(Returns to previous menu.)

• It is often difficult to spot the relationship between two sets of data (such as
height and shoe size) by simply looking at the numbers. Such relationship
become clear, however, when we plot the data on a graph, using one set of
values as x-data and the other set as y-data.

The default setting automatically uses List 1 data as x-axis (horizontal) values and
List 2 data as y-axis (vertical) values. Each set of x/y data is a point on the scatter
diagram.

k Changing Graph Parameters

Use the following procedures to specify the graph draw/non-draw status, the
graph type, and other general settings for each of the graphs in the graph menu
(GPH1, GPH2, GPH3).

While the statistical data list is on the display, press 1 (GRPH) to display the
graph menu, which contains the following items.

• {GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3} ... only one graph {1}/{2}/{3} drawing

• The initial default graph type setting for all the graphs (Graph 1 through Graph
3) is scatter diagram, but you can change to one of a number of other graph
types.
P.252 • {SEL} ... {simultaneous graph (GPH1, GPH2, GPH3) selection}
P.254 • {SET} ... {graph settings (graph type, list assignments)}

• You can specify the graph draw/non-draw status, the graph type, and other
general settings for each of the graphs in the graph menu (GPH1, GPH2,
GPH3).

• You can press any function key (1,2,3) to draw a graph regardless of
the current location of the highlighting in the statistical data list.

1. Graph draw/non-draw status [GRPH]-[SEL]

The following procedure can be used to specify the draw (On)/non-draw (Off)
status of each of the graphs in the graph menu.

uTo specify the draw/non-draw status of a graph

1. Pressing 4 (SEL) displays the graph On/Off screen.

252
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Paired-Variable Statistical Calculation Examples 18 - 2
• Note that the StatGraph1 setting is for Graph 1 (GPH1 of the graph menu),
StatGraph2 is for Graph 2, and StatGraph3 is for Graph 3.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the graph whose status you
want to change, and press the applicable function key to change the status.
• {On}/{Off} ... setting {On (draw)}/{Off (non-draw)}
• {DRAW} ... {draws all On graphs}

3. To return to the graph menu, press J.

uTo draw a graph

Example To draw a scatter diagram of Graph 3 only

1(GRPH)4(SEL) 2(Off)
cc1(On)
6(DRAW)

2. General graph settings [GRPH]-[SET]

This section describes how to use the general graph settings screen to make the
following settings for each graph (GPH1, GPH2, GPH3).

• Graph Type
The initial default graph type setting for all the graphs is scatter graph. You can
select one of a variety of other statistical graph types for each graph.
• List
The initial default statistical data is List 1 for single-variable data, and List 1 and
List 2 for paired-variable data. You can specify which statistical data list you want
to use for x-data and y-data.
• Frequency
Normally, each data item or data pair in the statistical data list is represented on a
graph as a point. When you are working with a large number of data items
however, this can cause problems because of the number of plot points on the
graph. When this happens, you can specify a frequency list that contains values
indicating the number of instances (the frequency) of the data items in the
corresponding cells of the lists you are using for x-data and y-data. Once you do
this, only one point is plotted for the multiple data items, which makes the graph
easier to read.
• Mark Type
This setting lets you specify the shape of the plot points on the graph.

253
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 2 Paired-Variable Statistical Calculation Examples

uTo display the general graph settings screen [GRPH]-[SET]

Pressing 6 (SET) displays the general graph settings screen.

• The settings shown here are examples only. The settings on your general graph
settings screen may differ.

u StatGraph (statistical graph specification)

• {GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3} ... graph {1}/{2}/{3}

u Graph Type (graph type specification)

• {Scat}/{xy}/{NPP} ... {scatter diagram}/{xy line graph}/{normal probability plot}
–––
• {Hist}/{Box}/{Box}/{N·Dis}/{Brkn} ... {histogram}/{med-box graph}/{mean-box
graph}/{normal distribution curve}/{broken line graph}
• {X}/{Med}/{X^2}/{X^3}/{X^4} ... {linear regression graph}/{Med-Med graph}/
{quadratic regression graph}/{cubic regression graph}/{quartic regression
graph}
• {Log}/{Exp}/{Pwr}/{Sin}/{Lgst} ... {logarithmic regression graph}/{exponential
regression graph}/{power regression graph}/{sine regression graph}/
{logistic regression graph}

u XList (x-axis data list)

• {List1}/{List2}/{List3}/{List4}/{List5}/{List6} ... {List 1}/{List 2}/{List 3}/{List 4}/
{List 5}/{List 6}

u YList (y-axis data list)

• {List1}/{List2}/{List3}/{List4}/{List5}/{List6} ... {List 1}/{List 2}/{List 3}/{List 4}/
{List 5}/{List 6}

uFrequency (number of data items)

• {1} ... {1-to-1 plot}
• {List1}/{List2}/{List3}/{List4}/{List5}/{List6} ... frequency data in {List 1}/
{List 2}/{List 3}/{List 4}/{List 5}/{List 6}

uMark Type (plot mark type)

• { }/{×}/{•} ... plot points: { }/{×}/{•}

254
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Paired-Variable Statistical Calculation Examples 18 - 2
uGraph Color (graph color specification)
CFX
• {Blue}/{Orng}/{Grn} ... {blue}/{orange}/{green}

uOutliers (outliers specification)

• {On}/{Off} ... {display}/{do not display} Med-Box outliers

k Drawing an xy Line Graph

P.254 Paired data items can be used to plot a scatter diagram. A scatter diagram where
(Graph Type) the points are linked is an xy line graph.
(xy)

Press J or !Q to return to the statistical data list.

k Drawing a Normal Probability Plot

P.254 Normal probability plot contrasts the cumulative proportion of variables with the
(Graph Type) cumulative proportion of a normal distribution and plots the result. The expected
(NPP) values of the normal distribution are used as the vertical axis, while the observed
values of the variable being tested are on the horizontal axis.

Press J or !Q to return to the statistical data list.

k Selecting the Regression Type

After you graph paired-variable statistical data, you can use the function menu at
the bottom of the display to select from a variety of different types of regression.

• {X}/{Med}/{X^2}/{X^3}/{X^4}/{Log}/{Exp}/{Pwr}/{Sin}/{Lgst} ... {linear regres-

sion}/{Med-Med}/{quadratic regression}/{cubic regression}/{quartic
regression}/{logarithmic regression}/{exponential regression}/{power
regression}/{sine regression}/{logistic regression} calculation and graphing
• {2VAR} ... {paired-variable statistical results}

255
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 2 Paired-Variable Statistical Calculation Examples

k Displaying Statistical Calculation Results

Whenever you perform a regression calculation, the regression formula parameter
(such as a and b in the linear regression y = ax + b) calculation results appear on
the display. You can use these to obtain statistical calculation results.
Regression parameters are calculated as soon as you press a function key to
select a regression type while a graph is on the display.

Example To display logarithmic regression parameter calculation results

while a scatter diagram is on the display

6(g)1(Log)

k Graphing Statistical Calculation Results

You can use the parameter calculation result menu to graph the displayed
regression formula.

P.268 • {COPY} ... {stores the displayed regression formula as a graph function}
• {DRAW} ... {graphs the displayed regression formula}

Example To graph a logarithmic regression

While logarithmic regression parameter calculation results are on the display,
press 6 (DRAW).

P.255 For details on the meanings of function menu items at the bottom of the display, see
“Selecting the Regression Type”.

256
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data 18 - 3

18-3 Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable

Statistical Data
Single-variable data is data with only a single variable. If you are calculating the
average height of the members of a class for example, there is only one variable
(height).
Single-variable statistics include distribution and sum. The following types of
graphs are available for single-variable statistics.

k Drawing a Histogram (Bar Graph)

From the statistical data list, press 1 (GRPH) to display the graph menu, press
6 (SET), and then change the graph type of the graph you want to use (GPH1,
GPH2, GPH3) to histogram (bar graph).
P.251 Data should already be input in the statistical data list (see “Inputting Data into
P.252 Lists”). Draw the graph using the procedure described under “Changing Graph
Parameters”.

P.254
(Graph Type)
(Hist) ⇒
6(DRAW)

The display screen appears as shown above before the graph is drawn. At this
point, you can change the Start and pitch values.

k Med-box Graph (Med-Box)

P.254 This type of graph lets you see how a large number of data items are grouped
(Graph Type) within specific ranges. A box encloses all the data in an area from the first quartile
(Box) (Q1) to the third quartile (Q3), with a line drawn at the median (Med). Lines (called
whiskers) extend from either end of the box up to the minimum and maximum of
the data.
From the statistical data list, press 1 (GRPH) to display the graph menu, press
6 (SET), and then change the graph type of the graph you want to use (GPH1,
GPH2, GPH3) to med-box graph.

minX

Q1 Med Q3 maxX

257
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 3 Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data

To plot the data that falls outside the box, first specify “MedBox” as the graph
type. Then, on the same screen you use to specify the graph type, turn the outliers
item “On”, and draw the graph.

k Mean-box Graph
P.254 This type of graph shows the distribution around the mean when there is a large
(Graph Type) number of data items. A line is drawn at the point where the mean is located, and
(Box) then a box is drawn so that it extends below the mean up to the population
standard deviation (o – xσ n) and above the mean up to the population standard
deviation (o + xσ n). Lines (called whiskers) extend from either end of the box up to
the minimum (minX) and maximum (maxX) of the data.
From the statistical data list, press 1 (GRPH) to display the graph menu, press
6 (SET), and then change the graph type of the graph you want to use (GPH1,
GPH2, GPH3) to mean-box graph.

Note : minX
This function is not usually used in
the classrooms in U.S. Please use
Med-box Graph, instead.

o – xσ n o o + xσ n maxX

k Normal Distribution Curve

P.254 The normal distribution curve is graphed using the following normal distribution
(Graph Type) function.
(N·Dis) ( x–x ) 2
1 –
y= e 2xσn 2
(2 π) xσn

The distribution of characteristics of items manufactured according to some fixed

standard (such as component length) fall within normal distribution. The more data
items there are, the closer the distribution is to normal distribution.
From the statistical data list, press 1 (GRPH) to display the graph menu, press
6 (SET), and then change the graph type of the graph you want to use (GPH1,
GPH2, GPH3) to normal distribution.

258
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data 18 - 3
k Broken Line Graph
P.254 A broken line graph is formed by plotting the data in one list against the frequency
(Graph Type) of each data item in another list and connecting the points with straight lines.
(Brkn) Calling up the graph menu from the statistical data list, pressing 6 (SET),
changing the settings to drawing of a broken line graph, and then drawing a graph
creates a broken line graph.

⇒
6(DRAW)

6
The display screen appears as shown above before the graph is drawn. At this
point, you can change the Start and pitch values.

k Displaying Single-Variable Statistical Results

Single-variable statistics can be expressed as both graphs and parameter values.
When these graphs are displayed, the menu at the bottom of the screen appears
as below.

• {1VAR} ... {single-variable calculation result menu}

Pressing 1 (1VAR) displays the following screen.

• Use c to scroll the list so you can view the items that run off the bottom of the
screen.

The following describes the meaning of each of the parameters.

_
x ..................... mean of data
Σ x ................... sum of data
Σ x2 .................. sum of squares
xσn .................. population standard deviation
xσn-1 ................ sample standard deviation
n ..................... number of data items

259
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 3 Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data

minX ............... minimum

Q1 .................. first quartile
Med ................ median
Q3 .................. third quartile
_
x –xσn ............ data mean – population standard deviation
_
x + xσn ............ data mean + population standard deviation
maxX .............. maximum
Mod ................ mode

• Press 6 (DRAW) to return to the original single-variable statistical graph.

260
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18-4 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable
Statistical Data
Under “Plotting a Scatter Diagram,” we displayed a scatter diagram and then
performed a logarithmic regression calculation. Let’s use the same procedure to
look at the various regression functions.

k Linear Regression Graph

P.254 Linear regression plots a straight line that passes close to as many data points as
possible, and returns values for the slope and y-intercept (y-coordinate when x =
0) of the line.
The graphic representation of this relationship is a linear regression graph.
(Graph Type) !Q1(GRPH)6(SET)c
(Scatter) 1(Scat)
(GPH1) !Q1(GRPH)1(GPH1)
(X) 1(X)

1 2 3 4 5 6

6(DRAW)

a ...... regression coefficient (slope)

b ...... regression constant term (y-intercept)
r ....... correlation coefficient
r2 ...... coefficient of determination

k Med-Med Graph
P.254 When it is suspected that there are a number of extreme values, a Med-Med
graph can be used in place of the least squares method. This is also a type of
linear regression, but it minimizes the effects of extreme values. It is especially
useful in producing highly reliable linear regression from data that includes
irregular fluctuations, such as seasonal surveys.
2(Med)

1 2 3 4 5 6

261
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 4 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data

6(DRAW)

a ...... Med-Med graph slope

b ...... Med-Med graph y-intercept

k Quadratic/Cubic/Quartic Regression Graph

P.254 A quadratic/cubic/quartic regression graph represents connection of the data
points of a scatter diagram. It actually is a scattering of so many points that are
close enough together to be connected. The formula that represents this is
quadratic/cubic/quartic regression.

Ex. Quadratic regression

3(X^ 2)

1 2 3 4 5 6
6(DRAW)

Quadratic regression
a ...... regression second coefficient
b ...... regression first coefficient
c ...... regression constant term (y-intercept)
Cubic regression
a ...... regression third coefficient
b ...... regression second coefficient
c ...... regression first coefficient
d ...... regression constant term (y-intercept)
Quartic regression
a ...... regression fourth coefficient
b ...... regression third coefficient
c ...... regression second coefficient
d ...... regression first coefficient
e ...... regression constant term (y-intercept)

262
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data 18 - 4
k Logarithmic Regression Graph
P.254 Logarithmic regression expresses y as a logarithmic function of x. The standard
logarithmic regression formula is y = a + b × Inx, so if we say that X = Inx, the
formula corresponds to linear regression formula y = a + bX.
6(g)1(Log)

1 2 3 4 5 6

6(DRAW)

a ...... regression constant term

b ...... regression coefficient
r ...... correlation coefficient
r2 ..... coefficient of determination

k Exponential Regression Graph

P.254 Exponential regression expresses y as a proportion of the exponential function of
x. The standard exponential regression formula is y = a × ebx, so if we take the
logarithms of both sides we get Iny = Ina + bx. Next, if we say Y = Iny, and A = Ina,
the formula corresponds to linear regression formula Y = A + bx.
6(g)2(Exp)

1 2 3 4 5 6

6(DRAW)

a ...... regression coefficient

b ...... regression constant term
r ...... correlation coefficient
r2 ..... coefficient of determination
263
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 4 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data

k Power Regression Graph

P.254 Exponential regression expresses y as a proportion of the power of x. The
standard power regression formula is y = a × xb, so if we take the logarithm of both
sides we get Iny = Ina + b × Inx. Next, if we say X = Inx, Y = Iny, and A = Ina, the
formula corresponds to linear regression formula Y = A + bX.
6(g)3(Pwr)

1 2 3 4 5 6
6(DRAW)

a ...... regression coefficient

b ...... regression power
r ...... correlation coefficient
r2 ..... coefficient of determination

k Sine Regression Graph

P.254 Sine regression is best applied for phenomena that repeats within a specific
range, such as tidal movements.

y = a·sin(bx + c) + d

While the statistical data list is on the display, perform the following key operation.
6(g)5(Sin)

6
6(DRAW)

Drawing a sine regression graph causes the angle unit setting of the calculator to
automatically change to Rad (radians). The angle unit does not change when you
perform a sine regression calculation without drawing a graph.

264
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data 18 - 4
Gas bills, for example, tend to be higher during the winter when heater use is
more frequent. Periodic data, such as gas usage, is suitable for application of sine
regression.

Example To perform sine regression using the gas usage data shown
below
List 1 (Month Data)
{1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21,
22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48}
List 2 (Gas Usage Meter Reading)
{130, 171, 159, 144, 66, 46, 40, 32, 32, 39, 44, 112, 116, 152, 157,
109, 130, 59, 40, 42, 33, 32, 40, 71, 138, 203, 162, 154, 136, 39,
32, 35, 32, 31, 35, 80, 134, 184, 219, 87, 38, 36, 33, 40, 30, 36, 55,
94}

Input the above data and plot a scatter diagram.

1(GRPH)1(GPH1)

Execute the calculation and produce sine regression analysis results.

6(g)5(Sin)

6
Display a sine regression graph based on the analysis results.
6(DRAW)

k Logistic Regression Graph

P.254 Logistic regression is best applied for phenomena in which there is a continual
increase in one factor as another factor increases until a saturation point is
reached. Possible applications would be the relationship between medicinal
dosage and effectiveness, advertising budget and sales, etc.

265
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 4 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data

y= C
1 + ae–bx

6(g)6(g)1(Lgst)

6(DRAW)

Example Imagine a country that started out with a television diffusion

rate of 0.3% in 1966, which grew rapidly until diffusion reached
virtual saturation in 1980. Use the paired statistical data shown
below, which tracks the annual change in the diffusion rate, to
perform logistic regression.

List1(Year Data)
{66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83}
List2(Diffusion Rate)
{0.3, 1.6, 5.4, 13.9, 26.3, 42.3, 61.1, 75.8, 85.9, 90.3, 93.7, 95.4, 97.8, 97.8,
98.2, 98.5, 98.9, 98.8}

1(GRPH)1(GPH1)

Perform the calculation, and the logistic regression analysis values appear on the
display.
6(g)6(g)1(Lgst)

266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data 18 - 4
Draw a logistic regression graph based on the parameters obtained from the
analytical results.
6(DRAW)

k Residual Calculation
Actual plot points (y-coordinates) and regression model distance can be calcu-
lated during regression calculations.

P.6 While the statistical data list is on the display, recall the set up screen to specify a
list (“List 1” through “List 6”) for “Resid List”. Calculated residual data is stored in
the specified list.

The vertical distance from the plots to the regression model will be stored.

Plots that are higher than the regression model are positive, while those that are
lower are negative.

Residual calculation can be performed and saved for all regression models.

Any data already existing in the selected list is cleared. The residual of each plot is
stored in the same precedence as the data used as the model.

k Displaying Paired-Variable Statistical Results

Paired-variable statistics can be expressed as both graphs and parameter values.
When these graphs are displayed, the menu at the bottom of the screen appears
as below.

• {2VAR} ... {paired-variable calculation result menu}

Pressing 4 (2VAR) displays the following screen.

267
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 4 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data

• Use c to scroll the list so you can view the items that run off the bottom of the
screen.
_
x ..................... mean of xList data
Σ x ................... sum of xList data
Σ x2 .................. sum of squares of xList data
xσn .................. population standard deviation of xList data
xσn-1 ................ sample standard deviation of xList data
n ..................... number of xList data items
_
y ..................... mean of yList data
Σ y ................... sum of yList data
Σ y2 .................. sum of squares of yList data
yσn .................. population standard deviation of yList data
yσn-1 ................ sample standard deviation of yList data
Σ xy .................. sum of the product of data stored in xList and yList
minX ............... minimum of xList data
maxX .............. maximum of xList data
minY ............... minimum of yList data
maxY .............. maximum of yList data

k Copying a Regression Graph Formula to the Graph Mode

After you perform a regression calculation, you can copy its formula to the
GRAPH Mode.
The following are the functions that are available in the function menu at the
bottom of the display while regression calculation results are on the screen.

• {COPY} ... {stores the displayed regression formula to the GRAPH Mode}
• {DRAW} ... {graphs the displayed regression formula}

1. Press 5 (COPY) to copy the regression formula that produced the displayed
data to the GRAPH Mode.

Note that you cannot edit regression formulas for graph formulas in the GRAPH
Mode.
2. Press w to save the copied graph formula and return to the previous
regression calculation result display.

268
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data 18 - 4
k Multiple Graphs
You can draw more than one graph on the same display by using the procedure
P.252 under “Changing Graph Parameters” to set the graph draw (On)/non-draw (Off)
status of two or all three of the graphs to draw “On”, and then pressing 6
(DRAW). After drawing the graphs, you can select which graph formula to use
when performing single-variable statistic or regression calculations.

6(DRAW)
P.254 1(X)

• The text at the top of the screen indicates the currently selected graph
(StatGraph1 = Graph 1, StatGraph2 = Graph 2, StatGraph3 = Graph 3).

1. Use f and c to change the currently selected graph. The graph name at
the top of the screen changes when you do.
c

2. When graph you want to use is selected, press w.

P.259 Now you can use the procedures under “Displaying Single-Variable Statistical
P.267 Results” and “Displaying Paired-Variable Statistical Results” to perform statistical
calculations.

269
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 5 Performing Statistical Calculations

18-5 Performing Statistical Calculations

All of the statistical calculations up to this point were performed after displaying a
graph. The following procedures can be used to perform statistical calculations
alone.

uTo specify statistical calculation data lists

You have to input the statistical data for the calculation you want to perform and
specify where it is located before you start a calculation. Display the statistical
data and then press 2(CALC)6 (SET).

The following is the meaning for each item.

1Var XList ....... specifies list where single-variable statistic x values (XList)
are located
1Var Freq ........ specifies list where single-variable frequency values
(Frequency) are located
2Var XList ....... specifies list where paired-variable statistic x values (XList)
are located
2Var YList ....... specifies list where paired-variable statistic y values (YList)
are located
2Var Freq ........ specifies list where paired-variable frequency values
(Frequency) are located

• Calculations in this section are performed based on the above specifications.

k Single-Variable Statistical Calculations

In the previous examples from “Drawing a Normal Probability Plot” and “Histogram
(Bar Graph)” to “Line Graph,” statistical calculation results were displayed after the
graph was drawn. These were numeric expressions of the characteristics of
variables used in the graphic display.
These values can also be directly obtained by displaying the statistical data list
and pressing 2 (CALC) 1 (1VAR).

270
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Performing Statistical Calculations 18 - 5
Now you can use the cursor keys to view the characteristics of the variables.
P.259 For details on the meanings of these statistical values, see “Displaying Single-
Variable Statistical Results”.

k Paired-Variable Statistical Calculations

In the previous examples from “Linear Regression Graph” to “Logistic Regression
Graph,” statistical calculation results were displayed after the graph was drawn.
These were numeric expressions of the characteristics of variables used in the
graphic display.
These values can also be directly obtained by displaying the statistical data list
and pressing 2 (CALC) 2 (2VAR).

Now you can use the cursor keys to view the characteristics of the variables.
P.267 For details on the meanings of these statistical values, see “Displaying Paired-
Variable Statistical Results”.

k Regression Calculation
In the explanations from “Linear Regression Graph” to “Logistic Regression
Graph,” regression calculation results were displayed after the graph was drawn.
Here, the regression line and regression curve is represented by mathematical
expressions.
You can directly determine the same expression from the data input screen.
Pressing 2 (CALC) 3 (REG) displays a function menu, which contains the
following items.

• {X}/{Med}/{X^2}/{X^3}/{X^4}/{Log}/{Exp}/{Pwr}/{Sin}/{Lgst} ... {linear regres-

sion}/{Med-Med}/{quadratic regression}/{cubic regression}/{quartic
regression}/{logarithmic regression}/{exponential regression}/{power
regression}/{sine regression}{logistic regression} parameters

Example To display single-variable regression parameters

2(CALC)3(REG)1(X)

The meaning of the parameters that appear on this screen is the same as that for
“Linear Regression Graph” to “Logistic Regression Graph”.

271
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 5 Performing Statistical Calculations

k Estimated Value Calculation ( , )

After drawing a regression graph with the STAT Mode, you can use the RUN
Mode to calculate estimated values for the regression graph's x and y parameters.

• Note that you cannot obtain estimated values for a Med-Med, quadratic
regression, cubic regression, quartic regression, sine regression, or logistic
regression graph.

Example To perform power regression using the xi yi

nearby data and estimate the values of 28 2410
and when xi = 40 and yi = 1000
30 3033
33 3895
35 4491
38 5717

1. In the Main Menu, select the STAT icon and enter the STAT Mode.

2. Input data into the list and draw the power regression graph*.

3. In the Main Menu, select the RUN icon and enter the RUN Mode.

4. Press the keys as follows.

ea(value of xi)
K5(STAT)2( )w

The estimated value is displayed for xi = 40.

baaa(value of yi)
1( )w

The estimated value is displayed for yi = 1000.

*(Graph Type)
1(GRPH)6(SET)c
(Scatter) 1(Scat)c
(XList) 1(List1)c
(YList) 2(List2)c
(Frequency) 1(1)c
(Mark Type) 1( )J
(Auto) !Z1(Auto)J1(GRPH)1(GPH1)6(g)
(Pwr) 3(Pwr)6(DRAW)

272
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Performing Statistical Calculations 18 - 5
k Normal Probability Distribution Calculation and Graphing
You can calculate and graph normal probability distributions for single-variable
statistics.

uNormal probability distribution calculations

Use the RUN Mode to perform normal probability distribution calculations. Press
K in the RUN Mode to display the option number and then press 6 (g)
3 (PROB) 6 (g) to display a function menu, which contains the following
items.
• {P(}/{Q(}/{R(} ... obtains normal probability {P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(t)} value
• {t(} ... {obtains normalized variate t(x) value}

• Normal probability P(t), Q(t), and R(t), and normalized variate t(x) are
calculated using the following formulas.

P(t) Q(t) R(t)

u2 u2 u2
du du du

Example The following table shows the results of measurements of the

height of 20 college students. Determine what percentage of
the students fall in the range 160.5 cm to 175.5 cm. Also, in
what percentile does the 175.5 cm tall student fall?

Class no. Height (cm) Frequency

1 158.5 1
2 160.5 1
3 163.3 2
4 167.5 2
5 170.2 3
6 173.3 4
7 175.5 2
8 178.6 2
9 180.4 2
10 186.7 1

1. In the STAT Mode, input the height data into List 1 and the frequency data into
List 2.

273
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 5 Performing Statistical Calculations

2. Use the STAT Mode to perform the single-variable statistical calculations.

2(CALC)6(SET)
1(List1)c3(List2)J1(1VAR)

3. Press m to display the Main Menu, and then enter the RUN Mode. Next,
press K to display the option menu and then 6 (g) 3 (PROB) 6 (g).

• You obtain the normalized variate immediately after performing single-

variable statistical calculations only.

4(t () bga.f)w
(Normalized variate t for 160.5cm) Result: –1.633855948
( –1.634)

4(t() bhf.f)w
(Normalized variate t for 175.5cm) Result: 0.4963343361
( 0.496)

1(P()a.ejg)-
1(P()-b.gde)w
(Percentage of total) Result: 0.638921
(63.9% of total)

3(R()a.ejg)w
(Percentile) Result: 0.30995
(31.0 percentile)

274
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Performing Statistical Calculations 18 - 5
k Normal Probability Graphing
You can graph a normal probability distribution with Graph Y = in the Sketch Mode.

Example To graph normal probability P(0.5)

Perform the following operation in the RUN Mode.

!4(Sketch)1(Cls)w
5(GRPH)1(Y=)K6(g)3(PROB)
6(g)1(P()a.f)w

The following shows the View Window settings for the graph.

Ymin ~ Ymax
–0.1 0.45

Xmin ~ Xmax
–3.2 3.2

275
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18-6 Tests
The Z Test provides a variety of different standardization-based tests. They make
it possible to test whether or not a sample accurately represents the population
when the standard deviation of a population (such as the entire population of a
country) is known from previous tests. Z testing is used for market research and
public opinion research, that need to be performed repeatedly.

1-Sample Z Test tests for unknown population mean when the population
standard deviation is known.
2-Sample Z Test tests the equality of the means of two populations based on
independent samples when both population standard deviations are known.
1-Prop Z Test tests for an unknown proportion of successes.
2-Prop Z Test tests to compare the proportion of successes from two populations.

The t Test uses the sample size and obtained data to test the hypothesis that the
sample is taken from a particular population. The hypothesis that is the opposite of
the hypothesis being proven is called the null hypothesis, while the hypothesis
being proved is called the alternative hypothesis. The t-test is normally applied to
test the null hypothesis. Then a determination is made whether the null hypothesis
or alternative hypothesis will be adopted.
When the sample shows a trend, the probability of the trend (and to what extent it
applies to the population) is tested based on the sample size and variance size.
Inversely, expressions related to the t test are also used to calculate the sample
size required to improve probability. The t test can be used even when the
population standard deviation is not known, so it is useful in cases where there is
only a single survey.

1-Sample t Test tests the hypothesis for a single unknown population mean when
the population standard deviation is unknown.
2-Sample t Test compares the population means when the population standard
deviations are unknown.
LinearReg t Test calculates the strength of the linear association of paired data.

In addition to the above, a number of other functions are provided to check the
relationship between samples and populations.
χ2 Test tests hypotheses concerning the proportion of samples included in each of
a number of independent groups. Mainly, it generates cross-tabulation of two
categorical variables (such as yes, no) and evaluates the independence of these
variables. It could be used, for example, to evaluate the relationship between
whether or not a driver has ever been involved in a traffic accident and that
person’s knowledge of traffic regulations.

276
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tests 18 - 6
2-Sample F Test tests the hypothesis that there will be no change in the result for
a population when a result of a sample is composed of multiple factors and one or
more of the factors is removed. It could be used, for example, to test the carcino-
genic effects of multiple suspected factors such as tobacco use, alcohol, vitamin
deficiency, high coffee intake, inactivity, poor living habits, etc.
ANOVA tests the hypothesis that the population means of the samples are equal
when there are multiple samples. It could be used, for example, to test whether or
not different combinations of materials have an effect on the quality and life of a
final product.
The following pages explain various statistical calculation methods based on the
principles described above. Details concerning statistical principles and
terminology can be found in any standard statistics textbook.

While the statistical data list is on the display, press 3 (TEST) to display the test
menu, which contains the following items.
• {Z}/{t}/{CHI}/{F} ... {Z}/{t}/{χ2}/{F} test
• {ANOV} ... {analysis of variance (ANOVA)}

About data type specification

For some types of tests you can select data type using the following menu.
• {List}/{Var} ... specifies {list data}/{parameter data}

k Z Test
You can use the following menu to select from different types of Z Test.
• {1-S}/{2-S}/{1-P}/{2-P} ... {1-Sample}/{2-Sample}/{1-Prop}/{2-Prop} Z Test

u1-Sample Z Test
This test is used when the sample standard deviation for a population is known to
test the hypothesis. The 1-Sample Z Test is applied to the normal distribution.

o – µ0 o : sample mean
Z= σ µo : assumed population mean
n σ : population standard deviation
n : sample size

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
3(TEST)
1(Z)
1(1-S)

277
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 6 Tests

The following shows the meaning of each item in the case of list data specifica-
tion.
Data ................ data type
µ ..................... population mean value test conditions (“G µ0” specifies
two-tail test, “< µ0” specifies lower one-tail test, “> µ0”
specifies upper one-tail test.)
µ0 .................... assumed population mean
σ ..................... population standard deviation (σ > 0)
List .................. list whose contents you want to use as data (List 1 to 6)
Freq ................ frequency (1 or List 1 to 6)
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

The following shows the meaning of parameter data specification items that are
different from list data specification.

o ..................... sample mean

n ..................... sample size (positive integer)

Example To perform a 1-Sample Z Test for one list of data

For this example, we will perform a µ < µ0 test for the data List1
= {11.2, 10.9, 12.5, 11.3, 11.7}, when µ0 = 11.5 and σ = 3.

1(List)c2(<)c
bb.fw
dw
1(List1)c1(1)c
1(CALC)

µ<11.5 ............ assumed population mean and direction of test

z ...................... z value
p ..................... p-value
o ..................... sample mean
xσn-1 ................ sample standard deviation
n ..................... sample size

6(DRAW) can be used in place of 1(CALC) in the final Execute line to draw a
graph.

278
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tests 18 - 6
Perform the following key operations from the statistical result screen.
J(To data input screen)
cccccc(To Execute line)
6(DRAW)

u 2-Sample Z Test
This test is used when the sample standard deviations for two populations are
known to test the hypothesis. The 2-Sample Z Test is applied to the normal
distribution.
o1 – o2 o1 : sample 1 mean
Z= o2 : sample 2 mean
σ12 σ22 σ1 : population standard deviation of sample 1
n1 + n2
σ2 : population standard deviation of sample 2
n1 : sample 1 size
n2 : sample 2 size

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
3(TEST)
1(Z)
2(2-S)

The following shows the meaning of each item in the case of list data specification.

Data ................ data type

µ1 .................... population mean value test conditions (“G µ2” specifies two-
tail test, “< µ2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is
smaller than sample 2, “> µ2” specifies one-tail test where
sample 1 is greater than sample 2.)
σ1 .................... population standard deviation of sample 1 (σ1 > 0)
σ2 .................... population standard deviation of sample 2 (σ2 > 0)
List1 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 1 data
List2 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 2 data
Freq1 .............. frequency of sample 1
Freq2 .............. frequency of sample 2
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

279
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 6 Tests

The following shows the meaning of parameter data specification items that are
different from list data specification.

o1 .................... sample 1 mean

n1 .................... sample 1 size (positive integer)
o2 .................... sample 2 mean
n2 .................... sample 2 size (positive integer)

Example To perform a 2-Sample Z Test when two lists of data are input
For this example, we will perform a µ1 < µ2 test for the data
List1 = {11.2, 10.9, 12.5, 11.3, 11.7} and List2 = {0.84, 0.9, 0.14,
–0.75, –0.95}, when σ1 = 15.5 and σ2 = 13.5.

1(List)c
2(<)c
bf.fw
bd.fw
1(List1)c2(List2)c
1(1)c1(1)c
1(CALC)

µ1<µ2 ............... direction of test

z ...................... z value
p ..................... p-value
o1 .................... sample 1 mean
o2 .................... sample 2 mean
x1σn-1 ............... sample 1 standard deviation
x2σn-1 ............... sample 2 standard deviation
n1 .................... sample 1 size
n2 .................... sample 2 size

Perform the following key operations to display a graph.

J
cccccccc
6(DRAW)

280
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tests 18 - 6
u 1-Prop Z Test
This test is used to test for an unknown proportion of successes. The 1-Prop Z
Test is applied to the normal distribution.

x p0 : expected sample proportion

n – p0 n : sample size
Z=
p0 (1– p0)
n

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
3(TEST)
1(Z)
3(1-P)

Prop ................ sample proportion test conditions (“G p0” specifies two-tail
test, “< p0” specifies lower one-tail test, “> p0” specifies upper
one-tail test.)
p0 .................... expected sample proportion (0 < p0 < 1)
x ..................... sample value (x > 0 integer)
n ..................... sample size (positive integer)
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

Example To perform a 1-Prop Z Test for specific expected sample

proportion, data value, and sample size
Perform the calculation using: p0 = 0.5, x = 2048, n = 4040.

1(G)c
a.fw
caeiw
eaeaw
1(CALC)

PropG0.5 ........ direction of test

z ...................... z value
p ...................... p-value
p̂ ...................... estimated sample proportion
n ...................... sample size

281
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 6 Tests

The following key operations can be used to draw a graph.

J
cccc
6(DRAW)

u 2-Prop Z Test
This test is used to compare the proportion of successes. The 2-Prop Z Test is
applied to the normal distribution.
x1 x2 x1 : sample 1 data value
n1 – n2 x2 : sample 2 data value
Z=
n1 : sample 1 size
p(1 – p ) 1 + 1 n2 : sample 2 size
n1 n2
p̂ : estimated sample proportion

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
3(TEST)
1(Z)
4(2-P)

p1 .................... sample proportion test conditions (“G p2” specifies two-tail

test, “< p2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller
than sample 2, “> p2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1
is greater than sample 2.)
x1 .................... sample 1 data value (x1 > 0 integer)
n1 .................... sample 1 size (positive integer)
x2 .................... sample 2 data value (x2 > 0 integer)
n2 .................... sample 2 size (positive integer)
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

Example To perform a p1 > p2 2-Prop Z Test for expected sample

proportions, data values, and sample sizes
Perform a p1 > p2 test using: x1 = 225, n1 = 300, x2 = 230, n2 = 300.

282
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tests 18 - 6
3(>)c
ccfw
daaw
cdaw
daaw
1(CALC)

p1>p2 ............... direction of test

z ...................... z value
p ..................... p-value
p̂1 .................... estimated proportion of population 1
p̂2 .................... estimated proportion of population 2
p̂ ..................... estimated sample proportion
n1 .................... sample 1 size
n2 .................... sample 2 size

The following key operations can be used to draw a graph.

J
ccccc
6(DRAW)

k t Test
You can use the following menu to select a t test type.
• {1-S}/{2-S}/{REG} ... {1-Sample}/{2-Sample}/{LinearReg} t Test

u 1-Sample t Test
This test uses the hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean when the
population standard deviation is unknown. The 1-Sample t Test is applied to t-
distribution.
o – µ0 o : sample mean
t=
xσ n–1 µ0 : assumed population mean
n xσn-1 : sample standard deviation
n : sample size

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
3(TEST)
2(t)
1(1-S)

283
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 6 Tests

The following shows the meaning of each item in the case of list data specification.

Data ................ data type

µ ..................... population mean value test conditions (“G µ0” specifies two-
tail test, “< µ0” specifies lower one-tail test, “> µ0” specifies
upper one-tail test.)
µ0 .................... assumed population mean
List .................. list whose contents you want to use as data
Freq ................ frequency
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

The following shows the meaning of parameter data specification items that are
different from list data specification.

o ..................... sample mean

xσn-1 ................ sample standard deviation (xσn-1 > 0)
n ..................... sample size (positive integer)

Example To perform a 1-Sample t Test for one list of data

For this example, we will perform a µ G µ0 test for the data
List1 = {11.2, 10.9, 12.5, 11.3, 11.7}, when µ0 = 11.3.

1(List)c
1(G)c
bb.dw
1(List1)c1(1)c
1(CALC)

µ G 11.3 .......... assumed population mean and direction of test

t ...................... t value
p ..................... p-value
o ..................... sample mean
xσn-1 ................ sample standard deviation
n ..................... sample size

The following key operations can be used to draw a graph.

J
ccccc
6(DRAW)

284
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tests 18 - 6
u 2-Sample t Test
2-Sample t Test compares the population means when the population standard
deviations are unknown. The 2-Sample t Test is applied to t-distribution.
The following applies when pooling is in effect.

o1 – o2 o1 : sample 1 mean
t= o2 : sample 2 mean
xp σ n–12 n1 + n1 x1σn-1 : sample 1 standard
1 2
deviation
x2σn-1 : sample 2 standard
(n1–1)x1σ n–12 +(n2–1)x2σ n –12
xpσ n–1 = deviation
n1 + n 2 – 2 n1 : sample 1 size
n2 : sample 2 size
df = n1 + n2 – 2 xpσn-1 : pooled sample standard
deviation
df : degrees of freedom
The following applies when pooling is not in effect.

o1 – o2 o1 : sample 1 mean
t=
x1σ n–1 x2σ n–1
2 2 o2 : sample 2 mean
n1 + n2 x1σn-1 : sample 1 standard
deviation
1 x2σn-1 : sample 2 standard
df = 2
C (1–C )2 deviation
+
n1–1 n2–1 n1 : sample 1 size
n2 : sample 2 size
x1σ n–12 df : degrees of freedom
n1
C=
x1σn–12 x2σn–12
n1 + n2

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
3(TEST)
2(t)
2(2-S)

285
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 6 Tests

The following shows the meaning of each item in the case of list data specifica-
tion.

Data ................ data type

µ1 .................... sample mean value test conditions (“G µ2” specifies two-tail
test, “< µ2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller
than sample 2, “> µ2” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is
greater than sample 2.)
List1 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 1 data
List2 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 2 data
Freq1 .............. frequency of sample 1
Freq2 .............. frequency of sample 2
Pooled ............ pooling On or Off
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

The following shows the meaning of parameter data specification items that are
different from list data specification.

o1 .................... sample 1 mean

x1σn-1 ............... sample 1 standard deviation (x1σn-1 > 0)
n1 .................... sample 1 size (positive integer)
o2 .................... sample 2 mean
x2σn-1 ............... sample 2 standard deviation (x2σn-1 > 0)
n2 .................... sample 2 size (positive integer)

Example To perform a 2-Sample t Test when two lists of data are input
For this example, we will perform a µ1 G µ2 test for the data
List1 = {55, 54, 51, 55, 53, 53, 54, 53} and List2 = {55.5, 52.3,
51.8, 57.2, 56.5} when pooling is not in effect.

1(List)c1(G)c
1(List1)c2(List2)c
1(1)c1(1)
c2(Off)c
1(CALC)

286
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tests 18 - 6
µ1Gµ2 .............. direction of test
t ...................... t value
p ..................... p-value
df .................... degrees of freedom
o1 .................... sample 1 mean
o2 .................... sample 2 mean
x1σn-1 ............... sample 1 standard deviation
x2σn-1 ............... sample 2 standard deviation
n1 .................... sample 1 size
n2 .................... sample 2 size

Perform the following key operations to display a graph.

J
ccccccc
6(DRAW)

The following item is also shown when Pooled = On.

xpσn-1 ............... pooled sample standard deviation

u LinearReg t Test
LinearReg t Test treats paired-variable data sets as (x, y) pairs, and uses the
method of least squares to determine the most appropriate a, b coefficients of the
data for the regression formula y = a + bx. It also determines the correlation
coefficient and t value, and calculates the extent of the relationship between x and
y.
n a : intercept
Σ(x – o)( y – p)
i=1 n–2 b : slope of the line
b= a = p – bo t=r
n
1 – r2
Σ(x – o)2
i=1

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
3(TEST)
2(t)
3(REG)

287
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 6 Tests

The following shows the meaning of each item in the case of list data specifica-
tion.

β & ρ ............... p-value test conditions (“G 0” specifies two-tail test, “< 0”
specifies lower one-tail test, “> 0” specifies upper one-tail
test.)
XList ............... list for x-axis data
YList ............... list for y-axis data
Freq ................ frequency
Execute .......... executes a calculation

Example To perform a LinearReg t Test when two lists of data are

input
For this example, we will perform a LinearReg t Test for x-axis
data {0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4, 5.2} and y-axis data {–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 5, 2.4}.

1(G)c
1(List1)c
2(List2)c
1(1)c
1(CALC)

β G 0 & ρ G 0 . direction of test

t ...................... t value
p ..................... p-value
df .................... degrees of freedom
a ..................... constant term
b ..................... coefficient
s ...................... standard error
r ...................... correlation coefficient
r2 .................... coefficient of determination

P.268 The following key operations can be used to copy the regression formula.
6(COPY)

288
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tests 18 - 6
k Other Tests

u χ2 Test
χ2 Test sets up a number of independent groups and tests hypotheses related to
the proportion of the sample included in each group. The χ2 Test is applied to
dichotomous variables (variable with two possible values, such as yes/no).
k
expected counts Σ x ×Σ x
i=1
ij
j=1
ij

Fij = k

ΣΣ x
i=1 j=1
ij

k
(xij – Fij)2
χ2 = Σ Σ
i =1 j =1 Fij
For the above, data must already be input in a matrix using the MAT Mode.

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
3(TEST)
3(CHI)

Next, specify the matrix that contains the data. The following shows the meaning
of the above item.
Observed ........ name of matrix (A to Z) that contains observed counts (all cells
positive integers)
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

The matrix must be at least two lines by two columns. An error occurs if the
matrix has only one line or one column.

Example To perform a χ2 Test on a specific matrix cell

For this example, we will perform a χ2 Test for Mat A, which
contains the following data.
1 4
Mat A =
5 10

1(Mat A)c
1(CALC)

289
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 6 Tests

χ2 .................... χ2 value
p ..................... p-value
df .................... degrees of freedom
Expected ........ expected counts (Result is always stored in MatAns.)

The following key operations can be used to display the graph.

J
c
6(DRAW)

u 2-Sample F Test
2-Sample F Test tests the hypothesis that when a sample result is composed of
multiple factors, the population result will be unchanged when one or some of the
factors are removed. The F Test is applied to the F distribution.
x1σn–12
F=
x2σn–12

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
3(TEST)
4(F)

The following is the meaning of each item in the case of list data specification.

Data ................ data type

σ1 .................... population standard deviation test conditions (“G σ2”
specifies two-tail test, “< σ2” specifies one-tail test where
sample 1 is smaller than sample 2, “> σ2” specifies one-tail
test where sample 1 is greater than sample 2.)
List1 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 1 data
List2 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 2 data
Freq1 .............. frequency of sample 1
Freq2 .............. frequency of sample 2
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

290
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tests 18 - 6
The following shows the meaning of parameter data specification items that are
different from list data specification.

x1σn-1 ............... sample 1 standard deviation (x1σn-1 > 0)

n1 .................... sample 1 size (positive integer)
x2σn-1 ............... sample 2 standard deviation (x2σn-1 > 0)
n2 .................... sample 2 size (positive integer)

Example To perform a 2-Sample F Test when two lists of data are input
For this example, we will perform a 2-Sample F Test for the
data List1 = {0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4, 5.2} and List2 = {–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 5,
2.4}.

1(List)c1(G)c
1(List1)c2(List2)c
1(1)c1(1)c
1(CALC)

σ1Gσ2 .............. direction of test

F ..................... F value
p ..................... p-value
x1σn-1 ............... sample 1 standard deviation
x2σn-1 ............... sample 2 standard deviation
o1 .................... sample 1 mean
o2 .................... sample 2 mean
n1 .................... sample 1 size
n2 .................... sample 2 size

Perform the following key operations to display a graph.

J
cccccc
6(DRAW)

291
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 6 Tests

u Analysis of Variance (ANOVA)

ANOVA tests the hypothesis that when there are multiple samples, the means of
the populations of the samples are all equal.

F = MS k : number of populations
MSe oi : mean of each list
xiσn-1 : standard deviation of each list
SS
MS = ni : size of each list
Fdf o : mean of all lists
SSe F : F value
MSe = MS : factor mean squares
Edf
MSe : error mean squares
k SS : factor sum of squares
SS = Σni (oi – o)2 SSe : error sum of squares
i=1
Fdf : factor degrees of freedom
k Edf : error degrees of freedom
SSe = Σ(ni – 1)xiσn–12
i =1

Fdf = k – 1

k
Edf = Σ(ni – 1)
i=1

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
3(TEST)
5(ANOV)

The following is the meaning of each item in the case of list data specification.
How Many ...... number of samples
List1 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 1 data
List2 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 2 data
Execute .......... executes a calculation

A value from 2 through 6 can be specified in the How Many line, so up to six
samples can be used.

Example To perform one-way ANOVA (analysis of variance) when

three lists of data are input
For this example, we will perform analysis of variance for the
data List1 = {6, 7, 8, 6, 7}, List2 = {0, 3, 4, 3, 5, 4, 7} and
List3 = {4, 5, 4, 6, 6, 7}.

292
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tests 18 - 6
2(3)c
1(List1)c
2(List2)c
3(List3)c
1(CALC)

F ..................... F value
p ..................... p-value
xpσn-1 ............... pooled sample standard deviation
Fdf .................. factor degrees of freedom
SS ................... factor sum of squares
MS .................. factor mean squares
Edf .................. error degrees of freedom
SSe ................. error sum of squares
MSe ................ error mean squares

293
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 8 Confidence Interval

18-7 Confidence Interval

A confidence interval is a range (interval) that includes a statistical value, usually
the population mean.

A confidence interval that is too broad makes it difficult to get an idea of where the
population value (true value) is located. A narrow confidence interval, on the other
hand, limits the population value and makes it difficult to obtain reliable results.
The most commonly used confidence levels are 95% and 99%. Raising the
confidence level broadens the confidence interval, while lowering the confidence
level narrows the confidence level, but it also increases the chance of accidently
overlooking the population value. With a 95% confidence interval, for example, the
population value is not included within the resulting intervals 5% of the time.

When you plan to conduct a survey and then t test and Z test the data, you must
also consider the sample size, confidence interval width, and confidence level.
The confidence level changes in accordance with the application.

1-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval when the population

standard deviation is known.
2-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval when the population
standard deviations of two samples are known.
1-Prop Z Interval calculates the confidence interval when the proportion is not
known.
2-Prop Z Interval calculates the confidence interval when the proportions of two
samples are not known.
1-Sample t Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population
mean when the population standard deviation is unknown.
2-Sample t Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between
two population means when both population standard deviations are unknown.

While the statistical data list is on the display, press 4 (INTR) to display the
confidence interval menu, which contains the following items.
• {Z}/{t} ... {Z}/{t} confidence interval calculation

About data type specification

For some types of confidence interval calculation you can select data type using the
following menu.
• {List}/{Var} ... specifies {List data}/{parameter data}

294
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Confidence Interval 18 - 7
k Z Confidence Interval
You can use the following menu to select from the different types of Z confidence
interval.
• {1-S}/{2-S}/{1-P}/{2-P} ... {1-Sample}/{2-Sample}/{1-Prop}/{2-Prop} Z Interval

u 1-Sample Z Interval
1-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population
mean when the population standard deviation is known.

The following is the confidence interval.

Left = o – Z α σ
2 n

Right = o + Z α σ
2 n
However, α is the level of significance. The value 100 (1 – α) % is the confidence
level.
When the confidence level is 95%, for example, inputting 0.95 produces 1 – 0.95 =
0.05 = α.

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
4(INTR)
1(Z)
1(1-S)

The following shows the meaning of each item in the case of list data specifica-
tion.

Data ................ data type

C-Level ........... confidence level (0 < C-Level < 1)
σ ..................... population standard deviation (σ > 0)
List .................. list whose contents you want to use as sample data
Freq ................ sample frequency
Execute .......... executes a calculation

The following shows the meaning of parameter data specification items that are
different from list data specification.

o ..................... sample mean

n ..................... sample size (positive integer)

295
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 7 Confidence Interval

Example To calculate the 1-Sample Z Interval for one list of data

For this example, we will obtain the Z Interval for the data
{11.2, 10.9, 12.5, 11.3, 11.7}, when C-Level = 0.95 (95% confi-
dence level) and σ = 3.

1(List)c
a.jfw
dw
1(List1)c1(1)c1(CALC)

Left ................. interval lower limit (left edge)

Right ............... interval upper limit (right edge)
o ..................... sample mean
xσn-1 ................ sample standard deviation
n ..................... sample size

u 2-Sample Z Interval
2-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between
two population means when the population standard deviations of two samples
are known.

The following is the confidence interval. The value 100 (1 – α) % is the confidence
level.

σ 12 σ22 o1 : sample 1 mean

Left = (o1 – o2) – Z α + o2 : sample 2 mean
2 n1 n2
σ1 : population standard deviation
σ 12 σ 22
Right = (o1 – o2) + Z α + of sample 1
2 n1 n2 σ2 : population standard deviation
of sample 2
n1 : sample 1 size
n2 : sample 2 size

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
4(INTR)
1(Z)
2(2-S)

The following shows the meaning of each item in the case of list data specifica-
tion.

Data ................ data type

C-Level ........... confidence level (0 < C-Level < 1)
296
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Confidence Interval 18 - 7
σ1 .................... population standard deviation of sample 1 (σ1 > 0)
σ2 .................... population standard deviation of sample 2 (σ2 > 0)
List1 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 1 data
List2 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 2 data
Freq1 .............. frequency of sample 1
Freq2 .............. frequency of sample 2
Execute .......... executes a calculation

The following shows the meaning of parameter data specification items that are
different from list data specification.

o1 .................... sample 1 mean

n1 .................... sample 1 size (positive integer)
o2 .................... sample 2 mean
n2 .................... sample 2 size (positive integer)

Example To calculate the 2-Sample Z Interval when two lists of data are
input
For this example, we will obtain the 2-Sample Z Interval for the
data 1 = {55, 54, 51, 55, 53, 53, 54, 53} and data 2 = {55.5, 52.3,
51.8, 57.2, 56.5} when C-Level = 0.95 (95% confidence level),
σ1 = 15.5, and σ2 = 13.5.

1(List)c
a.jfw
bf.fw
bd.fw
1(List1)c2(List2)c1(1)c
1(1)c1(CALC)

Left ................. interval lower limit (left edge)

Right ............... interval upper limit (right edge)
o1 .................... sample 1 mean
o2 .................... sample 2 mean
x1σn-1 ............... sample 1 standard deviation
x2σn-1 ............... sample 2 standard deviation
n1 .................... sample 1 size
n2 .................... sample 2 size

297
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 7 Confidence Interval

u 1-Prop Z Interval
1-Prop Z Interval uses the number of data to calculate the confidence interval for
an unknown proportion of successes.

The following is the confidence interval. The value 100 (1 – α) % is the confidence
level.
n : sample size
Left = n – Z α
x 1 x x
2 n n 1– n x : data

Right = n + Z α
x 1 x x
2 n n 1– n

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
4(INTR)
1(Z)
3(1-P)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

C-Level ........... confidence level (0 < C-Level < 1)

x ..................... data (0 or positive integer)
n ..................... sample size (positive integer)
Execute .......... executes a calculation

Example To calculate the 1-Prop Z Interval using parameter value

specification
For this example, we will obtain the 1-Prop Z Interval when
C-Level = 0.99, x = 55, and n = 100.

a.jjw
ffw
baaw
1(CALC)

Left ................. interval lower limit (left edge)

Right ............... interval upper limit (right edge)
p̂ ..................... estimated sample proportion
n ..................... sample size

298
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Confidence Interval 18 - 7
u 2-Prop Z Interval
2-Prop Z Interval uses the number of data items to calculate the confidence
interval for the defference between the proportion of successes in two populations.

The following is the confidence interval. The value 100 (1 – α) % is the confidence
level.

x1 x1 x2 x2 n1, n2 : sample size

n1 1– n1 n2 1– n2 x1, x2 : data
Left = n1 – n2 – Z α
x x
n1 + n2
1 2 2
x1 x1 x2 x2
n1 1– n1 n2 1– n2
Right = n1 – n2 + Z α
x x
n1 + n2
1 2 2
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
4(INTR)
1(Z)
4(2-P)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

C-Level ........... confidence level (0 < C-Level < 1)

x1 .................... sample 1 data value (x1 > 0)
n1 .................... sample 1 size (positive integer)
x2 .................... sample 2 data value (x2 > 0)
n2 .................... sample 2 size (positive integer)
Execute .......... Executes a calculation

Example To calculate the 2-Prop Z Interval using parameter value

specification
For this example, we will obtain the 2-Prop Z Interval when
C-Level = 0.95, x1 = 49, n1 = 61, x2 = 38 and n2 = 62.

a.jfw
ejwgbw
diwgcw
1(CALC)

Left ................. interval lower limit (left edge)

Right ............... interval upper limit (right edge)

299
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 7 Confidence Interval

p̂1 .................... estimated sample propotion for sample 1

p̂2 .................... estimated sample propotion for sample 2
n1 .................... sample 1 size
n2 .................... sample 2 size

k t Confidence Interval
You can use the following menu to select from two types of t confidence interval.
• {1-S}/{2-S} ... {1-Sample}/{2-Sample} t Interval

u 1-Sample t Interval
1-Sample t Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population
mean when the population standard deviation is unknown.
The following is the confidence interval. The value 100 (1 – α) % is the confidence
level.
α xσn–1
Left = o– tn – 1
2 n
xσn–1
Right = o+ tn – 1 α
2 n

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
4(INTR)
2(t)
1(1-S)

The following shows the meaning of each item in the case of list data specifica-
tion.

Data ................ data type

C-Level ........... confidence level (0 < C-Level < 1)
List .................. list whose contents you want to use as sample data
Freq ................ sample frequency
Execute .......... execute a calculation

The following shows the meaning of parameter data specification items that are
different from list data specification.

o ..................... sample mean

xσn-1 ................ sample standard deviation (xσn-1 > 0)
n ..................... sample size (positive integer)
300
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Confidence Interval 18 - 7
Example To calculate the 1-Sample t Interval for one list of data
For this example, we will obtain the 1-Sample t Interval for data
= {11.2, 10.9, 12.5, 11.3, 11.7} when C-Level = 0.95.

1(List)c
a.jfw
1(List1)c
1(1)c
1(CALC)

Left ................. interval lower limit (left edge)

Right ............... interval upper limit (right edge)
o ..................... sample mean
xσn-1 ................ sample standard deviation
n ..................... sample size

u 2-Sample t Interval
2-Sample t Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between
two population means when both population standard deviations are unknown.
The t interval is applied to t distribution.

The following confidence interval applies when pooling is in effect.

The value 100 (1 – α) % is the confidence level.

α
Left = (o1 – o2)– tn +n 2 –2
xp σ n–12 n1 + n1
1
2 1 2

α
Right = (o1 – o2)+ tn +n 2 –2
xp σ n–12 n1 + n1
1
2 1 2

(n1–1)x1σ n–12 +(n2–1)x2σ n –12

xpσ n–1 =
n1 + n 2 – 2

The following confidence interval applies when pooling is not in effect.

The value 100 (1 – α) % is the confidence level.

α x1σ n–12 x2 σn–12

Left = (o1 – o2)– tdf n1 + n
2 2

x1σ n–12 x2 σn–12

Right = (o1 – o2)+ tdf α n1 + n
2 2

df = 1
2
C + (1–C)
2

n1–1 n2–1
x1σ n–12
n1
C=
x1σ n–12 x2 σn–12
n1 + n2
301
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 7 Confidence Interval

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
4(INTR)
2(t)
2(2-S)

The following shows the meaning of each item in the case of list data specification.

Data ................ data type

C-Level ........... confidence level (0 < C-Level < 1)
List1 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 1 data
List2 ................ list whose contents you want to use as sample 2 data
Freq1 .............. frequency of sample 1
Freq2 .............. frequency of sample 2
Pooled ............ pooling On or Off
Execute .......... executes a calculation

The following shows the meaning of parameter data specification items that are
different from list data specification.

o1 .................... sample 1 mean

x1σn-1 ............... sample 1 standard deviation (x1σn-1 > 0)
n1 .................... sample 1 size (positive integer)
o2 .................... sample 2 mean
x2σn-1 ............... sample 2 standard deviation (x2σn-1 > 0)
n2 .................... sample 2 size (positive integer)

302
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Confidence Interval 18 - 7

Example To calculate the 2-Sample t Interval when two lists of data are
input
For this example, we will obtain the 2-Sample t Interval for data 1
= {55, 54, 51, 55, 53, 53, 54, 53} and data 2 = {55.5, 52.3, 51.8, 57.2,
56.5} without pooling when C-Level = 0.95.

1(List)c
a.jfw
1(List1)c2(List2)c1(1)c
1(1)c2(Off)c1(CALC)

Left ................. interval lower limit (left edge)

Right ............... interval upper limit (right edge)
df .................... degrees of freedom
o1 .................... sample 1 mean
o2 .................... sample 2 mean
x1σn-1 ............... sample 1 standard deviation
x2σn-1 ............... sample 2 standard deviation
n1 .................... sample 1 size
n2 .................... sample 2 size

The following item is also shown when Pooled = On.

xpσn-1 ............... pooled sample standard deviation

303
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18-8 Distribution
There is a variety of different types of distribution, but the most well-known is
“normal distribution,” which is essential for performing statistical calculations.
Normal distribution is a symmetrical distribution centered on the greatest occur-
rences of mean data (highest frequency), with the frequency decreasing as you
move away from the center. Poisson distribution, geometric distribution, and
various other distribution shapes are also used, depending on the data type.

Certain trends can be determined once the distribution shape is determined. You
can calculate the probability of data taken from a distribution being less than a
specific value.

For example, distribution can be used to calculate the yield rate when manufactur-
ing some product. Once a value is established as the criteria, you can calculate
normal probability density when estimating what percent of the products meet the
criteria. Conversely, a success rate target (80% for example) is set up as the
hypothesis, and normal distribution is used to estimate the proportion of the
products will reach this value.

Normal probability density calculates the probability density of normal distribu-

tion from a specified x value.
Normal distribution probability calculates the probability of normal distribution
data falling between two specific values.
Inverse cumulative normal distribution calculates a value that represents the
location within a normal distribution for a specific cumulative probability.
Student- t probability density calculates t probability density from a specified x
value.
Student- t distribution probability calculates the probability of t distribution data
falling between two specific values.
Like t distribution, distribution probability can also be calculated for chi-square, F,
binomial, Poisson, and geometric distributions.

While the statistical data list is on the display, press 5 (DIST) to display the
distribution menu, which contains the following items.
• {NORM}/{t}/{CHI}/{F}/{BINM}/{POISN}/{GEO} ... {normal}/{t}/{χ2}/{F}/
{binomial}/{Poisson}/{geometric} distribution

About data type specification

For some types of distribution you can select data type using the following menu.
• {List}/{Var} ... specifies {list data}/{parameter data}

304
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Distribution 18 - 8
k Normal Distribution
You can use the following menu to select from the different types of calculation.
• {Npd}/{Ncd}/{InvN} ... {normal probability density}/{normal distribution
probability}/{inverse cumulative normal distribution} calculation

u Normal probability density

Normal probability density calculates the probability density of normal distribution
from a specified x value. Normal probability density is applied to the standard
normal distribution.
2
(x – µµ)
f(x) = 1 e
–
2σ 2 (σ > 0)
2πσ

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
1(NORM)
1(Npd)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

x ..................... data
σ ..................... standard deviation (σ > 0)
µ ..................... mean
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

• Specifying σ = 1 and µ = 0 specifies standard normal distribution.

Example To calculate the normal probability density for a specific

parameter value
For this example, we will calculate the normal probability
density when x = 36, σ = 2 and µ = 35.

dgw
cw
dfw
1(CALC)

p(x) ................. normal probability density

305
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 8 Distribution

Perform the following key operations to display a graph.

J
ccc
6(DRAW)

uNormal distribution probability

Normal distribution probability calculates the probability of normal distribution data
falling between two specific values.
2
a : lower boundary
∫e
(x – µ
µ)
p= 1
b –
2σ 2 dx b : upper boundary
2πσ a

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
1(NORM)
2(Ncd)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

Lower ............. lower boundary

Upper ............. upper boundary
σ ..................... standard deviation (σ > 0)
µ ..................... mean
Execute .......... executes a calculation

Example To calculate the normal distribution probability for a specific

parameter value
For this example, we will calculate the normal distribution
probability when lower boundary = – ∞ (–1E99), upper
boundary = 36, σ = 2 and µ = 35.

-bEjjw
dgw
cw
dfw
1(CALC)

prob ................ normal distribution probability

306
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Distribution 18 - 8
• This calculator performs the above calculation using the following:
∞ = 1E99, –∞ = –1E99

u Inverse cumulative normal distribution

Inverse cumulative normal distribution calculates a value that represents the
location within a normal distribution for a specific cumulative probability.

∫−∞
f (x)dx = p

Upper boundary of
integration interval
α=?

Specify the probability and use this formula to obtain the integration interval.

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
1(NORM)
3(InvN)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

Area ................ probability value (0 < Area < 1)

σ ..................... standard deviation (σ > 0)
µ ..................... mean
Execute .......... executes a calculation

Example To calculate inverse cumulative normal distribution for a

specific parameter value
For this example, we will determine inverse cumulative normal
distribution when probability value = 0.691462, σ = 2 and µ = 35.

a.gjbegcw
cw
dfw
1(CALC)

x ..................... inverse cumulative normal distribution (upper boundary of

integration interval)

307
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 8 Distribution

k Student-t Distribution
You can use the following menu to select from the different types of Student-t
distribution.
• {tpd}/{tcd} ... {Student-t probability density}/{Student-t distribution probability}
calculation

uStudent-t probability density

Student-t probability density calculates t probability density from a specified x
value.
df+1
–
df + 1 1 + x2 2
Γ 2 df
f (x) =
df π df
Γ 2
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
2(t)
1(tpd)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

x ..................... data
df .................... degrees of freedom (df >0)
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

Example To calculate Student-t probability density for a specific

parameter value
For this example, we will calculate Student-t probability density
when x = 1 and degrees of freedom = 2.

bw
cw
1(CALC)

p(x) ................. Student-t probability density

308
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Distribution 18 - 8
Perform the following key operation to display a graph.
J
cc
6(DRAW)

u Student-t distribution probability

Student-t distribution probability calculates the probability of t distribution data
falling between two specific values.

df + 1 a : lower boundary

∫
Γ2
b
2
–
df+1
b : upper boundary
p= 1+x 2
dx
df df
Γ 2 π df a

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
2(t)
2(tcd)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

Lower ............. lower boundary

Upper ............. upper boundary
df .................... degrees of freedom (df > 0)
Execute .......... executes a calculation

Example To calculate Student-t distribution probability for a specific

parameter value
For this example, we will calculate Student-t distribution
probability when lower boundary = –2, upper boundary = 3, and
degrees of freedom = 18.

-cw
dw
biw
1(CALC)

prob ................ Student-t distribution probability

309
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 8 Distribution

k Chi-square Distribution
You can use the following menu to select from the different types of chi-square
distribution.
• {Cpd}/{Ccd} ... {χ2 probability density}/{χ2 distribution probability} calculation

uχ2 probability density

χ2 probability density calculates the probability density function for the χ2
distribution at a specified x value.

df df x
–1 – (x > 0)
f (x) = 1 1 2
x2 e 2

df 2
Γ 2

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
3(CHI)
1(Cpd)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

x ..................... data
df .................... degrees of freedom (positive integer)
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

Example To calculate χ2 probability density for a specific parameter

value
For this example, we will calculate χ2 probability density when
x = 1 and degrees of freedom = 3.

bw
dw
1(CALC)

p(x) ................. χ2 probability density

310
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Distribution 18 - 8
Perform the following key operations to display a graph.
J
cc
6(DRAW)

uχ2 distribution probability

χ2 distribution probability calculates the probability of χ2 distribution data falling
between two specific values.

∫
df b
df x
a : lower boundary
p= 1 1 2 –1 –
x 2
e 2
dx b : upper boundary
df 2 a
Γ 2

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
3(CHI)
2(Ccd)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

Lower ............. lower boundary

Upper ............. upper boundary
df .................... degrees of freedom (positive integer)
Execute .......... executes a calculation

Example To calculate χ2 distribution probability for a specific parameter

value
For this example, we will calculate χ2 distribution probability
when lower boundary = 0, upper boundary = 19.023, and
degrees of freedom = 9.

aw
bj.acdw
jw
1(CALC)

prob ................ χ2 distribution probability

311
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 8 Distribution

k F Distribution
You can use the following menu to select from the different types of F distribution.
• {Fpd}/{Fcd} ... {F probability density}/{F distribution probability} calculation

u F probability density
F probability density calculates the probability density function for the F
distribution at a specified x value.

n+d
Γ n n –
n+d
2 n 2 –1 2
1 + nx
2
f (x) = x (x > 0)
n d d d
Γ Γ
2 2
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
4(F)
1(Fpd)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

x ..................... data
n-df ................. numerator degrees of freedom (positive integer)
d-df ................. denominator degrees of freedom (positive integer)
Execute .......... executes a calculation or draws a graph

Example To calculate F probability density for a specific parameter

value
For this example, we will calculate F probability density when
x = 1, n-df = 24, and d-df = 19.

bw
cew
bjw
1(CALC)

p(x) ................. F probability density

Perform the following key operations to display a graph.

J
ccc
6(DRAW)

312
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Distribution 18 - 8
u F distribution probability
F distribution probability calculates the probability of F distribution data falling
between two specific values.

n+d a : lower boundary

∫
Γ n b
n –
n+d
b : upper boundary
2 n 2 2
1 + nx
–1
p= x
2
dx
n d d d
Γ Γ a
2 2
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
4(F)
2(Fcd)

Data is specified using parameter specification. The following shows the meaning
of each item.

Lower ............. lower boundary

Upper ............. upper boundary
n-df ................. numerator degrees of freedom (positive integer)
d-df ................. denominator degrees of freedom (positive integer)
Execute .......... executes a calculation

Example To calculate F distribution probability for a specific parameter

value
For this example, we will calculate F distribution probability
when lower boundary = 0, upper boundary = 1.9824, n-df = 19
and d-df = 16.

aw
b.jicew
bjw
bgw
1(CALC)

prob ................ F distribution probability

k Binomial Distribution
You can use the following menu to select from the different types of binomial
distribution.
• {Bpd}/{Bcd} ... {binomial probability}/{binomial cumulative density}
calculation

313
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 8 Distribution

uBinomial probability
Binomial probability calculates a probability at specified value for the discrete
binomial distribution with the specified number of trials and probability of success
on each trial.

f (x) = n C x px (1–p) n – x (x = 0, 1, ·······, n) p : success probability

(0 < p < 1)
n : number of trials
Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
5(BINM)
1(Bpd)

The following shows the meaning of each item when data is specified using list
specification.

Data ................ data type

List .................. list whose contents you want to use as sample data
Numtrial .......... number of trials (positive integer)
p ..................... success probability (0 < p < 1)
Execute .......... executes a calculation

The following shows the meaning of a parameter data specification item that is
different from list data specification.

x ..................... integer from 0 to n

Example To calculate binomial probability for one list of data

For this example, we will calculate binomial probability for
data = {10, 11, 12, 13, 14} when Numtrial = 15 and success
probability = 0.6.

1(List)c
1(List1)c
bfw
a.gw
1(CALC)

probability when x = 10
probability when x = 11
probability when x = 12
probability when x = 13
probability when x = 14

314
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Distribution 18 - 8
uBinomial cumulative density
Binomial cumulative density calculates a cumulative probability at specified value
for the discrete binomial distribution with the specified number of trials and
probability of success on each trial.

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
5(BINM)
2(Bcd)

The following shows the meaning of each item when data is specified using list
specification.

Data ................ data type

List .................. list whose contents you want to use as sample data
Numtrial .......... number of trials (positive integer)
p ..................... success probability (0 < p < 1)
Execute .......... executes a calculation

The following shows the meaning of a parameter data specification item that is
different from list data specification.

x ..................... integer from 0 to n

Example To calculate binomial cumulative probability for one list of data

For this example, we will calculate binomial cumulative
probability for data = {10, 11, 12, 13, 14} when Numtrial = 15
and success probability = 0.6.

1(List)c
1(List1)c
bfw
a.gw
1(CALC)

cumulative probability when x = 10

cumulative probability when x = 11
cumulative probability when x = 12
cumulative probability when x = 13
cumulative probability when x = 14

315
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 8 Distribution

k Poisson Distribution
You can use the following menu to select from the different types of Poisson
distribution.
• {Ppd}/{Pcd} ... {Poisson probability}/{Poisson cumulative density} calculation

uPoisson probability
Poisson probability calculates a probability at specified value for the discrete Poisson
distribution with the specified mean.
e– µ µ x
f (x) = (x = 0, 1, 2, ···) µ : mean (µ > 0)
x!

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
6(g)
1(POISN)
1(Ppd)

The following shows the meaning of each item when data is specified using list
specification.

Data ................ data type

List .................. list whose contents you want to use as sample data
µ ..................... mean (µ > 0)
Execute .......... executes a calculation

The following shows the meaning of a parameter data specification item that is
different from list data specification.

x ..................... value

Example To calculate Poisson probability for one list of data

For this example, we will calculate Poisson probability for data
= {2, 3, 4} when µ = 6.

1(List)c
1(List1)c
gw
1(CALC)

probability when x = 2
probability when x = 3
probability when x = 4

316
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Distribution 18 - 8
u Poisson cumulative density
Poisson cumulative density calculates a cumulative probability at specified value
for the discrete Poisson distribution with the specified mean.

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
6(g)
1(POISN)
2(Pcd)

The following shows the meaning of each item when data is specified using list
specification.

Data ................ data type

List .................. list whose contents you want to use as sample data
µ ..................... mean (µ > 0)
Execute .......... executes a calculation

The following shows the meaning of a parameter data specification item that is
different from list data specification.

x ..................... value

Example To calculate Poisson cumulative probability for one list of data

For this example, we will calculate Poisson cumulative
probability for data = {2, 3, 4} when µ = 6.

1(List)c
1(List1)c
gw
1(CALC)

cumulative probability when x = 2

cumulative probability when x = 3
cumulative probability when x = 4

k Geometric Distribution
You can use the following menu to select from the different types of geometric
distribution.
• {Gpd}/{Gcd} ... {geometric probability}/{geometric cumulative density}
calculation

317
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 18 - 8 Distribution

uGeometric probability
Geometric probability calculates a probability at specified value, the number of the
trial on which the first success occurs, for the discrete geometric distribution with
the specified probability of success.

f (x) = p(1– p) x – 1 (x = 1, 2, 3, ···)

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
6(g)
2(GEO)
1(Gpd)

The following shows the meaning of each item when data is specified using list
specification.

Data ................ data type

List .................. list whose contents you want to use as sample data
p ..................... success probability (0 < p < 1)
Execute .......... executes a calculation

The following shows the meaning of a parameter data specification item that is
different from list data specification.

x ..................... value

• Positive integer number is calculated whether list data (Data:List) or x value

(Data:variable) is specified.

Example To calculate geometric probability for one list of data

For this example, we will calculate geometric probability for data
= {3, 4, 5} when p = 0.4.

1(List)c
1(List1)c
a.ew
1(CALC)

probability when x = 3
probability when x = 4
probability when x = 5

318
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Distribution 18 - 8
uGeometric cumulative density
Geometric cumulative density calculates a cumulative probability at specified
value, the number of the trial on which the first success occurs, for the discrete
geometric distribution with the specified probability of success.

Perform the following key operations from the statistical data list.
5(DIST)
6(g)
2(GEO)
2(Gcd)

The following shows the meaning of each item when data is specified using list
specification.

Data ................ data type

List .................. list whose contents you want to use as sample data
p ..................... success probability (0 < p < 1)
Execute .......... executes a calculation

The following shows the meaning of a parameter data specification item that is
different from list data specification.

x ..................... value

• Positive integer number is calculated whether list data (Data:List) or x value

(Data:variable) is specified.

Example To calculate geometric cumulative probability for one list of

data
For this example, we will calculate geometric cumulative
probability for data = {2, 3, 4} when p = 0.5.

1(List)c
1(List1)c
a.fw
1(CALC)

cumulative probability when x = 2

cumulative probability when x = 3
cumulative probability when x = 4

319
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 98
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Financial Calculations 19
19-1 Before Performing Financial Calculations
19-2 Simple Interest Calculations
19-3 Compound Interest Calculations
19-4 Investment Appraisal
19-5 Amortization of a Loan
19-6 Conversion between Percentage Interest Rate and
Effective Interest Rate
19-7 Cost, Selling Price, Margin Calculations
19-8 Day/Date Calculations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 19-1 Before Performing Financial Calculations
The Financial Mode provides you with the tools to perform the following types of
financial calculations.
• Simple interest
• Compound interest
• Investment appraisal (Cash Flow)
• Amortization
• Interest rate conversion (annual percentage rate and effective interest rate)
• Cost, selling price, margin
• Day/date calculations

u Graphing in the Financial Mode

After performing a financial calculation, you can use 6 (GRPH) to graph the
results as shown below.

• Pressing !1 (TRCE) while a graph is on the display activates Trace, which

can be used to look up other financial values. In the case of simple interest, for
example, pressing e displays PV, SI, and SFV. Pressing d displays the
same values in reverse sequence.
• Zoom, Scroll, Sketch, and G-Solve cannot be used in the Financial Mode.
• In the Financial Mode, horizontal lines are blue and vertical lines are red.
CFX These colors are fixed and cannot be changed.
• The present value is positive when it represents receipt of money, and a
negative value when it represents a payment.
• Note that calculation results produced in this mode should be regarded as
reference values only.
• Whenever performing an actual financial transaction, be sure to check any
calculation results obtained using this calculator with against the figures
calculated by your financial institution.

u Set up screen settings

Note the following points regarding set up screen settings whenever using the
Financial Mode.
P.6 • The following graph set up screen settings are all turned off for graphing in the
P.7 Financial Mode: Axes, Grid, Dual Screen.

322
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Before Performing Financial Calculations 19 - 1
• Drawing a financial graph while the Label item is turned on, displays the label
CASH for the vertical axis (deposits, withdrawals), and TIME for the horizontal
P.6 axis (frequency).
• The number of display digits applied in the Financial Mode is different from the
number of digits used in other modes. The calculators automatically reverts to
Norm 1 whenever you enter the Financial Mode, which cancels a Sci (number
of significant digits) or Eng (engineering notation) setting made in another
mode.

k Entering the Financial Mode

On the Main Menu, select the TVM icon to enter the Financial Mode. When you
do, the Financial 1 screen appears on the display.

Financial 1 screen Financial 2 screen

• {SMPL}/{CMPD}/{CASH}/{AMT}/{CNVT}/{COST}/{DAYS} ... {simple interest}/

{compound interest}/{cash flow}/{amortization}/{conversion}/{cost, selling
price, margin}/{day/date} calculation

323
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19-2 Simple Interest Calculations
This calculator uses the following formulas to calculate simple interest.

365-day Mode SI' = n × PV × i i=

I% SI : interest
365 100 n : number of interest
360-day Mode SI' = n × PV × i i=
I% periods
360 100 PV : principal
I% : annual interest
SFV : principal plus interest
SI = –SI'
SFV = –(PV + SI')

Press 1 (SMPL) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen
for simple interest calculation.

n ...................... number of interest periods (days)

I% ................ annual interest rate
PV .................. principal

• {SI}/{SFV} ... calculates {interest}/{principal plus interest}

Example What would the interest amount and principal plus interest be
for a loan of $1,500 borrowed for 90 days at an annual rate of
7.25%?
Use the 360-day mode and two decimal places.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “360” for Date Mode and “Fix2” for Display and then
P.6 press J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

jaw
h.cfw
-bfaaw
1(SI)

324
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Simple Interest Calculations 19 - 2
Now you can perform the following key operations to return to the input screen
and then display the principal plus interest.
1(REPT) (Returns to the input screen)
2(SFV)

You can also press 6 to draw a cash flow graph.

6(GRPH)

The left side is PV, while the right side is SI and SFV. The upper part of the graph
is positive (+), while the bottom part is negative (–).

• V-Window values vary in accordance with simple interest conditions.

Press J (or !6 (G↔T)) to return to the input screen.

Press J again to return to the Financial 1 screen.

325
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19-3 Compound Interest Calculations
This calculator uses the following standard formulas to calculate compound
interest.

u Formula I

(1+ i × S)[(1+ i)n–1] 1 I%

PV+PMT × + FV =0 i=
i(1+ i)n (1+ i)n 100
Here:

PV= –(PMT × α + FV × β ) PV : present value

FV : future value
PMT : payment
PMT × α + PV n : number of compound periods
FV= – I% : annual interest rate
β
PV + FV × β i is calculated using Newton’s Method.
PMT= –
α S = 1 assumed for beginning of term

{ }
S = 0 assumed for end of term
(1 + i S ) PMT–FVi
log
(1 + i S ) PMT+PVi
n=
log(1+ i)

(1 + i × S)[(1 + i)n–1]
α=
i(1 + i)n
1
β=
(1 + i)n

F(i) = Formula I

F(i)'=
PMT
i
–
[
(1+ i S)[1– (1+ i)–n]
i
+ (1+ i S)[n(1+ i)–n–1]+S [1–(1+ i)–n]
]
–nFV (1+ i)–n–1

uFormula II (I% = 0)

PV + PMT × n + FV = 0

Here:

PV = – (PMT × n + FV )

FV = – (PMT × n + PV )

326
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Compound Interest Calculations 19 - 3
PV + FV
PMT = –
n

PV + FV
n=–
PMT
• A deposit is indicated by a plus sign (+), while a withdrawal is indicated by a
minus sign (–).

u Converting between the nominal interest rate and effective

interest rate
The nominal interest rate (I% value input by user) is converted to an effective
interest rate (I%') when the number of installments per year (P/Y) is different from
the number of compound interest calculation periods (C/Y). This conversion is
required for installment savings accounts, loan repayments, etc.

{ } P/Y : installment
[C / Y ]
I% [P / Y ]
I%' = (1 + ) –1 ×100 periods per year
100 × [C / Y ] C/Y : compounding
periods per year
When calculating n, PV, PMT, FV
The following calculation is performed after conversion from the nominal interest
rate to the effective interest rate, and the result is used for all subsequent
calculations.

i = I%'÷100

When calculating I%
After I% is obtained, the following calculation is performed to convert to I%'.

{ }
[P / Y ] P/Y : installment
I% [C / Y ] periods per year
I%' = (1+ ) –1 ×[C / Y ]×100
100 C/Y : compounding
periods per year

The value of I%' is returned as the result of the I% calculation.

Press 2 (CMPD) in the Financial 1 screen to display the input screen for
compound interest calculation.

n ..................... number of compound periods

I% ................... annual interest rate
PV .................. present value (loan amount in case of loan; principal in case
of savings)
327
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 3 Compound Interest Calculations

PMT ............... payment for each installment (payment in case of loan;

deposit in case of savings)
FV .................. future value (unpaid balance in case of loan; principal plus
interest in case of savings)
P/Y .................. installment periods per year
C/Y ................. compounding periods per year

Inputting Values
A period (n) is expressed as a positive value. Either the present value (PV) or
future value (FV) is positive, while the other (PV or FV) is negative.

Precision
This calculator performs interest calculations using Newton’s Method, which
produces approximate values whose precision can be affected by various
calculation conditions. Because of this, interest calculation results produced by
this calculator should be used keeping the above limitation in mind or the
results should be verified.

k Compound Interest Examples

This section shows how compound interest calculations can be used in a variety
of applications.

u Savings (standard compound interest)

Input Condition: Future value is greater than present value.
Formula Representation of Input Condition: PMT = 0
|PV| < |FV|

Example Calculate the interest rate required to increase a principal of

$10,000 to $12,000 in three years, when compounding is
performed semiannually.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

dw(Input n = 3.)
c
-baaaaw(PV = –10,000)
aw
bcaaaw(FV = 12,000)
bw
cw(Semiannual compounding)
2(I%)

328
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Compound Interest Calculations 19 - 3
Now you can press 6 to draw a cash flow graph.
6(GRPH)

The left side is PV, while the right side is FV. The upper part of the graph is
positive (+), while the bottom part is negative (–).

u Installment savings
Input Condition: Future value is greater than the total of payments.
Formula Representation of Input Condition:
PMT and FV have different signs (positive, negative) when PV = 0.
–FV < n × PMT when FV > 0
–FV > n × PMT when FV < 0

Example Calculate the interest rate required to have a $2,500 balance in

an installment savings account in two years when $100 is
deposited each month and interest is compounded semiannu-
ally.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

c*bcw(Input n = 2 × 12.)
c
aw(PV = 0)
-baaw(PMT = –100)
cfaaw(FV = 2,500)
bcw(Monthly installment)
cw(Compounding every six months)
2(I%)

uLoans
Input Condition: Total of payments is greater than loan amount.
Formula Representation of Input Condition:
PMT and PV have different signs (positive, negative) when FV = 0.
–PV > n × PMT when PV > 0
–PV < n × PMT when PV < 0

329
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 3 Compound Interest Calculations

Example Calculate the interest rate required to repay a $2,300 balance

on a loan in two years paying back $100 per month, when
interest is compounded monthly.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

c*bcw(Input n = 2 × 12.)
c
cdaaw(PV = 2,300)
-baaw(PMT = –100)
aw(FV = 0)
bcw(Monthly installment)
(Monthly compounding) The value you input for P/Y (the
2(I%) number of installment periods per
year) is also automatically input for
C/Y (the number of compounding
periods per year). You can input
another value for C/Y if you want.

uLoan when final installment is greater than other installments

Input Condition: Total of equal amount payments is greater than the difference
between the loan amount and final payment amount.
Formula Representation of Input Condition:
PV, PMT, FV do not equal zero.
PV + FV > – n × PMT when FV > PV
PV + FV < – n × PMT when FV < PV

Example Calculate the interest rate required to repay a $2,500 balance

on a loan in two years (24 installments) paying back $100 per
month and a final $200 installment, when interest is com-
pounded monthly.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

c*bcw(Input n = 2 × 12.)
c
cfaaw(PV = 2,500)
-baaw(PMT = –100)
-caaw(FV = –200)
bcw(Monthly installment)
(Monthly compounding)
2(I%)

330
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Compound Interest Calculations 19 - 3
k Savings

u Future value

Example Calculate the future value after 7.6 years for a principal of $500
and an interest rate of 6%, compounded annually.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

h.gw(n = 7.6 years)
gw(I = 6%)
-faaw(PV = –500)
aw(PMT = 0)
aw(FV = 0)
bw
bw(Annual compounding)
5(FV)

uPrincipal

Example Calculate the principal required at 5.5%, compounded monthly,

to produce a total of $20,000 in a year.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

bw(Input n = 1.)
f.fw(I = 5.5%)
c
aw(PMT = 0)
caaaaw(FV = 20,000)
bw
bcw(Monthly compounding)
3(PV )

uCompound interest rate

Example Calculate the interest required, compounded monthly, to

produce a total of $10,000 in 10 years on an initial investment
of $6,000.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “Begin” for Payment and then press J.

331
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 3 Compound Interest Calculations

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

baw(Input n = 10.)
c
-gaaaw(PV = –6,000)
aw(PMT = 0)
baaaaw(FV = 10,000)
bw
bcw(Monthly compounding)
2(I%)

u Compound interest period

Example Calculate the amount of time required to increase an initial

investment of $5,000 to a total of $10,000 at an annual rate of
4%, compounded monthly.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment and then press J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

c
ew(I% = 4)
-faaaw(PV = –5,000)
aw(PMT = 0)
baaaaw(FV = 10,000)
bw
bcw(Monthly compounding)
1(n)

uInstallment savings

Example Calculate (to two decimal places) the principal plus interest for
$250 monthly installments for five years at 6% annual interest,
compounded monthly.
Calculate amounts for when installments are made at the
beginning of each month and at the end of each month.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment and “Fix2” for Display, and then
P.6 press J.

332
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Compound Interest Calculations 19 - 3
Perform the following key operations from the input screen.
f*bcw(Input n = 5 × 12.)
gw(I = 6.0%)
aw(PV = 0)
-cfaw
c
bcw(Monthly installments)
(Monthly compounding)
5(FV )

P.7 Specifying “Begin” for Payment in the set up screen changes to calculation of
installments at the beginning of each month.
5(FV )

uInstallment amount

Example Calculate the amount required for each installment to

accumulate a total of $10,000 in 5 years at an annual interest
rate of 6%, compounded semiannually.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment, “Norm1” for Display, and then
P.6 press J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

f*bcw(Input n = 5 × 12.)
gw(I = 6.0%)
aw(PV = 0)
c
baaaaw(FV = 10,000)
bcw(Monthly installments)
cw(Semiannual compounding)
4(PMT)

333
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 3 Compound Interest Calculations

uNumber of installments

Example Calculate the number of monthly $84 installments required to

accumulate a total of $6,000 at an annual interest rate of 6%,
compounded annually.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment and then press J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

c
gw
aw(PV = 0)
-iew(PMT = –84)
gaaaw(FV = 6,000)
bcw(Monthly installments)
bw(Annual compounding)
1(n)

uInterest rate

Example Calculate the annual interest rate required to accumulate a

total of $10,000 in 10 years with $60 monthly installments.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment and then press J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

ba*bcw(Input n = 10 × 12.)
c
aw(PV = 0)
-gaw(PMT = –60)
baaaaw(FV = 10,000)
bcw(Monthly installments)
bw(Annual compounding)
2(I%)

uPrincipal plus interest with initial deposit

Example Calculate the principal plus interest after one year for an
installment savings account with an interest rate of 4.5%,
compounded monthly, opened with an initial deposit of $1,000,
with $500 installments added each month.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment and then press J.

334
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Compound Interest Calculations 19 - 3
Perform the following key operations from the input screen.
b*bcw(Input n = 1 × 12.)
e.fw
-baaaw(PV = –1,000)
-faaw(PMT = –500)
c
bcw(Monthly installments)
(Monthly compounding)
5(FV)

uBorrowing power

Example Calculate how much can be borrowed on a 15-year loan at a

7.5% annual interest rate, compounded monthly, if a payment
of $450 per month can be made.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment and then press J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

bf*bcw(Input n = 15 × 12.)
h.fw
c
-efaw(PMT = –450)
aw(FV = 0)
bcw(Monthly installments)
(Monthly compounding)
3(PV)

uLoan installments

Example Calculate the size of the monthly installment for a 25-year

$300,000 home loan made at 6.2%, compounded semiannually.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment and then press J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

cf*bcw(Input n = 25 × 12.)
g.cw
daaaaaw(PV = 300,000)
c
aw(FV = 0)
bcw(Monthly installments)
cw(Semiannual compounding)
4(PMT)

335
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 3 Compound Interest Calculations

uNumber of installments

Example Calculate the number of years it will take to repay a $60,000

loan borrowed at 5.5%, compounded monthly, with monthly
installments of $840.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment and then press J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

c
f.fw
gaaaaw(PV = 60,000)
-ieaw(PMT = –840)
aw(FV = 0)
bcw(Monthly installments)
(Monthly compounding)
1(n)

uEffective interest rate

Example Calculate (to two decimal places) the effective interest rate
compounded monthly, on a 25-year $65,000 loan repaid with
$460 monthly installments.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment, “Fix2” for Display, and then press
P.6 J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

cf*bcw(Input n = 25 × 12.)
c
gfaaaw(PV = 65,000)
-egaw(PMT = –460)
aw(FV = 0)
bcw(Monthly installments)
(Monthly compounding)
2(I%)

336
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19-4 Investment Appraisal
This calculator uses the discounted cash flow (DCF) method to perform invest-
ment appraisal by totalling cash flow for a fixed period. This calculator can perform
the following four types of investment appraisal.
• Net present value (NPV)
• Net future value (NFV)
• Internal rate of return (IRR)
• Pay back period (PBP)

A cash flow diagram like the one shown below helps to visualize the movement of
funds.
CF5 CF7
CF2 CF3 CF4 CF6

CF1
CF0

With this graph, the initial investment amount is represented by CF0. The cash
flow one year later is shown by CF1, two years later by CF2, and so on.
Investment appraisal can be used to clearly determine whether an investment is
realizing profits that were originally targeted.

uNPV
CF1 CF2 CF3 CFn
NPV = CF0 + + + +…+
(1 + i) (1 + i) (1 + i)
2 3
(1 + i)n
I
n: natural number up to 254 i=
100
uNFV

NFV = NPV × (1 + i )n

uIRR
CF1 CF2 CF3 CFn
0 = CF0 + + + +…+
(1+ i) (1+ i) (1+ i)
2 3
(1+ i)n

In this formula, NPV = 0, and the value of IRR is equivalent to i × 100. It should be
noted, however, that minute fractional values tend to accumulate during the
subsequent calculations performed automatically by the calculator, so NPV never
actually reaches exactly zero. IRR becomes more accurate the closer that NPV
approaches to zero.

337
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 4 Investment Appraisal

uPBP
PBP is the value of n when NPV > 0 (when investment can be recovered).

Press 3 (CASH) from the initial screen 1 to display the following input screen for
investment appraisal.

I% ................... interest rate

Csh ................. list for cash flow

•{NPV}/{IRR}/{PBP}/{NFV} ... {net present value}/{internal rate of return}/

{pay back period}/{net future value}
•{LIST} ... {specifies a list for cash flow}

Example An investment of $86,000 in machinery projects the annual

revenues shown in the table below (all revenues realized at the
end of the fiscal year). What is the net profit or loss of this
investment if the useful service life of the machine is six years,
the resale value after six years is $14,000, and the capital cost
is 11%?
Year Revenues
1 –5,000
2 42,000
3 31,000
4 24,000
5 23,000
6 12,000 + 14,000

On the Main Menu, select the LIST icon to enter the LIST Mode and perform the
following key operations.
e(List 2)
-igaaaw
-faaaw
ecaaaw
dbaaaw
ceaaaw
cdaaaw
bcaaa+beaaaw

Return to the Main Menu by pressing m. Select the TVM icon to enter the
Financial Mode, and then press 3 (CASH).

338
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Investment Appraisal 19 - 4
Perform the following key operations from the input screen.
bbw(I% = 11)
6(List)2(List2)
1(NPV)

Now you can press 6 to draw a cash flow graph.

6(GRPH)

Pressing !1 (TRCE) activates trace, which can be used to look up the

following values.
!6(G↔T)
4(NFV)

1(REPT)
3(PBP)

Example An investment of $10,000 in machinery projects the annual

revenues shown in the table below (all revenues realized at the
end of the fiscal year). What is the internal rate of return of this
investment if the useful service life of the machinery is five
years and the resale value after five years is $3,000?
Year Revenues
1 2,000
2 2,400
3 2,200
4 2,000
5 1,800 + 3,000

339
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 4 Investment Appraisal

On the Main Menu, select the LIST icon to enter the LIST Mode and perform the
following key operations.
ee(List 3)
-baaaaw
caaaw
ceaaw
ccaaw
caaaw
biaa+daaaw

Return to the Main Menu by pressing m. Select the TVM icon to enter the
Financial Mode, and then press 3 (CASH).

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

c
6(List)3(List 3)
2(IRR)

Now you can press 6 to draw a cash flow graph.

6(GRPH)

340
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Investment Appraisal 19 - 4

19-5 Amortization of a Loan

This calculator can be used to calculate the principal and interest portion of a
monthly installment, the remaining principal, and amount of principal and interest
repaid up to any point.

Amount of single payment

e a

c
b

d
1 2 m n
(Number of payments)

a: Interest portion of installment PM1 (INT)

b: Principal portion of installment PM1 (PRN)
c: Balance of principal after installment PM2 (BAL)
d: Total principal from installment PM1 to payment of installment PM2 (ΣPRN)
e: Total interest from installment PM1 to payment of installment PM2 (ΣINT)
* a + b = one repayment (PMT)

a : INTPM1 = I BALPM1–1 × i I × (PMT sign)

b : PRNPM1 = PMT + BALPM1–1 × i
c : BALPM2 = BALPM2–1 + PRNPM2
d : Σ PRN = PRNPM1 + PRNPM1+1 + … + PRNPM2
PM2

PM1

e : Σ INT = INTPM1 + INTPM1+1 + … + INTPM2

PM2

PM1

BAL0 = PV (INT1 = 0 and PRN1 = PMT at beginning of installment term)

uConverting between the nominal interest rate and effective interest

rate
The nominal interest rate (I% value input by user) is converted to an effective
interest rate (I%') for installment loans where the number of installments per year
is different from the number of compound interest calculation periods.

{ }
[C / Y ]
I% [P / Y ]
I%' = (1 + ) –1 ×100
100 × [C / Y ]

341
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 5 Amortization of a Loan

The following calculation is performed after conversion from the nominal interest
rate to the effective interest rate, and the result is used for all subsequent
calculations.

i = I%'÷100

Press 4 (AMT) from the initial screen 1 to display the following input screen for
amortization.

PM1 ................ first installment of installments 1 through n

PM2 ................ second installment of installments 1 through n
n ..................... installments
I% ................... interest rate
PV .................. principal
PMT ............... payment for each installment
FV .................. balance following final installment
P/Y .................. installments per year
C/Y ................. compoundings per year

• {BAL} ... {balance of principal after installment PM2}

• {INT}/{PRN} ... {interest}/{principal} portion of installment PM1
• {ΣINT}/{ΣPRN} ... {total principal}/{total interest} from installment PM1 to
payment of installment PM2

Example Calculate the monthly installment due on a $140,000 15-year

home mortgage at an annual rate of 6.5%, compounded
semiannually.
Also calculate PRN and INT for the second year (24th
installment), BAL for installment 49, and ΣINT, ΣPRN for
installments 24 through 49.

Display the TVM Menu and then press 2(CMPD).

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “End” for Payment and then press J.

342
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Amortization of a Loan 19 - 5
Perform the following key operations from the input screen.
bf*bcw (Input n = 15 × 12.)
g.fw
beaaaaw (PV = 140,000)
c
aw (FV = 0)
bcw(Monthly installments)
cw(Semiannual compounding)
4(PMT)

Pressing 4(AMT) displays the amortization input screen.

Input 24 for PM1 and 49 for PM2.

cewejw

Calculate PRN.
3(PRN)

1(REPT)
2(INT)

1(REPT)
1(BAL)

343
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 5 Amortization of a Loan

Calculate ΣINT from installment 24 to 49.

1 (REPT)
4 (ΣINT)

Calculate ΣPRN.
1 (REPT)
5 (ΣPRN)

Now you can press 6 to draw a cash flow graph.

6(GRPH)

• Trace can be activated following the calculation. Pressing e displays INT and
PRN when n = 1. Each subsequent press of e displays INT and PRN for n =
2, n = 3, and so on.

344
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19-6 Conversion between Percentage Interest
Rate and Effective Interest Rate
Press 5 (CNVT) in the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen
for interest rate conversion.

n ...................... number of compoundings

I% ................... interest rate

'EFF}/{'
• {' 'APR} ... {annual percentage rate to effective interest rate}/{effective
interest rate to annual percentage rate} conversion

k Converting the Annual Percentage Rate (APR) to the

Effective Interest Rate (EFF)
n
APR/100
EFF = 1 + –1 × 100
n

Example Calculate (to two decimal places) the effective interest rate for
an account paying an interest rate of 12%, compounded
quarterly.

P.6 In the set up screen, specify “Fix2” for Display and then press J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

ew(n = 4)
bcw(I% = 12%)
1('EFF)

• The obtained value is assigned to I%.

k Converting the Effective Interest Rate (EFF) to the Annual

Percentage Rate (APR)
1
EFF n
APR = 1+ –1 × n ×100
100

345
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 6 Conversion between Percentage Interest Rate and Effective Interest Rate

Example Calculate the annual percentage rate for an account paying an

effective interest rate of 12.55%, compounded quarterly.

P.6 In the set up screen, specify “Norm1” for Display and then press J.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

ew (n = 4)
bc.ffw(I% = 12.55%)
2 ('APR)

• The obtained value is assigned to I%.

346
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19-7 Cost, Selling Price, Margin Calculations
Cost, selling price, or margin can be calculated by inputting the other two values.

MAR
CST = SEL 1–
100
SEL = CST
MAR
1–
100
CST
MAR(%) = 1– ×100
SEL

Press 1 (COST) from the initial screen 2 to display the following input screen.

Cst .................. cost

Sel .................. selling price
Mrg ................. margin

• {COST}/{SEL}/{MRG} ... calculates {cost}/{selling price}/{margin}

k Cost

Example Calculate the cost for a selling price of $2,000 and a margin of
15%.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

c
caaaw(Sel = 2,000)
bfw(Mrg = 15)
1(COST)

347
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 7 Cost, Selling Price, Margin Calculations

k Selling Price

Example Calculate the selling price for a cost of $1,200 and a margin of
45%.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

bcaaw(Cst = 1,200)
c
efw(Mrg = 45)
2(SEL)

k Margin

Example Calculate the margin for a selling price of $2,500 and a cost of
$1,250.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

bcfaw(Cst = 1,250)
cfaaw(Sel = 2,500)
3(MRG)

348
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19-8 Day/Date Calculations
You can calculate the number of days between two dates, or you can determine
what date comes a specific number of days before or after another date.

Press 2 (DAYS) from the initial screen 2 to display the following input screen for
day/date calculation.

d1 ................... date 1
d2 ................... date 2
D ..................... number of days

• {PRD} ... {calculates number of dates between two dates (d2 – d1)}
• {d1+D}/{d1–D} ... Calculates {future date/previous date}

• The set up screen can be used to specify either a 365-day or 360-day year
for financial calculations. Day/date calculations are also performed in
accordance with the current setting for number of days in the year, but the
following calculations cannot be performed when the 360-day year is set.
Attempting to do so causes an error.
(Date) + (Number of Days)
(Date) – (Number of Days)
• The allowable calculation range is January 1, 1901 to December 31, 2099.

The format for inputting a date is: <month> . <day> <year>

Two digits must always be input for the day, so a leading zero must be input for
days 1 through 9.

Example January 2, 1990

b.acbjja
December 31, 2099
bc.dbcajj

Example Calculate the number of days from August 8, 1967 to July 15,
1970, using a 365-day year.

P.7 In the set up screen, specify “365” for Date Mode and then press J.

349
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 19 - 8 Day/Date Calculations

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

i.aibjghw
(d1 = August 8, 1967)
h.bfbjhaw
(d2 = July 15,1970)
1(PRD)
Prd .................. number of days

Example Determine the date that is 1,000 days after June 1, 1997.
Note that the attempting to perform the following calculation while
the 360-day year is in effect causes an error.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

g.abbjjhw
(d1 = June 1, 1997)
c(d2 = Any date)
baaaw
2(d1+D)
d+D ................. future date calculation February 26, 2000

Example To determine the date that is 1,000 days before January 1,

2001, using a 365-day year.
Note that the attempting to perform the following calculation while
the 360-day year is in effect causes an error.

Perform the following key operations from the input screen.

b.abcaabw
(d1 = January 1, 2001)
c(d2 = Any date)
baaaw
3(d1–D)
d–D ................. previous date calculation April 7, 1998

350
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Programming
20-1 Before Programming
20-2 Programming Examples
20-3 Debugging a Program

20
20-4 Calculating the Number of Bytes Used by a Program
20-5 Secret Function
20-6 Searching for a File
20-7 Searching for Data Inside a Program
20-8 Editing File Names and Program Contents
20-9 Deleting a Program
20-10 Useful Program Commands
20-11 Command Reference
20-12 Text Display
20-13 Using Calculator Functions in Programs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 20-1 Before Programming
The programming function helps to make complex, often-repeated calculations
quick and easy. Commands and calculations are executed sequentially, just like
the manual calculation multistatements. Multiple programs can be stored under file
names for easy recall and editing.

File Name
File Name File Name

Program
Program Program

Select the PRGM icon in the Main Menu and enter the PRGM Mode. When you
do, a program list appears on the display.

Selected memory area

(use f and c to move)

• {EXE}/{EDIT} ... program {execute}/{edit}

• {NEW} ... {new program}
P.368 • {DEL}/{DEL·A} ... {specific program}/{all program} delete
P.362 • {SRC}/{REN} ... file name {search}/{change}
• {LOAD}* ... {loads a built-in Program Library program}
CFX
* See the separate Software Library Manual for details (except fx-
9750G PLUS, CFX-9850G PLUS).
* The following models do not support the LOAD command: fx-9750G
PLUS, CFX-9850G PLUS.

• If there are not programs stored in memory when you enter the PRGM Mode,
the message “No Programs” appears on the display and only the NEW item
(3) is shown in the function menu.
The values to the right of the program list indicate the number of bytes used up
by each program.

352
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-2 Programming Examples

Example 1 To calculate the surface area and volume of three regular

octahedrons of the dimensions shown in the table below
Store the calculation formula under the file name OCTA.

Length of One Side (A) Surface Area (S) Volume (V)

7 cm cm2 cm3

10 cm cm2 cm3
A
15 cm cm2 cm3

The following are the formulas used for calculating surface area S and volume V
of a regular octahedron for which the length of one side is known.

2
S = 2 3 A2, V = –––– A3
3
When inputting a new formula, you first register the file name and then input the
actual program.

uTo register a file name

Example To register the file name OCTA

• Note that a file name can be up to eight characters long.

1. Display the program list menu and press 3 (NEW) to display a menu, which
contains the following items.
• {RUN}/{BASE} ... {general calculation}/{number base} program input
P.360 • {Q
Q} ... {password registration}
• {SYBL} ... {symbol menu}

2. Input the name of the file.

OCTA

• The cursor changes form to indicate alpha character input.

• The following are the characters you can use in a file name:
A through Z, r, θ, spaces, [, ], {, }, ’, ”, ~, 0 through 9, ., +, –, ×, ÷
• Note, however, that v and . cannot be input for the name of a program
that contains binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal calculations.

353
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20 - 2 Programming Examples

• Use 1 (RUN) to input a program for general calculations (a program to be

executed in the COMP Mode). For programs that involve number system
specifications, use 2 (BASE). Note that programs input after pressing 2
(BASE) are indicated by B to the right of the file name.
• Pressing 6 (SYBL) displays a menu of symbols ( ’, ”, ~ ) that can be input.
• You can delete a character while inputting a file name by moving the cursor to
the character you want to delete and pressing D.

3. Press w to register the file name and change to the program input screen.
File name

• Registering a file name uses 17 bytes of memory.

• The file name input screen remains on the display if you press w without
inputting a file name.
• To exit the file name input screen and return to the program list without
registering a file name, press J.
• When you register the name of a program that contains binary, octal, decimal,
or hexadecimal calculations, the indicator B is appended to the right of the file
name.

uTo input a program

The following items are included in the function menu of the program input screen,
which is used for program input.
P.365 • {TOP}/{BTM} ... {top}/{bottom} of program
P.364 • {SRC} ... {search}
• {MENU} ... {mode menu}
• {SYBL} ... {symbol menu}

uTo change modes in a program

• Pressing 4 (MENU) while the program input screen is on the display causes
a mode change menu to appear. You can use this menu to input mode
changes into your programs.
• {STAT}/{MAT}/{LIST}/{GRPH}/{DYNA}/{TABL}/{RECR}

P.3 For details on each of these modes, see “To select an icon”, as well as the
sections of this manual that describe what you can do in each mode.

• The following menu appears whenever you press 4 (MENU) while inputting a
program that involves number base specifications.
• {d ~ o}/{LOG}

354
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Programming Examples 20- 2
• Pressing 6 (SYBL) displays a menu of symbols ( ’, ”, ~, *, /, # ) that can be
input into a program.

• Pressing ! Z displays a menu of commands that can be used to change

set up screen settings inside a program.
• {ANGL}/{COOR}/{GRID}/{AXES}/{LABL}/{DISP}/{P/L }/{DRAW}/{DERV}/
{BACK}/{FUNC}/{SIML}/{S-WIN}/{LIST}/{LOCS }/{T-VAR}/{ΣDSP}/{RESID}

P.5 For details on each of these commands, see “Set Up Screen Function Key
Menus”.

The following function key menu appears if you press !Z while inputting a
program that contains binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal calculation.
• {Dec}/{Hex}/{Bin}/{Oct}

Actual program contents are identical to manual calculations. The following shows
how the calculation of the surface area and volume of a regular octahedron would
be calculated using a manual calculation.
Surface Area S .. c*!9d* <value of A> xw
Volume V ........... !9c/d* <value of A> Mdw

You could also perform this calculation by assigning the value for the length of one
side to variable A.
Length of One Side A
............ <value of A> aaAw
Surface Area S .. c*!9d*aAxw
Volume V ........... !9c/d*aAMdw

If you simply input the manual calculations shown above however, the calculator
would execute them from beginning to end, without stopping. The following
commands make it possible to interrupt a calculation for input of values and
display of intermediate results.

? : This command pauses program execution and displays a question mark as a

prompt for input of a value to assign to a variable. The syntax for this com-
mand is: ? → <variable name>.
^ : This command pauses program execution and displays the last calculation
result obtained or text. It is similar to pressing w in a manual calculation.

P.369 • For full details on using these and other commands, see “Useful Program
Commands”.

355
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 2 Programming Examples

The following shows examples of how to actually use the ? and ^ commands.
!W4(?)aaA6(g)5(:)
c*!9d*aAx
6(g)5(^)
!9c/d*aAMd

!Q or JJ

uTo run a program

1. While the program list is on the display, use f and c to highlight the name
of the program you want to run.

2. Press 1 (EXE) or w to run the program.

Let’s try running the program we input above.

Length of One Side (A) Surface Area (S) Volume (V)

7 cm 169.7409791 cm2 161.6917506 cm3

10 cm 346.4101615 cm2 471.4045208 cm3

15 cm 779.4228634 cm2 1590.990258 cm3

1 (EXE) or w

hw
(Value of A)

Intermediate result produced by ^

ww

baw

356
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Programming Examples 20- 2
w

·· ··
··· ···
· ·
• Pressing w while the program’s final result is on the display re-executes the
program.
P.378 • You can also run a program while in the RUN Mode by inputting:
Prog ”<file name>” w.
• An error occurs if the program specified by Prog ”<file name>” cannot be
found.

357
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-3 Debugging a Program
A problem in a program that keeps the program from running correctly is called a
“bug,” and the process of eliminating such problems is called “debugging.” Either
of the following symptoms indicates that your program contains bugs and that
debugging is required.

• Error messages appearing when the program is run

• Results that are not within your expectations

uTo eliminate bugs that cause error messages

An error message, like the one shown below, appears whenever something illegal
occurs during program execution.

When such a message appears, press d or e to display the location where the
P.436 error was generated, along with the cursor. Check the “Error Message Table” for
steps you should take to correct the situation.
P.360 • Note that pressing d or e will not display the location of the error if the
program is password protected.

uTo eliminate bugs that cause bad results

If your program produces results that are not what you normally expect, check the
P.365 contents of the program and make necessary changes. See “Editing File Names
and Program Contents” for details on how to change program contents.

358
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-4 Calculating the Number of Bytes Used by a
Program
There are two types of commands: 1-byte* commands and 2-byte* commands.
* A byte is a unit of memory that can be used for storage of data.

• Examples of 1-byte commands: sin, cos, tan, log, (, ), A, B, C, 1, 2, etc.

• Examples of 2-byte commands: Lbl 1, Goto 2, etc.

While the cursor is located inside of a program, each press of d or e causes

the cursor to move one byte.

• You can check how much memory has been used and how much remains at
any time by selecting the MEM icon in the Main Menu and entering the MEM
P.24 Mode. See “Memory Status (MEM)” for details.

359
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-5 Secret Function
When inputting a program, you can protect it with a password that limits access to
the program contents to those who know the password. Password protected
programs can be executed by anyone without inputting the password.

uTo register a password

Example To create a program file under the name AREA and protect it
with the password CASIO

1. While the program list is on the display, press 3 (NEW) and input the file
name of the new program file.
3(NEW)
AREA

2. Press 5 (Q) and then input the password.

5(Q)
CASIO

P.353 • The password input procedure is identical to that used for file name input.

3. Press w to register the file name and password. Now you can input the
contents of the program file.
• Registration of a password uses 16 bytes of memory.
• Pressing w without inputting a password registers the file name only, without
a password.

4. After inputting the program, press ! Q to exit the program file and return
to the program list. Files that are password protected are indicated by an
asterisk to the right of the file name.

uTo recall a program

Example To recall the file named AREA which is protected by the

password CASIO

1. In the program list, use f and c to move the highlighting to the name of the
program you want to recall.

360
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Secret Function 20- 5
2. Press 2 (EDIT).

3. Input the password and press w to recall the program.

• The message “Mismatch” appears if you input the wrong password.

361
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-6 Searching for a File
There are three different methods for searching for a specific file name.

uTo find a file using scroll search

Example To use scroll search to recall the program named OCTA

1. While the program list is on the display, use

f and c to scroll through the list of
program names until you find the one you
want.

1 2 3 4 5 6

2. When the highlighting is located at the name

of the file you want, press 2 (EDIT) to
recall it.

uTo find a file using file name search

Example To use file name search to recall the program named OCTA

1. While the program list is on the display, press 3 (NEW) and input the name of
the file you want to find.
P.360 • If the file you are looking for is password protected, you should also input the
password.
3(NEW)
OCTA

2. Press w to recall the program.

• If there is no program whose file name matches the one you input, a new file is
created using the input name.

uTo find a file using initial character search

Example To use initial character search to recall the program named

OCTA

1. While the program list is on the display, press 6 (g) 1 (SRC) and input the
initial characters of the file you want to find.
6(g)1(SRC)
OCT

362
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Searching for a File 20- 6
2. Press w to search.

• All files whose file names start with the characters you input are recalled.
• If there is no program whose file name starts with the characters you input, the
message “Not Found” appears on the display. If this happens, press J to
clear the error message.

3. Use f and c to highlight the file name of the program you want to recall
and then press 2 (EDIT) to recall it.

363
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-7 Searching for Data Inside a Program
Example To search for the letter “A” inside the program named OCTA

1. Recall the program.

2. Press 3 (SRC) and input the data you want to search for.

3(SRC)
aA

• You cannot specify the newline symbol (_) or display command (^) for the
search data.

3. Press w to begin the search. The contents of the program appear on the
screen with the cursor located at the first instance of the data you specified.

Indicates search operation is in progress

4. Press w to find the next instance of the data.

• If there is no match inside the program for the data you specified, the contents
of the program appear with the cursor located at the point from which you
started your search.
• Once the contents of the program are on the screen, you can use the cursor
keys to move the cursor to another location before searching for the next
instance of the data. Only the part of the program starting from the current
cursor location is searched when you press w.
• Once the search finds an instance of your data, inputting characters or moving
the cursor causes the search operation to be cancelled (clearing the Search
indicator from the display).
• If you make a mistake while inputting characters to search for, press A to
clear your input and re-input from the beginning.

364
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-8 Editing File Names and Program Contents
uTo edit a file name

Example To change the name of a file from TRIANGLE to ANGLE

1. While the program list is on the display, use f and c to move the highlight-
ing to the file whose name you want to edit and then press 6 (g) 2 (REN).

2. Make any changes you want.

DDD

3. Press w to register the new name and return to the program list.
• If the modifications you make result in a file name that is identical to the name
of a program already stored in memory, the message “Already Exists”
appears. When this happens, you can perform either of the following two
operations to correct the situation.
• Press e or d to clear the error and return to the file name input screen.
• Press A to clear the new file name and input a new one.

uTo edit program contents

1. Find the file name of the program you want in the program list.

2. Recall the program.

• The procedures you use for editing program contents are identical to those
P.20 used for editing manual calculations. For details, see “Editing Calculations”.
• The following function keys are also useful when editing program contents.

1 (TOP) ....... Moves the cursor to the top

of the program

2 (BTM) ....... Moves the cursor to the

bottom of the program

P.353 Example 2 To use the OCTA program to create a program that calculates
the surface area and volume of regular tetrahedrons when the
length of one side is known

365
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20 - 8 Editing File Names and Program Contents

Use TETRA as the file name.

Length of One Side (A) Surface Area (S) Volume (V)

A
7 cm cm2 cm3

10 cm cm2 cm3

15 cm cm2 cm3

The following are the formulas used for calculating surface area S and volume V
of a regular tetrahedron for which the length of one side is known.
2
S = 3 A2, V = –––– A3
12
Use the following key operations when inputting the program.

Length of One Side A .. !W4(?)aaA6(g)5(:)

Surface Area S ............ !9d*aAx6(g)5(^)
Volume V ..................... !9c/bc*aAMd

Compare this with the program for calculating the surface area and volume of a
regular octahedron.

Length of One Side A .. !W4(?)aaA6(g)5(:)

Surface Area S ............ c*!9d*aAx6(g)5(^)
Volume V ..................... !9c/d*aAMd

As you can see, you can produce the TETRA program by making the following
changes in the OCTA program.
• Deleting c * (underlined using a wavy line above)
• Changing d to b c (underlined using a solid line above)

Let’s edit OCTA to produce the TETRA program.

1. Edit the program name.

6(g)2(REN)TETRA

2. Edit the program contents.

2(EDIT)

eeeeDD

366
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Editing File Names and Program Contents 20- 8
cd![bc

!Q

Let’s try running the program.

Length of One Side (A) Surface Area (S) Volume (V)

7 cm 84.87048957 cm2 40.42293766 cm3

10 cm 173.2050808 cm2 117.8511302 cm3

15 cm 389.7114317 cm2 397.7475644 cm3

1 (EXE) or w

hw
(Value of A)

ww

baw

··· ···
·· ··
· ·

367
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-9 Deleting a Program
There are two methods for deletion of a file name and its program.

uTo delete a specific program

1. While the program list is on the display, use f and c to move the highlight-
ing to the name of the program you want to delete.

2. Press 4 (DEL).

3. Press 1 (YES) to delete the selected program or 6 (NO) to abort the

operation without deleting anything.

uTo delete all programs

1. While the program list is on the display, press 5 (DEL·A).

2. Press 1 (YES) to delete all the programs in the list or 6 (NO) to abort the
operation without deleting anything.
P.26 • You can also delete all programs using the MEM Mode. See “Clearing Memory
Contents” for details.

368
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-10 Useful Program Commands

In addition to calculation commands, this calculator also includes a variety of

relational and jump commands that can be used to create programs that make
repeat calculations quick and easy.

Program Menu
Press ! W to display the program menu.
• {COM}/{CTL}/{JUMP}/{CLR}/{DISP}/{REL}/{I/O}
• {?} ... {input command}
• {^} ... {output command}
• { : } ... {multi-statement command}

k COM (program command menu)

Selecting {COM} from the program menu displays the following function menu
items.
• {If}/{Then}/{Else}/{I-End}/{For}/{To}/{Step}/{Next}/{Whle}/{WEnd}/{Do}/{Lp-W}
... {If}/{Then}/{Else}/{IfEnd}/{For}/{To}/{Step}/{Next}/{While}/{WhileEnd}/{Do}/
{LpWhile} command

k CTL (program control command menu)

Selecting {CTL} from the program menu displays the following function menu
items.
• {Prog}/{Rtrn}/{Brk}/{Stop} ... {Prog}/{Return}/{Break}/{Stop} command

k JUMP (jump command menu)

Selecting {JUMP} from the program menu displays the following function menu
items.
• {Lbl}/{Goto} ... {Lbl}/{Goto} command
• {⇒} ... {jump command}
• {Isz}/{Dsz} ... {jump and increment}/{jump and decrement}

k CLR (clear command menu)

Selecting {CLR} from the program menu displays the following function menu
items.
• {Text}/{Grph}/{List} ... clears {text}/{graph}/{list}

369
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 10 Useful Program Commands

k DISP (display command menu)

Selecting {DISP} from the program menu displays the following function menu
items.
u {Stat}/{Grph}/{Dyna} ... {statistical graph}/{graph}/{Dynamic Graph} draw

u {F-Tbl} ... {Table & Graph command menu}

The following are the items that appear in the above menu.
• {Tabl}/{G-Con}/{G-Plt} ... {DispF-Tbl}/{DrawFTG-Con}/{DrawFTG-Plt}
command

u {R-Tbl} ... {recursion calculation and recursion fomula}

The following are the items that appear in the above menu.
• {Tabl}/{Web}/{an-Cn}/{Σa-Cn}/{an-Pl}/{Σa-Pl} ... {DispR-Tbl}/{DrawWeb}/
{DrawR-Con}/{DrawRΣ-Con}/{DrawR-Plt}/{DrawRΣ-Plt} command

k REL (conditional jump relational operator commands)

Selecting {REL} from the program menu displays the following function menu
items.
G}/{>}/{<}/{ ≥ }/{ ≤ } ... {=}/{G}/{>}/{<}/{≥}/{≤} relational operators
• {=}/{G

k I/O (input/output commands)

Selecting {I/O} from the program menu displays the following function menu items.
• {Lcte}/{Gtky}/{Send}/{Recv} ... {Locate}/{Getkey}/{Send(}/{Receive(} command

• The appearance of the function menu differs slightly for a program that
contains binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal calculation, but the functions in
the menu are the same.

370
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-11 Command Reference
k Command Index
Break ..................................................................................... 378
ClrGraph ................................................................................ 382
ClrList .................................................................................... 382
ClrText ................................................................................... 382
DispF-Tbl, DispR-Tbl ............................................................. 383
Do~LpWhile ........................................................................... 377
DrawDyna ............................................................................. 383
DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt ................................................ 383
DrawGraph ............................................................................ 383
DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt ......................................................... 384
DrawRΣ-Con, DrawRΣ-Plt ..................................................... 384
DrawStat ............................................................................... 384
DrawWeb ............................................................................... 384
Dsz ........................................................................................ 380
For~To~Next ......................................................................... 375
For~To~Step~Next ................................................................ 376
Getkey ................................................................................... 385
Goto~Lbl ................................................................................ 380
If~Then .................................................................................. 373
If~Then~Else ......................................................................... 374
If~Then~Else~IfEnd .............................................................. 375
If~Then~IfEnd ....................................................................... 374
Isz .......................................................................................... 381
Locate ................................................................................... 385
Prog ....................................................................................... 378
Receive ( ............................................................................... 386
Return ................................................................................... 379
Send ( .................................................................................... 387
Stop ....................................................................................... 379
While~WhileEnd .................................................................... 377
? (Input Command) ............................................................... 372
^ (Output Command) ........................................................... 372
: (Multi-statement Command) ................................................ 373
_ (Carriage Return) ............................................................. 373
⇒ (Jump Code) ..................................................................... 381
=, G, >, <, ≥, ≤ (Relational Operators) ................................... 387

371
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 11 Command Reference

The following are conventions that are used in this section when describing the
various commands.
Boldface Text ............. Actual commands and other items that always must be
input are shown in boldface.
{Curly Brackets} ......... Curly brackets are used to enclose a number of items,
one of which must be selected when using a command.
Do not input the curly brackets when inputting a com-
mand.
[Square Brackets] ...... Square brackets are used to enclose items that are
optional. Do not input the square brackets when inputting
a command.
Numeric Expressions . Numeric expressions (such as 10, 10 + 20, A) indicate
constants, calculations, numeric constants, etc.
Alpha Characters ....... Alpha characters indicate literal strings (such as AB).

k Basic Operation Commands

? (Input Command)

Function: Prompts for input of values for assignment to variables during program
execution.
Syntax: ? → <variable name>
Example: ? → A _
Description:
1. This command momentarily interrupts program execution and prompts for input
of a value or expression for assignment to a variable. When the input com-
mand is executed, “?” to appears on the display and the calculator stands by
for input.

2. Input in response to the input command must be a value or an expression, and

the expression cannot be a multi-statement.

^ (Output Command)

Function: Displays and intermediate result during program execution.

Description:
1. This command momentarily interrupts program execution and displays alpha
character text or the result of the calculation immediately before it.

2. The output command should be used at locations where you would normally
press the w key during a manual calculation.

372
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Command Reference 20- 11

: (Multi-statement Command)

Function: Connects two statements for sequential execution without stopping.

Description:
1. Unlike the output command (^), statements connected with the multi-
statement command are executed non-stop.

2. The multi-statement command can be used to link two calculation expressions

or two commands.

3. You can also use a carriage return indicated by _ in place of the multi-
statement command.

_ (Carriage Return)

Function: Connects two statements for sequential execution without stopping.

Description:
1. Operation of the carriage return is identical to that of the multi-statement
command.

2. Using a carriage return in place of the multi-statement command makes the

displayed program easier to read.

k Program Commands (COM)

If~Then

Function: The Then-statement is executed only when the If-condition is true (non-
zero).
Syntax:
_ _
If <condition> : Then <statement> : <statement>
numeric expression ^ ^

Parameters: condition, numeric expression

Description:
1. The Then-statement is executed only when the If-condition is true (non-zero).

2. If the condition is false (0), the Then-statement is not executed.

3. An If-condition must always be accompanied by a Then-statement. Omitting

the Then-statement results in an error.

Example: If A = 0 _
Then ”A = 0”

373
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 11 Command Reference

If~Then~IfEnd

Function: The Then-statement is executed only when the If-condition is true (non-
zero). The IfEnd-statement is always executed: after the Then-statement is
executed or directly after the If-condition when the If-condition is false (0).
Syntax:
_
If <condition> : Then <statement>
numeric expression ^
_ _
: <statement> : IfEnd
^ ^

Parameters: condition, numeric expression

Description:
This command is almost identical to If~Then. The only difference is that the IfEnd-
statement is always executed, regardless of whether the If-condition is true (non-
zero) or false (0).

Example: If A = 0 _
Then ”A = 0” _
IfEnd_
”END”

If~Then~Else

Function: The Then-statement is executed only when the If-condition is true (non-
zero). The Else-statement is executed when the If-condition is false (0).
Syntax:
_ _
If <condition> : Then <statement> : <statement>
numeric expression ^ ^

_ _
: Else <statement> : <statement>
^ ^
Parameters: condition, numeric expression
Description:
1. The Then-statement is executed when the If-conditions is true (non-zero).

2. The Else-statement is executed when the If-conditions is false (zero).

Example: If A = 0 _
Then ”TRUE” _
Else ”FALSE”

374
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Command Reference 20- 11

If~Then~Else~IfEnd

Function: The Then-statement is executed only when the If-condition is true

(non-zero). The Else-statement is executed when the If-condition is false (0). The
IfEnd-statement is always executed following either the Then-statement or
Else-statement.
Syntax:
_ _
If <condition> : Then <statement> : <statement>
numeric expression ^ ^

_ _ _
: Else <statement> : <statement> : IfEnd
^ ^ ^

Parameters: condition, numeric expression

Description:
This command is almost identical to If~Then~Else. The only difference is that the
IfEnd-statement is always executed, regardless of whether the If-condition is true
(non-zero) or false (0).

Example: ? → A _
If A = 0 _
Then ”TRUE”_
Else ”FALSE_
IfEnd_
”END”

For~To~Next

Function: This command repeats everything between the For-statement and the
Next-statement. The starting value is assigned to the control variable with the first
execution, and the value of the control variable is incremented by one with each
execution. Execution continues until the value of the control variable exceeds the
ending value.
Syntax:
_
For <starting value> → <control variable name> To <ending value> :
^
_
<statement> : Next
^

375
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 11 Command Reference

Parameters:
• control variable name: A to Z
• starting value: value or expression that produces a value (i.e. sin x, A, etc.)
• ending value: value or expression that produces a value (i.e. sin x, A, etc.)
Description:
1. When the starting value of the control variable is greater than the ending value,
execution continues from the statement following Next, without executing the
statements between For and Next.

2. A For-statement must always have a corresponding Next-statement, and the

Next-statement must always come after its corresponding For-statement.

3. The Next-statement defines the end of the loop created by For~Next, and so it
must always be included. Failure to do so results in an error.

Example: For 1 → A To 10_

A × 3 → B_
B^
Next

For~To~Step~Next

Function: This command repeats everything between the For-statement and the
Next-statement. The starting value is assigned to the control variable with the first
execution, and the value of the control variable is changed according to the step
value with each execution. Execution continues until the value of the control
variable exceeds the ending value.
Syntax:
_
For <starting value> → <control variable name> To <ending value> Step <step value> :
^
Next
Parameters:
• control variable name: A to Z
• starting value: value or expression that produces a value (i.e. sin x, A, etc.)
• ending value: value or expression that produces a value (i.e. sin x, A, etc.)
• step value: numeric value (omitting this value sets the step to 1)
Description:
1. This command is basically identical to For~To~Next. The only difference is that
you can specify the step.

2. Omitting the step value automatically sets the step to 1.

376
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Command Reference 20- 11
3. Making the starting value less than the ending value and specifying a positive
step value causes the control variable to be incremented with each execution.
Making the starting value greater than the ending value and specifying a
negative step value causes the control variable to be decremented with each
execution.

Example: For 1 → A To 10 Step 0.1_

A×3→B_
B^
Next

Do~LpWhile

Function: This command repeats specific commands as long as its condition is

true (non-zero).
Syntax:
_
Do : ~ LpWhile <expression>
^

Parameters: expression
Description:
1. This command repeats the commands contained in the loop as long as its
condition is true (non-zero). When the condition becomes false (0), execution
proceeds from the statement following the LpWhile-statement.

2. Since the condition comes after the LpWhile-statement, the condition is tested
(checked) after all of the commands inside the loop are executed.

Example: Do_
? → A_
A × 2 → B_
B^
LpWhile B >10

While~WhileEnd

Function: This command repeats specific commands as long as its condition is

true (non-zero).
Syntax:
_
While <expression> : ~ WhileEnd
^
Parameters: expression
Description:
1. This command repeats the commands contained in the loop as long as its
condition is true (non-zero). When the condition becomes false (0), execution
proceeds from the statement following the WhileEnd-statement.

377
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 11 Command Reference

2. Since the condition comes after the While-statement, the condition is tested
(checked) before the commands inside the loop are executed.

Example: 10 → A_
While A > 0_
A – 1 → A_
”GOOD”_
WhileEnd

k Program Control Commands (CTL)

Break

Function: This command breaks execution of a loop and continues from the next
command following the loop.
Syntax: Break _
Description:
1. This command breaks execution of a loop and continues from the next
command following the loop.

2. This command can be used to break execution of a For-statement, Do-

statement, and While-statement.

Example: While A>0_

If A > 2_
Then Break_
IfEnd_
WhileEnd_
A ^ ← Executed after Break

Prog

Function: This command specifies execution of another program as a subroutine.

In the RUN Mode, this command executes a new program.
Syntax: Prog ”file name” _

Example: Prog ”ABC” _

Description:
1. Even when this command is located inside of a loop, its execution immediately
breaks the loop and launches the subroutine.

2. This command can be used as many times as necessary inside of a main

routine to call up independent subroutines to perform specific tasks.

3. A subroutine can be used in multiple locations in the same main routine, or it

can be called up by any number of main routines.

378
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Command Reference 20- 11
Main Routine Subroutines

A D

Prog ”D”

Prog ”C” C E I J
Prog ”E” Prog ”I” Prog ”J”

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

4. Calling up a subroutine causes it to be executed from the beginning. After

execution of the subroutine is complete, execution returns to the main routine,
continuing from the statement following the Prog command.

5. A Goto~Lbl command inside of a subroutine is valid inside of that subroutine

only. It cannot be used to jump to a label outside of the subroutine.

6. If a subroutine with the file name specified by the Prog command does not
exist, an error occurs.

7. In the RUN Mode, inputting the Prog command and pressing w launches the
program specified by the command.

Return
Function: This command returns from a subroutine.
Syntax: Return _
Description:
Execution of the Return command inside a main routine causes execution of the
program to stop.

Example: Prog ”A” Prog ”B”

1 → A_ For A → B To 10_
Prog ”B”_ B + 1 → C_
C^ Next_
Return
Executing the program in File A displays the result of the operation
(11).

Stop

Function: This command terminates execution of a program.

Syntax: Stop _
Description:
1. This command terminates program execution.

2. Execution of this command inside of a loop terminates program execution

without an error being generated.

379
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 11 Command Reference

Example: For 2 → I To 10_

If I = 5_
Then ”STOP” : Stop_
IfEnd_
Next
This program counts from 2 to 10. When the count reaches 5, however,
it terminates execution and displays the message “STOP.”

k Jump Commands (JUMP)

Dsz

Function: This command is a count jump that decrements the value of a control
variable by 1, and then jumps if the current value of the variable is zero.
Syntax:
Variable Value G 0
_
Dsz <variable name> : <statement> : <statement>
^
Variable Value = 0

Parameters:
Variable Name: A to Z, r, θ
[Example] Dsz B : Decrements the value assigned to variable B by 1.
Description:
This command decrements the value of a control variable by 1, and then tests
(checks) it. If the current value is non-zero, execution continues with the next
statement. If the current value is zero, execution jumps to the statement following
the multi-statement command (:), display command (^), or carriage return (_).

Example: 10 → A : 0 → C :
Lbl 1 : ? → B : B+C → C :
Dsz A : Goto 1 : C ÷ 10
This program prompts for input of 10 values, and then calculates the
average of the input values.

Goto~Lbl

Function: This command performs an unconditional jump to a specified location.

Syntax: Goto <value or variable> ~ Lbl <value or variable>
Parameters: Value (from 0 to 9), variable (A to Z, r, θ )
Description:
1. This command consists of two parts: Goto n (where n is a value from 0 to 9)
and Lbl n (where n is the value specified for Goto). This command causes
program execution to jump to the Lbl-statement whose value matches that
specified by the Goto-statement.

380
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Command Reference 20- 11
2. This command can be used to loop back to the beginning of a program or to
jump to any location within the program.

3. This command can be used in combination with conditional jumps and count
jumps.

4. If there is no Lbl-statement whose value matches that specified by the Goto-

statement, an error occurs.

Example: ? → A : ? → B : Lbl 1 :
?→ X:A× X+B^
Goto 1

This program calculates y = AX + B for as many values for each

variable that you want to input. To quit execution of this program, press
A.

Isz

Function: This command is a count jump that increments the value of a control
variable by 1, and then jumps if the current value of the variable is zero.
Syntax:
Variable Value G 0
_
Isz <variable name> : <statement> : <statement>
^
Variable Value = 0

Parameters:
Variable Name: A to Z, r, θ
[Example] Isz A : Increments the value assigned to variable A by 1.
Description:
This command increments the value of a control variable by 1, and then tests
(checks) it. If the current value is non-zero, execution continues with the next
statement. If the current value is zero, execution jumps to the statement following
the multi-statement command (:), display command (^), or carriage return (_).

⇒ (Jump Code)

Function: This code is used to set up conditions for a conditional jump. The jump
is executed whenever the conditions are false.
Syntax:
True
_
<left side> <relational operator> <right side> ⇒ <statement> : <statement>
^
False

381
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 11 Command Reference

Parameters:
left side/right side: variable (A to Z, r, θ), numeric constant, variable expression
(such as: A × 2)
P.387 relational operator: =, G, >, <, ≥, ≤
Description:
1. The conditional jump compares the contents of two variables or the results of
two expressions, and a decision is made whether or not to execute the jump
based on the results of the comparison.
2. If the comparison returns a true result, execution continues with the statement
following the ⇒ command. If the comparison returns a false result, execution
jumps to the statements following the multi-statement command (:), display
command (^), or carriage return (_).

Example: Lbl 1 : ? → A :
A>0⇒ A^
Goto 1

With this program, inputting a value of zero or greater calculates and displays the
square root of the input value. Inputting a value less than zero returns to the input
prompt without calculating anything.

k Clear Commands (CLR)

ClrGraph

Function: This command clears the graph screen.

Syntax: ClrGraph_
Description: This command clears the graph screen during program execution.

ClrList

Function: This command clears list data.

Syntax: ClrList_
Description: This command clears the contents of the currently selected list (List
1 to List 6) during program execution.

ClrText
Function: This command clears the text screen.
Syntax: ClrText_
Description: This command clears text from the screen during program execu-
tion.

382
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Command Reference 20- 11
k Display Commands (DISP)

DispF-Tbl, DispR-Tbl

Function: These commands display numeric tables.

Syntax:
DispF-Tbl_
DispR-Tbl_
Description:
1. These commands generate numeric tables during program execution in
accordance with conditions defined within the program.

2. DispF-Tbl generates a function table, while DispR-Tbl generates a recursion

table.

DrawDyna

Function: This command executes a Dynamic Graph draw operation.

Syntax: DrawDyna_
Description: This command performs a Dynamic Graph draw operation during
program execution in accordance with the drawing conditions defined within the
program.

DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt

Function: These commands graph functions.

Syntax:
DrawFTG-Con_
DrawFTG-Plt_
Description:
1. These commands graph functions in accordance with conditions defined within
the program.

2. DrawFTG-Con produces a connect type graph, while DrawFTG-Plt produces a

plot type graph.

DrawGraph

Function: This command draws a graph.

Syntax: DrawGraph_
Description: This command draws a graph in accordance with the drawing
conditions defined within the program.

383
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 11 Command Reference

DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt

Function: These commands graph recursion expressions, with an(bn) as the

vertical axis and n as the horizontal axis.
Syntax:
DrawR-Con_
DrawR-Plt_
Description:
1. These commands graph recursion expressions, with an(bn) as the vertical axis
and n as the horizontal axis, in accordance with conditions defined within the
program.

2. DrawR-Con produces a connect type graph, while DrawR-Plt produces a plot

type graph.

DrawRΣ-Con, DrawRΣ-Plt

Function: These commands graph recursion expressions, with Σan(Σbn) as the

vertical axis and n as the horizontal axis.
Syntax:
DrawRΣ-Con_
DrawRΣ-Plt_
Description:
1. These commands graph recursion expressions, with Σan(Σbn) as the vertical
axis and n as the horizontal axis, in accordance with conditions defined within
the program.

2. DrawRΣ-Con produces a connect type graph, while DrawRΣ-Plt produces a

plot type graph.

DrawStat
Function: This draws a statistical graph.
Syntax:
DrawStat_
Description:
This command draws a statistical graph in accordance with conditions defined
within the program.

DrawWeb
Function: This command graphs convergence/divergence of a recursion expres-
sion (WEB graph).
Syntax: DrawWeb [name of recursion expression], [number of lines]_
Example: DrawWeb an+1 (bn+1), 5_

384
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Command Reference 20- 11
Description:
1. This command graphs convergence/divergence of a recursion expression
(WEB graph).

2. Omitting the number of lines specification automatically specifies the default

value 30.

k Input/Output Commands (I/O)

Getkey
Function: This command returns the code that corresponds to the last key
pressed.
Syntax: Getkey_
Description:
1. This command returns the code that corresponds to the last key pressed.

79 69 59 49 39 29

78 68 58 48 28
38 27
77 67 57 47 37

76 66 56 46 36 26

75 65 55 45 35 25

74 64 54 44

73 63 53 43 33

72 62 52 42 32

71 61 51 41 31

2. A value of zero is returned if no key was pressed prior to executing this

command.

3. This command can be used inside of a loop.

Locate

Function: This command displays alpha-numeric characters at a specific location

on the text screen.

385
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 11 Command Reference

Syntax:
Locate <column number>, <line number>, <value>
Locate <column number>, <line number>, <variable name>
Locate <column number>, <line number>, ”<string>”
[Example] Locate 1, 1, ”AB”_
Parameters:
• line number: number from 1 to 7
• column number: number from 1 to 21
• value: numeric value
• variable name: A to Z
• string: character string
Description:
1. This command displays values (including variable contents) or text at a specific
location on the text screen.
2. The line is designated by a value from 1 to 7, while the column is designated
by a value from 1 to 21.

(1, 1) → ← (21, 1)

(1, 7) → ← (21, 7)

Example: Cls_
Locate 7, 1, ”CASIO CFX”
This program displays the text “CASIO CFX” in the center of the
screen.
• In some cases, the ClrText command should be executed before running the
above program.

Receive (

Function: This command receives data from an external device.

Syntax: Receive (<data>)
Description:
1. This command receives data from an external device.

2. The following types of data can be received by this command.

• Individual values assigned to variables
• Matrix data (all values - individual values cannot be specified)
• List data (all values - individual values cannot be specified)
• Picture data

386
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Command Reference 20- 11

Send (

Function: This command sends data to an external device.

Syntax: Send (<data>)
Description:
1. This command sends data to an external device.

2. The following types of data can be sent by this command.

• Individual values assigned to variables
• Matrix data (all values - individual values cannot be specified)
• List data (all values - individual values cannot be specified)

k Conditional Jump Relational Operators (REL)

=, G, >, <, ≥, ≤

Function: These relational operators are used in combination with the conditional
jump command.
Syntax:
_
<left side> <relational operator> <right side> ⇒ <statement> : <statement>
^
Parameters:
left side/right side: variable (A to Z, r, θ), numeric constant, variable expression
(such as: A × 2)
relational operator: =, G, >, <, ≥, ≤
Description:
1. The following six relational operators can be used in the conditional jump
command
<left side> = <right side> : true when <left side> equals <right side>
<left side> G <right side> : true when <left side> does not equal <right side>
<left side> > <right side> : true when <left side> is greater than <right side>
<left side> < <right side> : true when <left side> is less than <right side>
<left side> ≥ <right side> : true when <left side> is greater than or equal to <right side>
<left side> ≤ <right side> : true when <left side> is less than or equal to <right side>

P.381 2. See “⇒ (Jump Code)” for details on using the conditional jump.

387
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-12 Text Display
You can include text in a program by simply enclosing it between double quotation
marks. Such text appears on the display during program execution, which means
you can add labels to input prompts and results.

Program Display
?→X ?
”X =” ? → X X=?

• If the text is followed by a calculation formula, be sure to insert a display

command (^), a carridge return (_) or multi-statement command (:) between
the text and calculation.
• Inputting more than 21 characters causes the text to move down to the next
line. The screen scrolls automatically if the text causes the screen to become
full.

388
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20-13 Using Calculator Functions in Programs
k Using Matrix Row Operations in a Program
P.80 These commands let you manipulate the rows of a matrix in a program.
• For this type of program, be sure to use the MAT Mode to input the matrix, and
then switch to the PRGM Mode to input the program.

uTo swap the contents of two rows (Swap)

Example 1 To swap the values of Row 2 and Row 3 in the following matrix:
1 2
Matrix A = 3 4
5 6

The following is the syntax to use for this program.

Swap A, 2, 3

Matrix name
Executing this program produces the following result.
(MAT Mode)

uTo calculate a scalar multiplication (`

`Row)

Example 2 To calculate the product of Row 2 of the matrix in Example 1 and

the scalar 4
The following is the syntax to use for this program.
`Row 4, A, 2
Matrix name
Multiplier

Executing this program produces the following result.

(MAT Mode)

389
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 13 Using Calculator Functions in Programs

uTo calculate a scalar multiplication and add the results to another

row (`
`Row+)

Example 3 To calculate the product of Row 2 of the matrix in Example 1 and

the scalar 4, then add the result to row 3
The following is the syntax to use for this program.
`Row+ 4, A, 2, 3
Matrix name
Multiplier

Executing this program produces the following result.

(MAT Mode)

uTo add two rows (Row+)

Example 4 To add Row 2 to Row 3 of the matrix in Example 1

The following is the syntax to use for this program.

Row+ A, 2, 3

Matrix name

Executing this program produces the following result.

(MAT Mode)

k Using Graph Functions in a Program

P.112 You can incorporate graph functions into a program to draw complex graphs and
to overlay graphs on top of each other. The following shows various types of
syntax you need to use when programming with graph functions.
• View Window
View Window –5, 5, 1, –5, 5, 1_
• Graph function input
Y = Type_ ..... Specifies graph type.
”X2 – 3” → Y1_
• Graph draw operation
DrawGraph_

Example Program
1
ClrGraph_ 1
!W612
2
View Window –10, 10, 2, –120, 150, 50_ 2
!31J

390
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Using Calculator Functions in Programs 20- 13
3
Y = Type_ 3
4431
”X ^ 4 – X ^ 3– 24X + 4X + 80” → Y1_
2 4
J41JJ
4
5
G SelOn 1_ 5
4411J
6
Orange G1_ 6
42
CFX
7
DrawGraph 7
!W622
Executing this program produces the result
shown here.

k Using Dynamic Graph Functions in a Program

P.182 Using Dynamic Graph functions in a program makes it possible to perform
repeated Dynamic Graph operations. The following shows how to specify the
Dynamic Graph range inside a program.

• Dynamic Graph range

1 → D Start_
5 → D End_
1 → D pitch_

Example Program
ClrGraph_
View Window –5, 5, 1, –5, 5, 1_
Y = Type_
”AX + 1” → Y1_ 1
J41JJ
1
2
D SelOn 1_ 2
451
3
D Var A_ 3
3
1→ 4
D Start_ 4
J51
5→ 5
D End_ 5
2
1 → 6 D pitch_ 6
3
7
DrawDyna 7
!W623

Executing this program produces the result

shown here.

↑
↓

391
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 13 Using Calculator Functions in Programs

k Using Table & Graph Functions in a Program

P.206 Table & Graph functions in a program can generate numeric tables and perform
graphing operations. The following shows various types of syntax you need to use
when programming with Table & Graph functions.

• Table range setting

1 → F Start_
5 → F End_
1 → F pitch_
• Numeric table generation
DispF-Tbl_
• Graph draw operation
Connect type: DrawFTG-Con_
Plot type: DrawFTG-Plt_

Example Program
ClrGraph_
ClrText_
View Window 0, 6, 1, –2, 106, 2_
Y = Type_
”3X2 – 2” → Y1_
1
T SelOn 1_ 1
4611
0→ 2
F Start_ 2
J611
6 → 3 F End_ 3
2
1 → 4 F pitch_ 4
3
5
DispF-Tbl^ 5
!W6241
6
DrawFTG-Con 6
!W6242

Executing this program produces the results shown here.

Numeric Table Graph

392
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Using Calculator Functions in Programs 20- 13
k Using Recursion Table & Graph Functions in a Program
P.218 Incorporating Recursion Table & Graph functions in a program lets you generate
numeric tables and perform graphing operations. The following shows various
types of syntax you need to use when programming with Recursion Table & Graph
functions.

• Recursion formula input

an+1 Type_ .... Specifies recursion type.
”3an + 2” → an+1_
”4bn + 6” → bn+1_
• Table range setting
1 → R Start_
5 → R End_
1 → a0_
2 → b0_
1 → an Start_
3 → bn Start_
• Numeric table generation
DispR-Tbl_
• Graph draw operation
Connect type: DrawR-Con_, DrawRΣ-Con_
Plot type: DrawR-Plt_, DrawRΣ-Plt_
• Statistical convergence/divergence graph (WEB graph)
DrawWeb an+1, 10_

Example Program
ClrGraph_
View Window 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1_
1
an+1 Type_ 1
46232J
2
”–3 an2 + 3 an” → an+1_ 2
42
”3 bn – 0.2” → bn+1_
0 → 3 R Start_ 3
J6221
6 → R End_
0.01 → a0_
0.11 → b0_
0.01 → an Start_
0.11 → bn Start_
4
DispR-Tbl^ 4
!W6251
6
5
DrawWeb an+1, 30 5
!W6252JJJ
6
46243

393
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 13 Using Calculator Functions in Programs

Executing this program produces the results shown here.

Numeric Table Recursion graph

k Using List Sort Functions in a Program

P.234 These functions let you sort data in lists into ascending or descending order.

• Ascending order
1 2
SortA (List 1, List 2, List 3)
Lists to be sorted (up to six can be specified)
1 2
431J K11

• Descending order
SortD (List 1, List 2, List 3)
Lists to be sorted (up to six can be specified)

k Using Solve Calculation Function in a Program

You can incorporate a solve calculation function into a program.

The following is the syntax for using the Solve function in a program.

Solve( f(x), n, a, b)
Upper limit
Lower limit
Initial estimated value
Example Program

1
Solve( 2X2 + 7X – 9, 1, 0, 1) 1
K41

• In the function f(x), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other

variables (A through Z, r, θ) are treated as constants, and the value currently
assigned to that variable is applied during the calculation.
• Input of the closing parenthesis, lower limit a and upper limit b can be omitted.
• Solutions obtained using Solve may include errors.
• Note that you cannot use a Solve, differential, quadratic differential, integration,
maximum/minimum value or Σ calculation expression inside of a Solve
calculation term.

394
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Using Calculator Functions in Programs 20- 13
k Using Statistical Calculations and Graphs in a Program
P.250 Including statistical calculations and graphing operations into program lets you
calculate and graph statistical data.

uTo set conditions and draw a statistical graph

Following “StatGraph”, you must specify the following graph conditions:
• Graph draw/non-draw status (DrawOn/DrawOff)
• Graph Type
• x-axis data location (list name)
• y-axis data location (list name)
• Frequency data location (list name)
• Mark Type
• Graph Color
CFX

The graph conditions that are required depends on the graph type. See “Changing
P.252 Graph Parameters”.
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a scatter diagram or
xyLine graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List1, List2, 1, Square, Blue _
In the case of an xy line graph, replace “Scatter” in the above specification with
“xyLine”.

• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a normal probability

plot.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, NPPlot, List1, Square, Blue _

• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a single-variable

graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Hist, List1, List2, Blue _
The same format can be used for the following types of graphs, by simply
replacing “Hist” in the above specification with the applicable graph type.
P.254 Histogram: ...................... Hist
Median Box: ................... MedBox
Mean Box: ...................... MeanBox
Normal Distribution: ........ N-Dist
Broken Line: ................... Broken

395
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 13 Using Calculator Functions in Programs

• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a regression graph.

S-Gph1 DrawOn, Linear, List1, List2, List3, Blue _
The same format can be used for the following types of graphs, by simply
replacing “Linear” in the above specification with the applicable graph type.
P.254 Linear Regression: ......... Linear
Med-Med: ....................... Med-Med
Quadratic Regression: ... Quad
Cubic Regression: .......... Cubic
Quartic Regression: ....... Quart
Logarithmic Regression: .. Log
Exponential Regression: Exp
Power Regression: ......... Power

• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a sine regression graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Sinusoidal, List1, List2, Blue _
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a logistic regression
graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Logistic, List1, List2, Blue _

1
!Z6631
2
K11
3
1JJ
4
4121J
Example Program 5
11J
ClrGraph_ 6
24J
1 7
J41
S-Wind Auto_
8
2 J51
{1, 2, 3} → List 1_ 9
3
!W621
{1, 2, 3} → List 2_
4 5 6 7 8
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List1, List2, 1, Square, Blue _
9
DrawStat

Executing this program produces the scatter

diagram shown here.

396
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Using Calculator Functions in Programs 20- 13
k Performing Statistical Calculations
• Single-variable statistical calculation
1
1-Variable List 1, List 2
Frequency data (Frequency)
x-axis data (XList)
1
4161

• Paired-variable statistical calculation

2-Variable List 1, List 2, List 3
Frequency data (Frequency)
y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)

• Regression statistical calculation

1
LinearReg List 1, List 2, List 3
Calculation Frequency data (Frequency)
type*
y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)
1
41661

* Any one of the following can be specified as the calculation type.

LinearReg ....... linear regression
Med-MedLine . Med-Med calculation
QuadReg ........ quadratic regression
CubicReg ....... cubic regression
QuartReg ........ quartic regression
LogReg ........... logarithmic regression
ExpReg .......... exponential regression
PowerReg ...... power regression

397
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 20- 13 Using Calculator Functions in Programs

• Sine regression statistical calculation

SinReg List 1, List 2
y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)

• Logistic regression statistical calculation

LogisticReg List 1, List 2
y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)

398
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Data Communications
This chapter tells you everything you need to know to transfer
programs between the CASIO Power Graphic unit and another
CASIO Power Graphic unit, connected with an optionally avail-
able SB-62 cable. To transfer data between a unit and a personal
computer, you will need to purchase the separately available
CASIO FA-123 Interface Unit.
This chapter also contains information on how to use the optional

21
SB-62 cable to connect to a CASIO Label Printer to transfer
screen data for printing.

21-1 Connecting Two Units

21-2 Connecting the Unit with a Personal Computer
21-3 Connecting the Unit with a CASIO Label Printer
21-4 Before Performing a Data Communication Operation
21-5 Performing a Data Transfer Operation
21-6 Screen Send Function
21-7 Data Communications Precautions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 21-1 Connecting Two Units
The following procedure describes how to connect two units with an optional SB-
62 connecting cable for transfer of programs between them.

uTo connect two units

1. Check to make sure that the power of both units is off.

2. Remove the covers from the connectors of the two units.

• Be sure you keep the connector covers in a safe place so you can replace
them after you finish your data communications.

3. Connect the two units using the SB-62 cable.

SB-62 cable

• Keep the connectors covered when you are not using them.

400
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 21-2 Connecting the Unit with a Personal
Computer
To transfer data between the unit and a personal computer, you must connect
them through a separately available CASIO FA-123 connection cable.

For details on operation, the types of computer that can be connected, and
hardware limitations, see the user’s manual that comes with the FA-123.
Some types of data may not be able to be exchanged with a personal computer.

uTo connect the unit with a personal computer

1. Check to make sure that the power of the unit and the personal computer is off.

2. Connect the FA-123 connection cable to the personal computer.

3. Remove the cover from the connector of the unit.

• Be sure you keep the connector cover in a safe place so you can replace it
after you finish your data communications.

4. Connect the FA-123 connection cable to the unit.

5. Turn on the power of the unit, followed by the personal computer.

• After you finish data communications, turn off power in the sequence: the unit
first, and then the personal computer. Finally, disconnect the equipment.

401
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 21-3 Connecting the Unit with a CASIO Label
Printer
After you connect the unit to a CASIO Label Printer with an optional SB-62 cable,
you can use the Label Printer to print screen shot data from the unit. See the
user’s guide that comes with your Label Printer for details on how to perform this
operation.
• The operation described above can be performed using the following Label
Printer models: KL-2000, KL-2700, KL-8200, KL-8700, KL-8800 (as of April
2001).

uTo connect the unit with a Label Printer

1. Check to make sure that the power of the unit and the Label Printer is off.

2. Connect the optional SB-62 cable to the Label Printer.

3. Remove the cover from the connector of the unit.

• Be sure you keep the connector cover in a safe place so you can replace it
after you finish your data communications.

4. Connect the other end of the SB-62 cable to the unit.

5. Turn on the power of the unit, followed by the Label Printer.

Label Printer

SB-62 cable

• After you finish data communications, turn off power in the sequence: the unit
first, and then the Label Printer. Finally, disconnect the equipment.

402
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 21-4 Before Performing a Data Communication
Operation
In the Main Menu, select the LINK icon and enter the LINK Mode. The following
data communication main menu appears on the display.

P.408 Image Set: .......... Indicates the status of the graphic image send features.
Off: Graphic images not sent.
Monochrome: Pressing M sends graphic images in
CFX monochrome.
Color: Pressing M sends graphic images in color.
Do not select "Color" for Image Set to
send data to a Label Printer.
fx-9750G
PLUS
On: Pressing M sends graphic images in
monochrome.

• {TRAN}/{RECV} ... menu of {send settings}/{receive settings}

• {IMGE} ... {menu of graphic image transfer settings}

Communication parameters are fixed at the following settings.

• Speed (BPS): 9600 bits per second
• Parity (PARITY): NONE

403
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 21-5 Performing a Data Transfer Operation
Connect the two units and then perform the following procedures.

Receiving unit
To set up the calculator to receive data, press 2 (RECV) while the data commu-
nication main menu is displayed.

The calculator enters a data receive standby mode and waits for data to arrive.
Actual data receive starts as soon as data is sent from the sending unit.

Sending unit
To set up the calculator to send data, press 1 (TRAN) while the data communi-
cation main menu is displayed.

Press the function key that corresponds to the type of data you want to send.
• {SEL} ... {selects data items and sends them}
• {CRNT} ... {selects data items from among previously selected data items and
sends them}
• {BACK} ... {all memory contents, including mode settings}

uTo send selected data items

Press 1 (SEL) or 2 (CRNT) to display a data item selection screen.

Data item

404
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Performing a Data Transfer Operation 21 - 5
• {SEL} ... {selects data item where cursor is located}
• {TRAN} ... {sends selected data items}
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the cursor to the data item you want to
select and press 1 (SEL) to select it. Currently selected data items are marked
with “'”. Pressing 6 (TRAN) sends all the selected data items.
• To deselect a data item, move the cursor to it and press 1 (SEL) again.

Only items that contain data appear on the data item selection screen. If there are
too many data items to fit on a single screen, the list scrolls when you move the
cursor to the bottom line of the items on the screen.
The following types of data items can be sent.

Overwrite Password
Data Item Contents
Check*1 Check*2

Program Program contents Yes Yes

Mat n Matrix memory (A to Z) contents Yes

List n List memory (1 to 6) contents Yes

File n List file memory (1 to 6) contents Yes

Graph expressions, graph write/

Y=Data non-write status, View Window No
contents, zoom factors
G-Mem n Graph memory (1 to 6) contents Yes

V-Win n View Window memory contents No

Picture n Picture (graph) memory (1 to 6) data No

DynaMem Dynamic Graph functions Yes

Equation Equation calculation coefficient values No

Variable Variable assignments No

F-Mem Function memory (1 to 6) contents No

*1 No overwrite check: If the receiving unit already contains the same type of data, the
existing data is overwritten with the new data.
With overwrite check: If the receiving unit already contains the same type of data, a
message appears to ask if the existing data should be overwritten with the new data.

405
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 21 - 5 Performing a Data Transfer Operation

Data item name

• {YES} ... {replaces the receiving unit’s existing data with the new data}
• {NO} ... {skips to next data item}

*2 With password check: If a file is password protected, a message appears

asking for input of the password.

Name of password protected file

Password input field

• {SYBL} ... {symbol input} 1 2 3 4 5

After inputting the password, press w.

uTo execute a send operation

After selecting the data items to send, press 6 (TRAN). A message appears to
confirm that you want to execute the send operation.

• {YES} ... {sends data}

• {NO} ... {returns to data selection screen}

Press 1 (YES) to send the data.

• You can interrupt a data operation at any time by pressing A.

406
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Performing a Data Transfer Operation 21 - 5
The following shows what the displays of the sending and receiving units look like
after the data communication operation is complete.
Sending Unit Receiving Unit

Press A to return to the data communication main menu.

uTo send backup data

This operation allows you to send all memory contents, including mode settings.
While the send data type selection menu is on the screen, press 6 (BACK), and
the back up send menu shown below appears.

Press 6 (TRAN) to start the send operation.

The following shows what the displays of the sending and receiving units look like
after the data communication operation is complete.

Sending Unit Receiving Unit

Press A to return to the data communication main menu.

• Data can become corrupted, necessitating a RESET of the receiving unit,

should the connecting cable become disconnected during data transfer.
Make sure that the cable is securely connected to both units before perform-
ing any data communication operation.

407
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 21-6 Screen Send Function
The following procedure sends a bit mapped screen shot of the display to a
connected computer.

uTo send the screen

P.402 1. Connect the unit to a personal computer or to a CASIO Label Printer.

P.403 2. In the data communication main menu, press 6 (IMGE) and the following
display appears.

* The above shows the CFX-9850

GB PLUS screen.
• {OFF} ... {graphic images not sent}
• {MONO}/{COLR} ... {monochrome}/{color} bitmap
CFX
fx-9750G
PLUS
• {ON} ... bitmap

3. Press a function key to specify either “Monochrome” or “Color” for the Image
CFX Set Mode.

4. Display the screen you want to send.

5. Set up the personal computer or Label Printer to receive data. When the other
unit is ready to receive, press M to start the send operation.

P.403 • Selecting “Monochrome” for Image Set allows data to be sent to any CASIO
Label Printer equipped with data communications capabilities.
CFX Selecting “Color” allows data to be sent to Color Label Printer models only.

You cannot send the following types of screens to a computer.

• The screen that appears while a data communication operation is in progress.
• A screen that appears while a calculation is in progress.
• The screen that appears following the reset operation.
• The low battery message.

• The flashing cursor is not included in the screen image that is sent from the
unit.
• If you send a screen shot of any of the screens that appear during the data
send operation, you will not be able to then use the sent screen to proceed
with the data send operation. You must exit the data send operation that
produced the screen you sent and restart the send operation before you can
send additional data.
• You cannot use 6mm wide tape to print a screen shot of a graph.

408
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 21-7 Data Communications Precautions
Note the following precautions whenever you perform data communications.

• An error occurs whenever you try to send data to a receiving unit that is not yet
standing by to receive data. When this happens, press A to clear the error and
try again, after setting up the receiving unit to receive data.

• An error occurs whenever the receiving unit does not receive any data approxi-
mately six minutes after it is set up to receive data. When this happens, press A
to clear the error.

• An error occurs during data communications if the cable becomes disconnected,

if the parameters of the two units do not match, or if any other communications
problem occurs. When this happens, press A to clear the error and correct the
problem before trying data communications again. If data communications are
interrupted by A key operation or an error, any data successfully received up
the interruption will be in the memory of the receiving unit.

• An error occurs if the receiving unit memory becomes full during data communi-
cations. When this happens, press A to clear the error and delete unneeded
data from the receiving unit to make room for the new data, and then try again.

• To send picture (graph) memory data, the receiving unit need 1-kbytes of memory
for use as a work area in addition to the data being received.

409
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 410
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Chapter

Program Library
1 Prime Factor Analysis
2 Greatest Common Measure
3 t-Test Value
4 Circle and Tangents
5 Rotating a Figure

Before using the Program Library

• Be sure to check how many bytes of unused memory is remain-
ing before attempting to perform any programming.

22
• This Program Library is divided into two sections: a numeric
calculation section and a graphics section. Programs in the
numeric calculation section produce results only, while graphics
programs use the entire display area for graphing. Also note
that calculations within graphics programs do not use the
multiplication sign (×) wherever it can be dropped (i.e. in front of
open parenthesis).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 PROGRAM SHEET
Program for No.
Prime Factor Analysis 1
Description
Produces prime factors of arbitrary positive integers
For 1 < m < 1010
Prime numbers are produced from the lowest value first. “END” is displayed at the
end of the program.
(Overview)
m is divided by 2 and by all successive odd numbers (d = 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, ....) to
check for divisibility.
Where d is a prime factor, mi = mi–1/d is assumed, and division is repeated until
mi + 1 < d.

Example [1]
119 = 7 × 17
[2]
440730 = 2 × 3 × 3 × 5 × 59 × 83
[3]
262701 = 3 × 3 × 17 × 17 × 101

Preparation and operation

• Store the program written on the next page.
• Execute the program as shown below.

Step Key operation Display Step Key operation Display

412
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 No.
1

Line Program
File
name P R M F A C T
1 Lbl 0 : " M " ? → A : Goto 2 :
2 Lbl 1 : 2 ^ A ÷ 2 → A : A = 1 ⇒ Goto 9 :
3 Lbl 2 : Frac ( A ÷ 2 ) = 0 ⇒ Goto 1 : 3 → B :
4 Lbl 3 : A + 1 → C :
5 Lbl 4 : B I C ⇒ Goto 8 : Frac ( A ÷ B ) = 0 ⇒
6 Goto 6 :
7 Lbl 5 : B + 2 → B : Goto 4 :
8 Lbl 6 : A ÷ B × B – A = 0 ⇒ Goto 7 : Goto 5 :
9 Lbl 7 : B ^ A ÷ B → A : Goto 3 :
10 Lbl 8 : A ^
11 Lbl 9 : " E N D " ^ Goto 0
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
A mi H O V
Memory Contents

B d I P W
C mi +1 J Q X
D K R Y
E L S Z
F M T
G N U
413
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PROGRAM SHEET
Program for No.
Greatest Common Measure 2
Description
Euclidean general division is used to determine the greatest common measure for two
interers a and b.
For |a|, |b| < 109, positive values are taken as < 1010
(Overview)
n0 = max (|a|, |b|)
n1 = min (|a|, |b|)
nk–2 nk–1
nk = nk–2 – –––
nk–1
k = 2, 3....
If nk = 0, then the greatest common measure (c) will be nk–1.

Example [1] [2] [3]

When a = 238 a = 23345 a = 522952
b = 374 b = 9135 b = 3208137866
↓ ↓ ↓
c = 34 c = 1015 c = 998

Preparation and operation

• Store the program written on the next page.
• Execute the program as shown below.

Step Key operation Display Step Key operation Display

414
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 No.
2

Line Program
File
name C M N F A C T
1 Lbl 1 : " A " ? → A : " B " ? → B :
2 Abs A → A : Abs B → B :
3 B < A ⇒ Goto 2 :
4 A → C : B → A : C → B :
5 Lbl 2 : (–) ( lnt ( A ÷ B ) × B – A ) → C :
6 C = 0 ⇒ Goto 3 :
7 B → A : C → B : Goto 2 :
8 Lbl 3 : B ^ Goto 1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
A a, n0 H O V
Memory Contents

B b, n1 I P W
C nk J Q X
D K R Y
E L S Z
F M T
G N U
415
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PROGRAM SHEET
Program for No.
t-Test Value 3
Description
The mean (sample mean) and sample standard deviation can be used to obtain a t-test
value.

t = (x – m) x
xσn–1
: mean of x data
: sample standard deviation of x data
x n–1

n n : number of data items

m : hypothetical population standard deviation (normally
represented by µ, but m is used here because of variable
name limitations)

Example To determine whether the population standard deviation for sample data 55, 54, 51,
55, 53, 53, 54, 52, is 53.
Perform a t-test with a level of significance of 5%.

Preparation and operation

• Store the program written on the next page.
• Execute the program as shown below.

Step Key operation Display Step Key operation Display

The above operation produces a t-test value of t(53) = 0.7533708035. According to the t-distribution
table in the next page, a level of significance of 5% and a degree of freedom of 7 (n – 1 = 8 – 1 = 7)
produce a two-sided t-test value of approximately 2.365. Since the calculated t-test value is lower
than the table value, the hypothesis that population mean m equals 53 is accepted.

416
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 No.
3

Line Program
File
name T T E S T
1 { 5 5 , 5 4 , 5 1 , 5 5 , 5 3 , 5 3 ,
2 5 4 , 5 2 } → List 1 _
3 l-Var List 1 , 1 _
4 Lbl 0 : " M " ? → M _
5 ( x – M ) ÷ ( xσn–1 ÷ n ) → T _
6 " T = " : T ^
7 Goto 0

A H O V
Memory Contents

B I P W
C J Q X
D K R Y
E L S Z
F M m T t
G N U
• t-distribution table
The values in the top row of the table show the probability (two-sided
probability) that the absolute value of t is greater than the table values
for a given degree of freedom.

P (Probability)
Degree 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.01
of Freedom
M :aM 1 3.078 6.314 12.706 63.657
2 1.886 2.920 4.303 9.925
T :aT 3 1.638 2.353 3.182 5.841
4 1.533 2.132 2.776 4.604
5 1.476 2.015 2.571 4.032
6 1.440 1.943 2.447 3.707
7 1.415 1.895 2.365 3.499
8 1.397 1.860 2.306 3.355
9 1.383 1.833 2.262 3.250
10 1.372 1.812 2.228 3.169
15 1.341 1.753 2.131 2.947
20 1.325 1.725 2.086 2.845
25 1.316 1.708 2.060 2.787
30 1.310 1.697 2.042 2.750
35 1.306 1.690 2.030 2.724
40 1.303 1.684 2.021 2.704
45 1.301 1.679 2.014 2.690
50 1.299 1.676 2.009 2.678
60 1.296 1.671 2.000 2.660
80 1.292 1.664 1.990 2.639
120 1.289 1.658 1.980 2.617
240 1.285 1.651 1.970 2.596
∞ 1.282 1.645 1.960 2.576

417
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PROGRAM SHEET
Program for No.
Circle and Tangents 4
Description

Formula for circle:

Y x2 + y2 = r2
A Formula for tangent line passing
(x',y') through point A (x', y'):
y – y' = m (x – x')
r * m represents the slope of
the tangent line
0 X

With this program, slope m and intercept b (= y' – mx') are obtained for lines drawn from
point A (x', y') and are tangent to a circle with a radius of r. The trace function is used to read
out the coordinates at the points of tangency, and factor zoom is used to enlarge the graph.

Example
To determine m and b for the following values:
r =1
x' = 3
y' = 2

Notes
• The point plotted for A cannot be moved. Even if it is moved on the graph, the calculation is
performed using the original value.
• An error occurs when r = x'.
• Be sure to always perform a trace operation whenever you select trace and the message
TRACE is on the display.

Preparation and operation

• Store the program written on the next page.
• Execute the program as shown below.

A H O V
Memory Contents

B I P W
C J Q X
D K R Y
E L S Z
F M T
G N U

418
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 No.
4

Line Program
File
name T A N G E N T
1 Prog " W I N D O W " _
2 " X x2 + Y x2 = R x2 _
3 R = " ? → R _
4 Prog " C I R C L E " ^
5 " ( X , Y ) _
6 X = " ? → A _
7 " Y = " ? → B _
8 Plot A , B ^
9 R x2 ( A x2 + B x2 – R x2 ) → P _
10 ( P – A B ) ( R x2 – A x2 ) x–1 → M _
11 Lbl 6 _
12 Graph Y= M ( X – A ) + B ^
13 " M = " : M ^
14 " B = " : B – M A ^
15 Lbl 0 _
16 " T R A C E ? _
17 Y E S ⇒ 1 _
18 N O ⇒ 0 " : ? → Z _
19 1 → S : Z = 1 ⇒ Goto 1 _
20 Z = 0 ⇒ Goto 2 : Goto 0 _
21 Lbl 2 _
22 ( (–) A B – P ) ( R x2 – A x2 ) x–1 → N _
23 Graph Y= N ( X – A ) + B ^
24 " M = " : N ^
25 " B = " : B – N A ^
26 Lbl 5 _
27 " T R A C E ? _
28 Y E S ⇒ 1 _
29 N O ⇒ 0 " : ? → Z _
30 2 → S : Z = 1 ⇒ Goto 1 _
31 Z = 0 ⇒ Goto 3 : Goto 5 _
32 Lbl 1 _
33 " T R A C E " ^
34 " Factor N : N = " ? → F : Factor F _
419
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 No.
4

Line Program
35 Prog " C I R C L E " : S = 1 ⇒ Goto 9 _
36 S = 2 ⇒ Graph Y= M ( X – A ) + B _
37 Graph Y= N ( X – A ) + B ^
38 Goto 3 _
39 Lbl 9 _
40 Graph Y= M ( X – A ) + B ^
41 Prog " W I N D O W " : Prog " C I R C L E "
42 : Goto 6 _
43 Lbl 3 _
44 " E N D "

File
name W I N D O W
View
1 (–) 6
Window . 3 , 6 . 3 , 1 , (–) 3 . 1 , 3 .
2 1 , 1

File
name C I R C L E
1 Graph Y= ( R x2 – X x2 ) _
2 Graph Y= (–) ( R x2 – X x2 )

420
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Program for No.
Circle and Tangents 4
Step Key Operation Display

421
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Program for No.
Circle and Tangents 4
Step Key Operation Display

10

422
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Program for No.
Circle and Tangents 4
Step Key Operation Display

11

12

13

14

15

423
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Program for No.
Circle and Tangents 4
Step Key Operation Display

16

17

18

424
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PROGRAM SHEET
Program for No.
Rotating a Figure 5
Description

Formula for coordinate transfor-

Y mation:
(x, y) → (x', y')
x' = x cos θ – y sin θ
y' = x sin θ + y cos θ

C(x3, y3)

B(x2, y2)
A(x1, y1)
0 X

Graphing of rotation of any geometric figure by θ degrees.

Example
To rotate by 45° the triangle defined by points A (2, 0.5), B (6, 0.5), and C (5, 1.5)

Notes
• Use the cursor keys to move the pointer around the display.
• To interrupt program execution, press A while the graphic screen is on the display.
• The triangle cannot be drawn if the result of the coordinate transformation operation
exceeds View Window parameters.

Preparation and operation

• Store the program written on the next page.
• Execute the program as shown below.
A x1 H y'1 O V
Memory Contents

B y1 I x'2 P W
C x2 J y'2 Q X
D y2 K x'3 R Y
E x3 L y'3 S Z
F y3 M T
G x'1 N U

425
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 No.
5
Line Program
File
name R O T A T E
View
1 Window (–) 0 . 4 , 1 2 . 2 , 1 , (–) 0 . 8 , 5
2 . 4 , 1 : Deg _
3 " ( X 1 , Y 1 ) _
4 X 1 = " ? → A _
5 " Y 1 = " ? → B _
6 Plot A , B ^
7 X → A : Y → B _
8 " ( X 2 , Y 2 ) _
9 X 2 = " ? → C _
10 " Y 2 = " ? → D _
11 Plot C , D ^
12 X → C : Y → D _
13 " ( X 3 , Y 3 ) _
14 X 3 = " ? → E _
15 " Y 3 = " ? → F _
16 Plot E , F ^
17 X → E : Y → F _
18 Lbl 1 _
19 Line : Plot A , B : Line : Plot C , D : Line ^
20 " A N G L E : Deg " ? → Q _
21 A cos Q – B sin Q → G _
22 A sin Q + B cos Q → H _
23 Plot G , H _
24 C cos Q – D sin Q → I _
25 C sin Q + D cos Q → J _
26 Plot I , J : Line _
27 E cos Q – F sin Q → K _
28 E sin Q + F cos Q → L _
29 Plot K , L : Line _
30 Plot G , H : Line ^
31 Cls : Plot C , D : Plot E , F : Goto 1
32
33
34
426
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Program for No.
Rotating a Figure 5
Step Key Operation Display

427
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Program for No.
Rotating a Figure 5
Step Key Operation Display

(Locate the pointer at X = 5)

10

Continue, repeating from step 8.

428
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix
Appendix A Resetting the Calculator
Appendix B Power Supply
Appendix C Error Message Table
Appendix D Input Ranges
Appendix E Specifications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Resetting the Calculator
Warning!
The procedure described here clears all memory contents. Never perform this
operation unless you want to totally clear the memory of the calculator. If you
need the data currently stored in memory, be sure to write it down somewhere
before performing the RESET operation.

uTo reset the calculator

F
1. Highlight the MEM icon on the main menu and then press w, or press t.

2. Use c to move the highlighting down to “Reset” and then press w.

1 2 3 4 5 6

3. Press 1 (YES) to reset the calculator or 6 (NO) to abort the operation

without resetting anything.

4. Press m.

P.11 • If the display appears to dark or dim after you reset the calculator, adjust the
contrast.

430
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Resetting the Calculator Appendix A
• If the calculator stops operating correctly for
some reason, use a thin, pointed object to
press the P button on the back of the
calculator. This should make the RESET P button
screen appear on the display. Perform the
procedure to complete the RESET operation.

• Pressing the P button while an internal calculation is being performed will

cause all data in memory to be deleted.

431
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix B Power Supply
This calculator is powered by four AAA-size (LR03 (AM4) or R03 (UM-4))
batteries. In addition, it uses a single CR2032 lithium battery as a back up power
supply for the memory.

If the following message appears on the display, immediately turn off the calculator
and replace batteries.

If you try to continue using the calculator, it will automatically turn off in order to
protect memory contents. You will not be able to turn power back on until you
replace batteries.

Be sure to replace the main batteries at least once every two years, no matter how
much you use the calculator during that time.

The batteries that come with this calculator discharge slightly during shipment and
storage. Because of this, they may require replacement sooner than the normal
expected battery life.

Warning!
All memory contents will be deleted if you remove both the main power supply
and the memory back up batteries at the same time. If you ever remove both
batteries, correctly reload them and then perform the reset operation.

k Replacing Batteries
Precautions:
Incorrectly using batteries can cause them to burst or leak, possibly damaging the
interior of the calculator. Note the following precautions:
• Be sure that the positive (+) and negative (–) poles of each battery are facing in
the proper directions.
• Never mix batteries of different types.
• Never mix old batteries and new ones.
• Never leave dead batteries in the battery
compartment.
• Remove the batteries if you do not plan
to use the calculator for long periods.
• Never try to recharge the batteries
supplied with the calculator.
• Do not expose batteries to direct heat, let them become shorted, or try to take
them apart.

432
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power Supply Appendix B
(Should a battery leak, clean out the battery compartment of the calculator
immediately, taking care to avoid letting the battery fluid come into direct
contact with your skin.)

Keep batteries out of the reach of small children. If swallowed, consult with a
physician immediately.

uTo replace the main power supply batteries

* Never remove the main power supply and the memory back up batteries
from the calculator at the same time.
* Never turn on the calculator while the main power supply batteries are
removed or not loaded correctly. Doing so can cause memory data to be
deleted and malfunction of the calculator. If mishandling of batteries causes
such problems, correctly load batteries and then perform the RESET
operation to resume normal operation.
* Be sure to replace all four batteries with new ones.

1. Press !O to turn off the calculator.

Warning!
* Be sure to turn the calculator off before replacing batteries. Replacing
batteries with power on will cause data in memory to be deleted.

2. Making sure that you do not accidently press the o key, attach the case to
the calculator and then turn it over.

3. Remove the back cover from the calculator by 1

pulling with your finger at the point marked 1.

4. Remove the four old batteries.

5. Load a new set of four batteries, making sure that

their positive (+) and negative (–) ends are facing in
the proper directions.

6. Replace the back cover.

7. Turn the calculator front side up and remove its case. BACK UP

Next, press o to turn on power.

433
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix B Power Supply

• Power supplied by memory back up battery while the main power supply
batteries are removed for replacement retains memory contents.
• Do not leave the calculator without main power supply batteries loaded for long
periods. Doing so can cause deletion of data stored in memory.
• If the figures on the display appear too light and hard to see after you turn on
power, adjust the contrast.

uTo replace the memory back up battery

* Before replacing the memory back up battery, turn on the calculator and
check to see if the “Low battery!” message appears on the display. If it does,
replace the main power supply batteries before replacing the back up power
supply battery.
* Never remove the main power supply and the memory back up batteries
from the calculator at the same time.
* Be sure to replace the back up power supply battery at least once 2 years,
regardless of how much you use the calculator during that time. Failure to do
so can cause data in memory to be deleted.

1. Press !O to turn off the calculator.

Warning!
* Be sure to turn the calculator off before replacing batteries. Replacing
batteries with power on will cause data in memory to be deleted.

2. Making sure that you do not accidently press the o key, attach the case to
the calculator and then turn it over.

3. Remove the back cover from the calculator by 1

pulling with your finger at the point marked 1.

4. Remove screw i on the back of the calculator, and

remove the back up battery compartment cover.

5. Insert a thin, pointed non-metal object

(such as a toothpick) into the hole maked j
and remove the old battery.

BACK UP

B A

434
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power Supply Appendix B
6. Wipe off the surfaces of a new battery with a soft,
dry cloth. Load it into the calculator so that its positive
(+) side is facing up.
BACK UP

7. Install the memory protection battery cover onto the

calculator and secure it in place with the screw.
Next, replace the back cover.

8. Turn the calculator front side up and remove its case. Next, press o to turn
on power.

k About the Auto Power Off Function

Calculator power turns off automatically if you do not perform any key operation
for about 6 minutes. To restore power, press o.

435
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix C Error Message Table

Message Meaning Countermeasure

Syn ERROR 1 Calculation formula contains an 1 Use d or e to display the

error. point where the error was
generated and correct it.
2 Formula in a program contains 2 Use d or e to display the point
an error. where the error was generated
and then correct the program.

Ma ERROR 1 Calculation result exceeds 1234

calculation range. Check the input numeric value
2 Calculation is outside the input and correct it.
range of a function. When using memories, check
3 Illogical operation (division by that the numeric values stored
zero, etc.) in memories are correct.
4 Poor precision in ∑ calculation
results.
5 Poor precision in differential 5 Try using a smaller value for Ax
calculation results. (x increment/decrement).
6 Poor precision in integration 6 Try changing the tolerance “tol”
calculation results. when using Gauss-Kronrod
Rule or the number of divisions
“n” when using Simpson's Rule
to another value.

7 Cannot find results of equation 7 Check the coefficients of the

calculations. equation.

Go ERROR 1 No corresponding Lbl n for 1 Correctly input a Lbl n to corres-

Goto n. pond to the Goto n , or delete
the Goto n if not required.
2 No program stored in program 2 Store a program in program
area Prog ”file name”. area Prog ”file name”, or delete
the Prog ”file name” if not
required.

Ne ERROR • Nesting of subroutines by Prog • Ensure that Prog ”file name” is

”file name” exceeds 10 levels. not used to return from
subroutines to main routine. If
used, delete any unnecessary
Prog ”file name”.
• Trace the subroutine jump
destinations and ensure that no
jumps are made back to the
original program area. Ensure
that returns are made correctly.

436
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Error Message Table Appendix C

Message Meaning Countermeasure

Stk ERROR • Execution of calculations that • Simplify the formulas to keep

exceed the capacity of the stacks within 10 levels for the
stack for numeric values or numeric values and 26 levels
stack for commands. for the commands.
• Divide the formula into two or
more parts.

Mem ERROR • Not enough memory to input a • Keep the number of variables
function into function memory. you use for the operation within
• Not enough memory to create a the number of variables
matrix using the specified currently available.
dimension. • Simplify the data you are trying
• Not enough memory to hold to store to keep it within the
matrix calculation result. available memory capacity.
• Not enough memory to store • Delete no longer needed data
data in list function. to make room for the new data.
• Not enough memory to input
coefficient for equation.
• Not enough memory to hold
equation calculation result.
• Not enough memory to hold
function input in the Graph
Mode for graph drawing.
• Not enough memory to hold
function input in the DYNA
Mode for graph drawing.
• Not enough memory to hold
function or recursion input.

Arg ERROR • Incorrect argument specification • Correct the argument.

for a command that requires an • Lbl n , Goto n : n = integer from
argument. 0 through 9.

Dim ERROR • Illegal dimension or list used • Check matrix or list dimension.
during matrix calculations.

Com ERROR • Problem with cable connection • Check cable connection.

or parameter setting during
program data communications.

Transmit • Problem with cable connection • Check cable connection.

ERROR! or parameter setting during
data communications.

Receive • Problem with cable connection • Check cable connection.

ERROR! or parameter setting during
data communications.

Memory Full! • Memory of receiving unit • Delete some data stored in the
became full during program receiving unit and try again.
data communications.

437
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix D Input Ranges

Internal
Function Input ranges Accuracy Notes
digits
As a rule, However, for tan x:
sinx (DEG) |x| < 9 × (109)°
accuracy is |x| G 90(2n+1):DEG
cosx (RAD) |x| < 5 × 107πrad 15 digits
±1 at the |x| G π/2(2n+1):RAD
tanx (GRA) |x| < 1 × 1010grad
10th digit.* |x| G 100(2n+1):GRA

sin–1x
|x| < 1
cos–1x
" "
tan–1x |x| < 1 × 10100

sinhx
|x| < 230.2585092
coshx
" "
tanhx |x| < 1 ×10100

sinh–1x |x| < 5 × 1099

cosh–1x 1< x < 5 × 1099 " "

tanh–1x |x| < 1

logx
1 × 10–99 < x < 1 × 10100
Inx " "

10x –1 × 10100 < x < 100

ex –1 × 10100 " "

< x < 230.2585092

x 0 < x < 1 × 10100

" "
x2 |x| <1 × 1050

1/x |x| < 1 × 10100, x G 0

" "
3
x |x| < 1 × 10100

x! 0 < x < 69
(x is an integer) " "

Result < 1 × 10100

n Pr n, r (n and r are integers)
nCr 0 < r < n, " "
n < 1 × 1010

Pol (x, y) x2 + y2 < 1 × 10100 " "

438
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Input Ranges Appendix D
Internal
Function Input ranges Accuracy Notes
digits
|r| < 1 × 10100 As a rule, However, for tanθ :
Rec (DEG) |θ | < 9 × (109)° accuracy is |θ | G 90(2n+1):DEG
(r ,θ) 15 digits
(RAD) |θ | < 5 × 107π rad ±1 at the |θ | G π/2(2n+1):RAD
(GRA) |θ | < 1 × 1010grad 10th digit.* |θ | G 100(2n+1):GRA

|a|, b, c < 1 × 10100

°’”
0 < b, c

|x| < 1 × 10100 " "

←
°’” Sexagesimal display:
|x| < 1 × 107

x > 0:
–1 × 10100 < y log x < 100
x=0:y>0
^ (x y) x<0:
1 (n is an integer
y = n, –––– " "
2n+1 or a fraction)
However;
–1 × 10100 < y log |x| < 100
y>0:xG0
1 logy < 100
–1 × 10100 < ––
x
y=0:x>0
x
y 1
y < 0 : x = 2n +1, ––
n " "
(n G 0, n is an integer or a
fraction)
However;
1 log |y| < 100
–1 × 10100 < –– x
Total of integer, numerator
and denominator must be
a b/c within 10 digits (includes " "
division marks).

|x| < 1 × 1050

|y| < 1 × 1050
STAT |n| < 1 × 10100 " "
xσn, yσn, x, y, a, b, c, d, e, r :
nG0
xσn–1, yσn–1: n G 0, 1

439
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix D Input Ranges

Function Input ranges

Binary, Values fall within following ranges after conversion:

octal, DEC: –2147483648 < x < 2147483647
decimal, BIN: 1000000000000000 < x
hexadecimal < 1111111111111111 (negative)
calculation 0 < x < 0111111111111111 (0, positive)
OCT: 20000000000 < x < 37777777777 (negative)
0 < x < 17777777777 (0, positive)
HEX: 80000000 < x < FFFFFFFF (negative)
0 < x < 7FFFFFFF (0, positive)

* For a single calculation, calculation error is ±1 at the 10th digit. (In the case of exponential display,
calculation error is ±1 at the last significant digit.) Errors are cumulative in the case of consecutive
calculations, which can also cause them to become large. (This is also true of internal consecutive
calculations that are performed in the case of ^(xy), x y, x!, 3 x, nPr, nCr, etc.)
In the vicinity of a function’s singular point and point of inflection, errors are cumulative and may
become large.

440
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix E Specifications
Variables: 28
Calculation range:
±1 × 10–99 to ±9.999999999 × 1099 and 0. Internal operations use 15-digit mantissa.
Exponential display range: Norm 1: 10–2 > |x|, |x| > 1010
Norm 2: 10–9 > |x|, |x| > 1010
User memory capacity: fx-9750G PLUS ....... 28,000 bytes (max.)
CFX-9850G PLUS ....... 30,000 bytes (max.)
CFX-9850GB PLUS ....... 30,000 bytes (max.)
CFX-9850GC PLUS ....... 61,000 bytes (max.)
CFX-9950GB PLUS ....... 61,000 bytes (max.)
Power supply:
Main: Four AAA-size batteries (LR03 (AM4) or R03 (UM-4))
Back-up: One CR2032 lithium battery
Power consumption: 0.06W
Approximate battery life
Main (fx-9750G PLUS):
LR03 (AM4): 420 hours (continuous display of main menu)
350 hours continuous operation (5 minutes calculation, 55
minutes display)
R03 (UM-4): 240 hours (continuous display of main menu)
200 hours continuous operation (5 minutes calculation, 55
minutes display)
Main (CFX-9850G PLUS / CFX-9850GB PLUS / CFX-9850GC PLUS
CFX-9950GB PLUS):
LR03 (AM4): 320 hours (continuous display of main menu)
280 hours continuous operation (5 minutes calculation, 55
minutes display)
R03 (UM-4): 180 hours (continuous display of main menu)
160 hours continuous operation (5 minutes calculation, 55
minutes display)
Back-up: 2 years
Auto power off:
Power is automatically turned off approximately 6 minutes after last operation
except when drawing dynamic graphs.
The calculator automatically turns off if it is left for about 60 minutes with a
calculation stopped by an output command (^), which is indicated by the “-Disp-”
message on the display.
Ambient temperature range: 0°C to 40°C
Dimensions: 24.5 mm (H) × 90.0 mm (W) × 182.5 mm (D)
15
/16" (H) × 3 9/16" (W) × 7 3/16" (D)
Weight: 215g (7.58 oz) (including batteries)

441
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Appendix E Specifications

Data Communications

Functions:
Program contents and file names; function memory data; matrix memory data; list
data; variable data; Table & Graph data; graph functions; equation calculation
coefficients

Method: Start-stop (asynchronous), half-duplex

Transmission speed (BPS): 9600 bits/second

Parity: none
Bit length: 8 bits
Stop bit:
Send: 3 bits
Receive: 2 bits
X ON/X OFF Control: None

442
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
Built in function .............................. 123, 194
Symbols
AList ....................................................... 242 C
Σ calculation ............................................. 65
Calculation execution indicator ................ 10
Σ display ............................................ 7, 224
Calculation priority sequence .................. 16
χ2 Test ............................................ 276, 289
Carriage return ...................................... 373
Cell ........................................................ 233
A
Center .................................................... 200
Absolute value ................................... 69, 96 Central difference .................................... 56
Active screen ......................................... 168 Chi-square distribution ........................... 310
Amortization of a loan ............................ 341 Clear commands ................................... 382
Analysis of variance ............................... 292 Coefficient of determination ................... 261
Analyzing a function graph .................... 145 Color tint ................................................... 11
And .......................................................... 78 Combination ............................................ 48
Angle unit ....................................... 5, 14, 44 Comment text ........................................ 164
Annual percentage rate ......................... 345 Communications parameter .................. 403
ANOVA .......................................... 277, 292 Complex numbers ................................... 67
Answer Function ...................................... 39 Compound interest calculations ............ 326
Argument ................................................. 69 Conditional jump relational operators .... 387
Arithmetic calculations ............................. 36 Confidence interval ................................ 294
Asymptotes ............................................ 202 Confidence level .................................... 294
Auto power off function .......................... 435 Conic section ......................................... 194
Auto View Window ................................. 135 CONICS Mode ....................................... 194
Axis of symmetry ................................... 202 Conjugate complex number ..................... 70
Connect type ......................................... 128
B Constant term ........................................ 261
Continuous calculations ........................... 39
Backup data ........................................... 407
Contrast .................................................... 11
Bar Graph .............................................. 257
Convergence ......................................... 225
Binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal
calculation .......................................... 74 Conversion ............................................ 345

Binomial distribution .............................. 313 Coordinate ............................................. 149

Coordinate conversion ....................... 44, 48
Bitwise operations ................................... 78
Coordinate rounding .............................. 136
Borrowing power .................................... 335
Copying a table column to a list ............. 216
Box zoom ............................................... 133
Correlation coefficient ............................ 261
BPS ....................................................... 403
Cost ....................................................... 347
Broken line graph .................................. 259
Bug ........................................................ 358 Count jump ............................................ 380

443
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
Cubic equation ....................................... 104 Ellipse .................................................... 197
Cubic regression .................................... 262 Eng .......................................................... 15
Cumulative frequency ............................ 241 Engineering notation .................... 15, 44, 50
EQUA Mode ........................................... 100
D Error message ....................................... 436
Errors ....................................................... 19
Data communications ............................ 399
Estimated values ................................... 272
Data transfer operation .......................... 404
Exponential display ........................ 9, 15, 37
Day/Date calculations ............................ 349
Exponential function ................................ 46
Debugging ............................................. 358
Exponential regression graph ................ 263
Degrees ................................................... 14
Derivative in conic section graph ............... 7
Derivative value ......................... 5, 129, 209
F
Determinant ............................................. 93 F distribution .......................................... 312
Differential calculations ............................ 55 F Test ............................................. 277, 290
Differential numeric table ....................... 209 Factor zoom ........................................... 134
Dimension ................................................ 80 Fibonacci series ..................................... 220
Directrix ................................................. 202 File name ............................................... 353
Display ....................................................... 8 Financial calculations ............................ 321
Display colors ............................................ 8 First quartile ........................................... 260
Display commands ................................ 383 Fix ...................................................... 14, 37
Display format ...................................... 6, 14 Focus ..................................................... 197
Distribution ............................................. 304 Fraction .............................................. 10, 49
Distribution probability ........................... 304 Fraction part ............................................ 96
Divergence ............................................ 225 Freehand drawing .................................. 163
Drawing a circle ..................................... 162 Frequency .............................................. 253
Drawing a line ........................................ 160 Function memory ..................................... 23
Drawing vertical and horizontal lines ..... 163 Function menu ......................................... 43
Dual screen ....................... 7, 168, 176, 215
DYNA Mode ........................................... 182 G
Dynamic graph ...................................... 181
Gauss-Kronrod rule ................................. 60
Dynamic graph locus ......................... 7, 188
Gaussian plane ........................................ 69
Dynamic graph type ........................... 7, 186
Generating a table ................................. 208
Geometric distribution ............................ 317
E Grads ....................................................... 14
Editing calculations .................................. 20 Graph axis ......................................... 6, 121
Editing list values ................................... 233 Graph axis labels ............................... 6, 121
Effective interest rate ..................... 336, 345 Graph background ............................. 6, 140
444
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
Graph drawing type ........................... 5, 128 Inverse trigonometric function ................. 45
Graph function display ....................... 6, 187 Investment appraisal ............................. 337
Graph function menu .............................. 112
Graph gridlines .................................. 6, 121 J
Graph memory ....................................... 122
Jump commands ................................... 380
GRAPH Mode ......................... 112, 168, 176
Graph pointer coordinates ................. 6, 130
Graph range adjustment ........................ 136 K
Graph solve ........................................... 143 Key markings ............................................. 2
Graphic display ........................................ 20
Graphing in a specific range .................. 131
L
Latus rectum .......................................... 200
H
Line graph color ......................................... 6
Hexadecimal values ................................ 10 Line menu .............................................. 160
Histogram .............................................. 257 Line normal to a curve ........................... 156
Hyperbola .............................................. 196 Linear equations with two to six
Hyperbolic function ............................ 27, 46 unknowns ........................................ 101
Linear recursion between three terms ... 218
I Linear recursion between two terms ...... 218
Linear regression graph ......................... 261
Icon ............................................................ 3
LinearReg t Test .................................... 287
Identity matrix .......................................... 93
LINK Mode ............................................. 403
Imaginary part .......................................... 70
List ......................................................... 229
Inactive screen ...................................... 168
List file specification ........................... 7, 248
Inequality ................................................ 118
LIST Mode ............................................. 231
Input command ...................................... 372
Loans ..................................................... 329
Input, output and operation limitations ..... 18
Local maximum values and
Input/output commands ......................... 385 local minimum values ...................... 146
Input ranges ........................................... 438 Logarithmic function ................................ 46
Inputting calculations ............................... 16 Logarithmic regression graph ................ 263
Installment savings ................................ 329 Logical operator ....................................... 51
Integer function ...................................... 137 Logistic regression graph ...................... 265
Integer part .............................................. 96 Low battery .............................................. 12
Integral ................................................... 150
Integration calculation .......................... 6, 60
M
Integration graph ................................... 127
Interest rate ........................................... 334 Main power supply batteries .................. 433

Inverse hyperbolic function ...................... 46 Main routine ........................................... 378

445
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
Making corrections .................................. 41 Normal distribution curve ....................... 258
Margin .................................................... 348 Normal probability graphing ................... 275
MAT Mode ............................................... 80 Normal probability plot ........................... 255
Matrix answer memory ............................ 80 Normal probability distribution
Matrix arithmetic operation ...................... 92 calculations ...................................... 273
Matrix cell operation ................................ 83 Normalized variate ................................. 273
Matrix data input format ........................... 88 Not ........................................................... 78
Matrix inversion ....................................... 95 Number of bytes .................................... 359
Matrix row operation ........................ 85, 389 Number of days per year
setting .................................. 7, 324, 349
Matrix transposition ................................. 94
Number system ....................................... 76
Maximum ............................................... 260
Numeric calculations ............................... 43
Maximum integer ..................................... 96
Maximum value in a list ......................... 239
Maximum/minimum value calculation ...... 63 O
Mean ...................................................... 240 Option (OPTN) menu ............................... 27
Mean of data .......................................... 259 Or ............................................................. 78
Mean-box graph .................................... 258 Outliers .................................................. 258
Med-box graph ...................................... 257 Output command ................................... 372
Med-Med graph ..................................... 261 Overflow .................................................. 19
Median ........................................... 240, 260 Overwrite ............................................... 131
Memory .................................................... 22
Memory back up battery ........................ 434
P
Memory capacity ..................................... 19
Memory status ......................................... 24 Paired-variable statistics ........................ 251

Menu item .................................................. 8 Parabola ................................................ 197

Minimum value in a list .......................... 239 Parametric function ......................... 118, 191

Mode ...................................................... 260 Parentheses ............................................ 36

Modifying matrices ................................... 90 Parity ..................................................... 403

Multiplication operation ............................ 17 Password ............................................... 360

Multi-statement command ..................... 373 Payment period setting ...................... 7, 328

Multistatements ....................................... 41 Percentage ............................................ 242

Permutation ............................................. 48
Picture memory ..................................... 139
N
Pixel ....................................................... 165
Negation .................................................. 78 Plot graph color ......................................... 6
Newton’s method ........................... 108, 328 Plot type ................................................. 128
Norm .................................................. 15, 37 Pointer ................................................... 128
Normal distribution ................................. 305 Points of intersection for two graphs ..... 148

446
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
Poisson distribution ............................... 316 RUN Mode ................................................. 4
Polar coordinate function ........................ 117
Population standard deviation ............... 259 S
Power regression graph ........................ 264
Sample standard deviation .................... 259
PRGM Mode .......................................... 352
Savings .......................................... 328, 331
Principal ................................................. 331
Scalar multiplication ................................. 93
Probability density ................................. 304
Scatter diagram ..................................... 251
Probability/distribution calculations .......... 43
Sci ............................................................ 15
Product of values ................................... 241
Scroll ...................................................... 130
Program (PRGM) menu ................... 34, 369
Secret function ....................................... 360
Program commands .............................. 373
Selling price ........................................... 348
Program control commands .................. 378
Sequence .............................................. 218
Programming ......................................... 351
Set up screen ............................................ 4
Sexagesimal operations .......................... 44
Q
Sexagesimal values ................................. 10
Quadratic differential calculation .............. 58 Significant digits ................................. 15, 36
Quadratic equation ................................ 104 Simple interest calculations ................... 324
Quadratic regression ............................. 262 Simpson’s rule ......................................... 60
Quartic regression ................................. 262 Simultaneous graphing .............................. 7
Sine regression graph ........................... 264
R Single-variable statistics ........................ 257
Sketch menu .......................................... 154
Radians ................................................... 14
Solve calculation ............................ 107, 394
Radius ................................................... 200
Sorting list values .................................. 234
Raising a matrix to a power ..................... 96
Squaring a matrix .................................... 96
Real part .................................................. 70
Stacks ...................................................... 18
Rectangular coordinate function ............. 117
STAT Mode ............................................ 250
RECUR Mode ........................................ 218
Statistical data list .................................. 250
Recursion table & graph function .. 218, 393
Statistical graph view window
Regression coefficient ........................... 261 setting .......................................... 6, 251
Regression formula parameter .............. 256 Statistical graphs and
Relational operator ................................ 370 calculations .............................. 249, 395
Replacing batteries ................................ 432 Student-t distribution .............................. 308
Replay function ........................................ 40 Subroutine ............................................. 378
RESET operation ............................. 12, 430 Sum ....................................................... 241
Residual calculation ........................... 6, 267 Sum of data ........................................... 259
Root ....................................................... 145 Sum of squares ..................................... 259
Row swapping ......................................... 83 Symbol ‘‘t’’ ............................................. 21
447
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index

T Y
t confidence interval ............................... 300 y-intercepts ............................................ 147
t Test .............................................. 276, 283
Table & graph ........................................ 205 Z
Table generation and graph draw
settings ........................................ 7, 208 Z confidence interval .............................. 295
TABLE Mode .......................................... 206 Z Test ............................................. 276, 277
Table range ............................................ 207 Zoom ..................................................... 132
Tangent .................................................. 155
Tests ...................................................... 276
Text display ...................................... 20, 388
Third quartile .......................................... 260
Trace ...................................................... 128
Trigonometric function ............................. 45
TVM Mode ............................................. 323
Type A functions ...................................... 16
Type B functions ...................................... 16

V
Variable .............................................. 22, 38
Variable data (VARS) menu ..................... 28
Vertex .................................................... 197
View Window .......................................... 113

W
WEB graph ............................................ 225
Whiskers ................................................ 257

X
X = constant expression ......................... 118
Xnor ......................................................... 78
Xor ........................................................... 78
xy line graph .......................................... 255

448
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Command Index
Break ..................................................................................... 378
ClrGraph ................................................................................ 382
ClrList .................................................................................... 382
ClrText ................................................................................... 382
DispF-Tbl, DispR-Tbl ............................................................. 383
Do~LpWhile ........................................................................... 377
DrawDyna ............................................................................. 383
DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt ................................................ 383
DrawGraph ............................................................................ 383
DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt ......................................................... 384
DrawRΣ-Con, DrawRΣ-Plt ..................................................... 384
DrawStat ............................................................................... 384
DrawWeb ............................................................................... 384
Dsz ........................................................................................ 380
For~To~Next ......................................................................... 375
For~To~Step~Next ................................................................ 376
Getkey ................................................................................... 385
Goto~Lbl ................................................................................ 380
If~Then .................................................................................. 373
If~Then~Else ......................................................................... 374
If~Then~Else~IfEnd .............................................................. 375
If~Then~IfEnd ....................................................................... 374
Isz .......................................................................................... 381
Locate ................................................................................... 385
Prog ....................................................................................... 378
Receive ( ............................................................................... 386
Return ................................................................................... 379
Send ( .................................................................................... 387
Stop ....................................................................................... 379
While~WhileEnd .................................................................... 377
? (Input Command) ............................................................... 372
^ (Output Command) ........................................................... 372
: (Multi-statement Command) ................................................ 373
_ (Carriage Return) ............................................................. 373
⇒ (Jump Code) ..................................................................... 381
=, G, >, <, ≥, ≤ (Relational Operators) ................................... 387

449
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Key Index

Key Primary Function combined with ! combined with

a
Trace Turns trace function on/off.
1 Selects 1st function menu item.
Zoom Turns zoom function on.
2 Selects 2nd function menu item.
Displays View Window parameter
V-Window
input screen.
3 Select 3rd function menu item.
Sketch Displays sketch menu.
4 Selects 4th function menu item.
G-Solv Displays graph solve menu.
5 Selects 5th function menu item.
Switches display between graph
G↔T
& text screens.
6 Selects 6th function menu item.
Activates shift functions of other
! keys and function menus.
K Displays option menu.
PRGM Displays program command
Displays the variable data menu.
J menu.
SET UP
Returns to the Main Menu. Shows the set up display.
m
Allows entry of alphanumeric
A -LOCK Locks/Unlocks entry of
a characters shown in red. alphanumeric characters.
r Press after entering value to Press before entering value Enters
x calculate square. to calculate square root. character r.
Press between two values to Press between entering
x
θ Enters
make second value exponent of values for X & Y to show xth
M character θ .
first. root of y.
QUIT Returns directly to initial
Backsteps to the previous menu.
J screen of the mode.
Moves cursor upward. Switches to previous
f Scrolls screen. function in trace mode.
Moves cursor downward. Switches to next function in
c Scrolls screen. trace mode.
Moves cursor to left. Scrolls
d screen. Press after EXE to display
calculation from end.

450
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Key Index

Key Primary Function combined with ! combined with

a
Moves cursor to right. Scrolls
e screen. Press after EXE to display
calculation from beginning.
A Allows input of variable X, θ , and
Enters letter A.
v T.
10 x B Press before entering value to Press before entering
Enters letter B.
l calculate common logalithm. exponent value of 10.
ex C Press before entering value to Press before entering
Enters letter C.
I calculate natural logarithm. exponent value of e.
sin–1 D Press before entering value to Press before entering value
Enters letter D.
s calculate sine. to calculate inverse sine.
cos–1 E Press before entering value to Press before entering value
Enters letter E.
c calculate cosine. to calculate inverse cosine.
tan–1 F Press before entering value to Press before entering value
Enters letter F.
t calculate tangent. to calculate inverse tangent.
Press between entering fraction
d/c G
values. Displays improper fractions. Enters letter G.
$ Converts fraction to decimal.
Converts a fraction to a decimal
value or a decimal value to a
H
fraction. Enters letter H.
M Sends a shot of the current screen
to a connected device.
3
I Enters open parenthesis in Press before entering value
Enters letter I.
( formula. to calculate cube root.
x –1 J Enters close parenthesis in Press after entering value to
Enters letter J.
) formula. calculate reciprocal.
K
Enters comma. Enters letter K.
,
L Assigns value to a value memory
Enters letter L.
a name.
M
Enters number 7. Enters letter M.
h
N
Enters number 8. Enters letter N.
i
O
Enters number 9. Enters letter O.
j

451
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Key Index
combined with
Key Primary Function combined with !
a
Allows insertion of
INS Deletes character at current
characters at cursor
D cursor location.
location.
Turns power on.
OFF
Turns power off.
o Clears the display.
P
Enters number 4. Enters letter P.
e
Q
Enters number 5. Enters letter Q.
f
R
Enters number 6. Enters letter R.
g
{ S
Multiplication function. Enters open curly bracket. Enters letter S.
*
} T
Division function. Enters close curly bracket. Enters letter T.
/
U
Enters number 1. Enters letter U.
b
V
Enters number 2. Enters letter V.
c
W
Enters number 3. Enters letter W.
d
[ X Addition function.
Enters open bracket. Enters letter X.
+ Specifies positive value.
] Y Subtraction function.
Enters close bracket. Enters letter Y.
- Specifies negative value.
Z
Enters number 0. Enters letter Z.
a
= SPACE Enters a blank
Enters decimal point. Enters character =.
. space.
π Inputs value of pi.
Allows entry of exponent.
E Enters pi symbol.
Ans Enter before value to specify as Recalls most recent
- negative. calculation result.
_
Displays result of calculation. Inputs a new line.
w

452
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Program Mode Command List
[SETUP] key [VARS] key PTS x1 x1 RECR FORM an an
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Command y1 y1 an+1 an+1
ANGL Deg Deg V-WIN X min Xmin x2 x2 an+2 an+2
Rad Rad max Xmax y2 y2 bn bn
Gra Gra scal Xscl x3 x3 bn+1 bn+1
COOR On CoordOn Y min Ymin y3 y3 bn+2 bn+2
Off CoordOff max Ymax TEST n n RANG Strt R_Start
GRID On GridOn scal Yscl x x End R_End
Off GridOff T, θ min Tθ min xσn-1 xσn-1 a0 a0
AXES On AxesOn max Tθ max n1 n1 a1 a1
Off AxesOff ptch Tθ ptch n2 n2 a2 a2
LABL On LabelOn R-X min RightXmin x1 x1 b0 b0
Off LabelOff max RightXmax x2 x2 b1 b1
DISP Fix Fix_ scal RightXscl x1σ x1σn-1 b2 b2
Sci Sci_ R-Y min RightYmin x2σ x2σn-1 anSt anStart
Norm Norm max RightYmax xpσ xpσn-1 bnSt bnStart
Eng Eng scal RightYscl F F Reslt R_Result
P/L Blue P/L-Blue R-T, θ min RightTθ min Fdf Fdf EQUA S-Rlt Sim_Result
Orng P/L-Orange max RightTθ max SS SS S-Cof Sim_Coef
Grn P/L-Green ptch RightTθ ptch MS MS P-Rlt Ply_Result
DRAW Con G-Connect FACT Xfct Xfct Edf Edf P-Cof Ply_Coef
Plot G-Plot Yfct Yfct SSe SSe TVM n n
DERV On DerivOn STAT X n n MSe MSe I% I%
Off DerivOff x x RESLT p p PV PV
BACK None BG-None Σx Σx z z PMT PMT
Pict BG-Pict_ Σx2 Σx2 t t FV FV
FUNC On FuncOn xσn xσn Chi χ2 P/Y P/Y
Off FuncOff xσn-1 xσn-1 F F C/Y C/Y
SIML On SimulOn minX minX Left Left
Off SimulOff maxX maxX Right Right
S-WIN Auto S-WindAuto Y y y p̂ p̂
Man S-WindMan Σy Σy p̂1 p̂1
LIST File1 File1 Σy2 Σy2 p̂2 p̂2
File2 File2 Σxy Σxy df df
File3 File3 yσn yσn s s
File4 File4 yσn-1 yσn-1 r r
File5 File5 minY minY r2 r2
File6 File6 maxY maxY GRPH Y Y
LOCS On LocusOn GRPH a a r r
Off LocusOff b b Xt Xt
T-VAR Rang VarRange c c Yt Yt
LIST List1 VarList1 d d X X
List2 VarList2 e e DYNA Strt D_Start
List3 VarList3 r r End D_End
List4 VarList4 Q1 Q1 Pitch D_pitch
List5 VarList5 Med Med TABL Strt F_Start
List6 VarList6 Q3 Q3 End F_End
Σ DSP On Σ dispOn Mod Mod Pitch F_pitch
Off Σ dispOff Strt H_Start Reslt F_Result
RESID None Resid-None Pitch H_pitch
List Resid-List_

453
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 [PRGM] key [SHIFT] key [F4](MENU) key LIST Srt-A SortA(
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Command Srt-D SortD(
COM If If_ ZOOM Fact Factor_ STAT DRAW On DrawOn GRPH SEL On G_SelOn_
Then Then_ V-WIN V-Win ViewWindow_ Off DrawOff Off G_SelOff_
Else Else_ Sto StoV-Win_ GRPH GPH1 S-Gph1_ TYPE Y= Y=Type
I-End IfEnd Rcl RclV-Win_ GPH2 S-Gph2_ r= r=Type
For For_ SKTCH Cls Cls GPH3 S-Gph3_ Parm ParamType
To _To_ Tang Tangent_ Scat Scatter X=c X=cType
Step _Step_ Norm Normal_ xy xyLine Y> Y>Type
Next Next Inv Inverse_ Hist Hist Y< Y<Type
Whle While_ GRPH Y= Graph_Y= Box MedBox Y≥ Y≥Type
WEnd WhileEnd r= Graph_r= Box MeanBox Y≤ Y≤Type
Do Do Parm Graph(X,Y)=( N-Dis N-Dist COLR Blue BlueG_
Lp-W LpWhile_ X=c Graph_X= Brkn Broken Orng OrangeG_
CTL Prog Prog_ G-∫ dx Graph_ ∫ X Linear Grn GreenG_
Rtrn Return Y> Graph_Y> Med Med-Med GMEM Sto StoGMEM_
Brk Break Y< Graph_Y< X^2 Quad Rcl RclGMEM_
Stop Stop Y≥ Graph_Y≥ X^3 Cubic DYNA On D_SelOn_
JUMP Lbl Lbl_ Y≤ Graph_Y≤ X^4 Quart Off D_SelOff_
Goto Goto_ PLOT Plot Plot_ Log Log Var D_Var_
⇒ ⇒ Pl-On PlotOn_ Exp Exp TYPE Y= Y=Type
Isz Isz_ Pl-Off PlotOff_ Pwr Power r= r=Type
Dsz Dsz_ Pl-Chg PlotChg_ Sin Sinusoidal Parm ParamType
? ? LINE Line Line NPP NPPlot TABL On T_SelOn_
^ ^ F-Line F-Line_ Lgst Logistic Off T_SelOff_
CLR Text ClrText Crcl Circle_ LIST List1 List1 TYPE Y= Y=Type
Grph ClrGraph Vert Vertical_ List2 List2 r= r=Type
List ClrList Hztl Horizontal_ List3 List3 Parm ParamType
DISP Stat DrawStat Text Text_ List4 List4 Blue BlueG_
Grph DrawGraph PIXL On PxlOn_ List5 List5 Orng OrangeG_
Dyna DrawDyna Off PxlOff_ List6 List6 Grn GreenG_
F-Tbl Tabl DispF-Tbl Chg PxlChg_ MARK Square RECR SEL+C On R_SelOn_
G-Con DrawFTG-Con Test PxlTest_ Cross Off R_SelOff_
G-Plt DrawFTG-Plt • Dot Blue BlueG_
R-Tbl Tabl DispR-Tbl COLR Blue Blue_ Orng OrangeG_
Web DrawWeb_ Orng Orange_ Grn GreenG_
an-Cn DrawR-Con Grn Green_ SEL On R_SelOn_
(fx-9750G
Σa-Cn DrawR Σ-Con CALC 1VAR 1-Variable_ PLUS) Off R_SelOff_
an-Pl DrawR-Plt 2VAR 2-Variable_ TYPE an anType
Σa-Pl DrawR Σ -Plt X LinearReg_ an+1 an+1Type
REL = = Med Med-MedLine_ an+2 an+2Type
G G X^2 QuadReg_ n.an.. n n
> > X^3 CubicReg_ an an
< < X^4 QuartReg_ an+1 an+1
≥ ≥ Log LogReg_ bn bn
≤ ≤ Exp ExpReg_ bn+1 bn+1
I/O Lcte Locate_ Pwr PowerReg_
Gtky Getkey Sin SinReg_
Send Send( Lgst LogisticReg_
Recv Receive( MAT Swap Swap_
: : ×Rw *Row_
×Rw+ *Row+_
Rw+ Row+_

454
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 [F6](SYBL) key [ALPHA] key [OPTN] key PROB X! !
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Command nPr P
' ' ' ' LIST List List_ nCr C
" " " " L→M List→Mat( Ran# Ran#
~ ~ ~ ~ Dim Dim_ P( P(
* * Fill Fill( Q( Q(
/ / Seq Seq( R( R(
Min Min( t( t(
Max Max( NUM Abs Abs_
Mean Mean( Int Int_
Med Median( Frac Frac_
Sum Sum_ Rnd Rnd
Prod Prod_ Intg Intg_
Cuml Cuml_ ANGL
% Percent_ r r
A AList_ g g
MAT Mat Mat_ '"
M→L Mat→List( Pol( Pol(
Det Det_ Rec( Rec(
Trn Trn_ ESYM m m
Aug Augment( µ µ
Iden Identity_ n n
Dim Dim_ p p
Fill Fill( f f
CPLX i i k k
Abs Abs_ M M
Arg Arg_ G G
Conj Conjg_ T T
ReP ReP_ P P
ImP ImP_ E E
CALC Solve Solve( PICT Sto StoPict_
d/dx d/dx( Rcl RclPict_
d2/dx2 d2/dx2( FMEM fn f1 f1
∫ dx ∫( f2 f2
FMin FMin( f3 f3
FMax FMax( f4 f4
Σ( Σ( f5 f5
STAT ˆx x̂ f6 f6
ŷ ŷ LOGIC And _And_
COLR Orng Orange_ Or _Or_
Grn Green_ Not Not_
HYP sinh sinh_
cosh cosh_
tanh tanh_
sinh-1 sinh-1_
cosh-1 cosh-1_
-1
tanh tanh-1_

455
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 456
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 GUIDELINES LAID DOWN BY FCC RULES FOR USE OF THE UNIT IN THE U.S.A. (not appli-
cable to other areas).

NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-
tion against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Proper connectors must be used for connection to host computer and/or peripherals in order to
meet FCC emission limits.

Connector SB-62 Power Graphic Unit to Power Graphic Unit

Connector FA-123 Power Graphic Unit to PC for IBM/Macintosh Machine

Declaration of Conformity
Model Number: fx-9750G PLUS/CFX-9850G PLUS/CFX-9850GB PLUS/CFX-9950GB PLUS
Trade Name: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
Responsible party: CASIO, INC.
Address: 570 MT. PLEASANT AVENUE, DOVER, NEW JERSEY 07801
Telephone number: 973-361-5400
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 G355-21, G356-21, G357-21, G359-21

CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.

6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine